Skip to main content

Full text of "SP 7 : Group 3: NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2005 GROUP 3"

See other formats


**************** 


^  tOTH: 


Disclosure  to  Promote  the  Right  To  Information 

Whereas  the  Parliament  of  India  has  set  out  to  provide  a  practical  regime  of  right  to 
information  for  citizens  to  secure  access  to  information  under  the  control  of  public  authorities, 
in  order  to  promote  transparency  and  accountability  in  the  working  of  every  public  authority, 
and  whereas  the  attached  publication  of  the  Bureau  of  Indian  Standards  is  of  particular  interest 
to  the  public,  particularly  disadvantaged  communities  and  those  engaged  in  the  pursuit  of 
education  and  knowledge,  the  attached  public  safety  standard  is  made  available  to  promote  the 
timely  dissemination  of  this  information  in  an  accurate  manner  to  the  public. 


Mazdoor  Kisan  Shakti  Sangathan 
"The  Right  to  Information,  The  Right  to  Live" 


Jawaharlal  Nehru 
"Step  Out  From  the  Old  to  the  New"  ' 


SP  7  :  Group  3  (2005) :  NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA  2005 
GROUP  3  [CED  46:  National  Building  Code] 


Satyanarayan  Gangaram  Pitroda 
Invent  a  New  India  Using  Knowledge 


Bhartrhari — Nitisatakam 
"Knowledge  is  such  a  treasure  which  cannot  be  stolen" 


BLANK  PAGE 


^*-:gv 


^^35^* 


PROTECTED  BY  COPYRIGHT 


W^  ^  Wl^  «|ePI  Pwtui  ^rf^  2005 

NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE 
OF  INDIA  2005 

Group  3 


NATIONAL 

BUILDING 

CODE  OF  INDIA 

2005 


GROUP  3 


PART  0       INTEGRATED  APPROACH  —  PREREQUISITE  FOR  APPLYING 
PROVISIONS  OF  THE  CODE 

PART  7        CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


BUREAU  OF  INDIAN  STANDARDS 


SP  7  (Group  3) :  2005 


FIRST  PUBLISHED  1970 
FIRST  REVISION  1983 
SECOND  REVISION  2005 

©  BUREAU  OF  INDIAN  STANDARDS 

ICS  0.120;  91.040.01 
ISBN  81-7061-026-5 


PRICE  Rs.  1080.00 


PUBLISHED  BY  BUREAU  OF  INDIAN  STANDARDS,  MANAK  BHAVAN,  9  BAHADUR  SHAH  ZAFAR 
MARG,  NEW  DELHI  110  002,  PRINTED  AT  SUNSHINE  PROCESS,  C- 105/5,  NARAINA  INDUSTRIAL 
AREA,  PHASE  I,  NEW  DELHI  110  028  (INDIA). 

BIS  Website:  www.bis.org.in 

(iv) 


FOREWORD 

Construction  programmes  are  interwoven  in  a  large  measure  in  all  sectors  of  development,  be  it  housing,  transport, 
industry,  irrigation,  power,  agriculture,  education  or  health.  Construction,  both  public  and  private,  accounts  for 
about  fifty  percent  of  the  total  outlay  in  any  Five  Year  Plan.  Half  of  the  total  money  spent  on  construction 
activities  is  spent  on  buildings  for  residential,  industrial,  commercial,  administrative,  education,  medical,  municipal 
and  entertainment  uses.  It  is  estimated  that  about  half  of  the  total  outlay  on  buildings  would  be  on  housing.  It  is 
imperative  that  for  such  a  large  national  investment,  optimum  returns  are  assured  and  wastage  in  construction  is 
avoided. 

Soon  after  the  Third  Plan,  the  Planning  Commission  decided  that  the  whole  gamut  of  operations  involved  in 
construction,  such  as,  administrative,  organizational,  financial  and  technical  aspects,  be  studied  in  depth.  For  this 
study,  a  Panel  of  Experts  was  appointed  in  1965  by  the  Planning  Commission  and  its  recommendations  are  found 
in  the  'Report  on  Economies  in  Construction  Costs'  published  in  1968. 

One  of  the  facets  of  building  construction,  namely,  controlling  and  regulating  buildings  through  municipal  byelaws 
and  departmental  handbooks  received  the  attention  of  the  Panel  and  a  study  of  these  regulatory  practices  revealed 
that  some  of  the  prevailing  methods  of  construction  were  outmoded;  some  designs  were  overburdened  with 
safety  factors  and  there  were  other  design  criteria  which,  in  the  light  of  newer  techniques  and  methodologies, 
could  be  rationalized;  and  building  byelaws  and  regulations  of  municipal  bodies  which  largely  regulate  the 
building  activity  in  the  country  wherever  they  exist,  were  outdated.  They  did  not  cater  to  the  use  of  new  building 
materials  and  the  latest  developments  in  building  designs  and  construction  techniques.  It  also  became  clear  that 
these  codes  and  byelaws  lacked  uniformity  and  they  were  more  often  than  not  'specification  oriented'  and  not 
'performance  oriented' . 

These  studies  resulted  in  a  recommendation  that  a  National  Building  Code  be  prepared  to  unify  the  building 
regulations  throughout  the  country  for  use  by  government  departments,  municipal  bodies  and  other  construction 
agencies.  The  then  Indian  Standards  Institution  (now  Bureau  of  Indian  Standards)  was  entrusted  by  the  Planning 
Commission  with  the  preparation  of  the  National  Building  Code.  For  fulfilling  this  task  a  Guiding  Committee  for 
the  preparation  of  the  Code  was  set  up  by  the  Civil  Engineering  Division  Council  of  the  Indian  Standards  Institution 
in  1967.  This  Committee,  in  turn,  set  up  18  specialist  panels  to  prepare  the  various  parts  of  the  Code.  The 
Guiding  Committee  and  its  panels  were  constituted  with  architects,  planners,  materials  experts,  structural, 
construction,  electrical  illumination,  air  conditioning,  acoustics  and  public  health  engineers  and  town  planners. 
These  experts  were  drawn  from  the  Central  and  State  Governments,  local  bodies,  professional  institutions  and 
private  agencies.  The  first  version  of  the  Code  was  published  in  1970. 

After  the  National  Building  Code  of  India  was  published  in  1970,  a  vigorous  implementation  drive  was  launched 
by  the  Indian  Standards  Institution  to  propagate  the  contents  and  use  of  the  Code  among  all  concerned  in  the  field 
of  planning,  designing  and  construction  activities.  For  this,  State-wise  Implementation  Conferences  were  organized 
with  the  participation  of  the  leading  engineers,  architects,  town  planners,  administrators,  building  material 
manufacturers,  building  and  plumbing  services  installation  agencies,  contractors,  etc. 

These  Conferences  were  useful  in  getting  across  the  contents  of  the  Code  to  the  interests  concerned.  These 
Conferences  had  also  helped  in  the  establishment  of  Action  Committees  to  look  into  the  actual  implementation 
work  carried  out  by  the  construction  departments,  local  bodies  and  other  agencies  in  different  States.  The  main 
actions  taken  by  the  Action  Committees  were  to  revise  and  modernize  their  existing  regulatory  media,  such  as, 
specifications,  handbooks,  manuals,  etc,  as  well  as  building  byelaws  of  local  bodies  like  municipalities  at  city 
and  town  levels,  zilla  parishads,  panchayats  and  development  authorities,  so  as  to  bring  them  in  line  with  the 
provisions  contained  in  the  National  Building  Code  of  India.  In  this  process,  the  Indian  Standards  Institution 
rendered  considerable  support  in  redrafting  process. 

Since  the  publication  in  1970  version  of  the  National  Building  Code  of  India,  a  large  number  of  comments  and 
useful  suggestions  for  modifications  and  additions  to  different  parts  and  sections  of  the  Code  were  received  as  a 
result  of  use  of  the  Code  by  all  concerned,  and  revision  work  of  building  byelaws  of  some  States.  Based  on  the 
comments  and  suggestion  received  the  National  Building  Code  of  India  1970  was  revised  in  1983. 


(V) 


Some  of  the  important  changes  in  1983  version  included  :  addition  of  development  control  rules,  requirements 
for  greenbelts  and  landscaping  including  norms  for  plantation  of  shrubs  and  trees,  special  requirements  for  low 
income  housing;  fire  safety  regulations  for  high  rise  buildings;  revision  of  structural  design  section  based  on  new 
and  revised  codes,  such  as  Concrete  Codes  (plain  and  reinforced  concrete  and  prestressed  concrete).  Earthquake 
Code,  Masonry  Code;  addition  of  outside  design  conditions  for  important  cities  in  the  country,  requirements 
relating  to  noise  and  vibration,  air  filter,  automatic  control,  energy  conservation  for  air  conditioning;  and  guidance 
on  the  design  of  water  supply  system  for  multi- storey ed  buildings. 

The  National  Building  Code  of  India  is  a  single  document  in  which,  like  a  network,  the  information  contained  in 
various  Indian  Standards  is  woven  into  a  pattern  of  continuity  and  cogency  with  the  interdependent  requirements 
of  Sections  carefully  analyzed  and  fitted  in  to  make  the  whole  document  a  cogent  continuous  volume.  A  continuous 
thread  of  'preplanning'  is  woven  which,  in  itself,  contributes  considerably  to  the  economies  in  construction 
particularly  in  building  and  plumbing  services. 

The  Code  contains  regulations  which  can  be  immediately  adopted  or  enacted  for  use  by  various  departments, 
municipal  administrations  and  public  bodies.  It  lays  down  a  set  of  minimum  provisions  designed  to  protect  the 
safety  of  the  public  with  regard  to  structural  sufficiency,  fire  hazards  and  health  aspects  of  buildings;  so  long  as 
these  basic  requirements  are  met,  the  choice  of  materials  and  methods  of  design  and  construction  is  left  to  the 
ingenuity  of  the  building  professionals.  The  Code  also  covers  aspects  of  administrative  regulations,  development 
control  rules  and  general  building  requirements;  fire  protection  requirements;  stipulations  regarding  materials 
and  structural  design;  rules  for  design  of  electrical  installations,  lighting,  air  conditioning  and  lifts;  regulation  for 
ventilation,  acoustics  and  plumbing  services,  such  as,  water  supply,  drainage,  sanitation  and  gas  supply;  measures 
to  ensure  safety  of  workers  and  public  during  construction;  and  rules  for  erection  of  signs  and  outdoor  display 
structures. 

Some  other  important  points  covered  by  the  Code  include  'industrialized  systems  of  building'  and  'architectural 
control'.  The  increase  in  population  in  the  years  to  come  will  have  a  serious  impact  on  the  housing  problem.  It 
has  been  estimated  that  the  urban  population  of  India  will  continue  to  increase  with  such  pace  as  to  maintain  the 
pressure  on  demand  of  accommodation  for  them.  Speed  of  construction  is  thus  of  an  utmost  importance  and 
special  consideration  has  to  be  given  to  industrialized  systems  of  building.  With  increased  building  activity,  it  is 
also  essential  that  there  should  be  some  architectural  control  in  the  development  of  our  cities  and  towns  if 
creation  of  ugliness  and  slum- like  conditions  in  our  urban  areas  is  to  be  avoided. 

Since  the  publication  of  1983  version  of  National  Building  Code  of  India,  the  construction  industry  has  gone 
through  major  technological  advancement.  In  the  last  two  decades,  substantial  expertise  has  been  gained  in  the 
areas  of  building  planning,  designing  and  construction.  Also,  lot  of  developments  have  taken  places  in  the  techno- 
legal  regime  and  techno-financial  regime,  apart  from  the  enormous  experience  gained  in  dealing  with  natural 
calamities  like  super  cyclones  and  earthquakes  faced  by  the  country.  Further,  since  the  last  revision  in  1983 
based  on  the  changes  effected  in  the  Steel  Code,  Masonry  Code  and  Loading  Code  as  also  in  order  to  update  the 
fire  protection  requirements,  three  amendments  were  brought  out  to  the  1983  version  of  the  Code.  Considering 
these,  it  was  decided  to  take  up  a  comprehensive  revision  of  the  National  Building  Code  of  India. 

The  changes  incorporated  in  the  present  Code,  which  is  second  revision  of  the  Code,  have  been  specified  in  the 
Foreword  to  each  Part/Section  of  the  Code.  Some  of  the  important  changes  are: 

a)  A  new  Part  0  'Integrated  Approach  —  Prerequisite  for  Applying  the  Provisions  of  the  Code'  emphasizing 
on  multi-disciplinary  team  approach  for  successfully  accomplishing  building/development  project,  has 
been  incorporated. 

b)  New  chapters  on  significant  areas  like  structural  design  using  bamboo,  mixed/composite  construction 
and  landscaping  have  been  added. 

c)  Number  of  provisions  relating  to  reform  in  administration  of  the  Code  as  also  assigning  duties  and 
responsibilities  to  all  concerned  professionals,  have  been  incorporated/modified.  Also  detailed  provisions/ 
performance  to  ensure  structural  sufficiency  of  buildings,  have  been  prescribed  so  as  to  facilitate 
implementation  of  the  related  requirements  to  help  safely  face  the  challenges  during  natural  disasters 
like  earthquake. 

d)  Planning  norms  and  requirements  for  hilly  areas  and  rural  habitat  planning,  apart  from  detailed  planning 
norms  for  large  number  of  amenities  have  been  incorporated. 

e)  Fire  safety  aspects  have  been  distinctly  categorized  into  fire  prevention,  life  safety  and  fire  protection 

(vi) 


giving  detailed  treatment  to  each  based  on  current  international  developments  and  latest  practices  followed 
in  the  country. 

f)  Aspects  like  energy  conservation  and  sustainable  development  have  been  consistently  dealt  with  in 
various  parts  and  sections  through  appropriate  design,  usage  and  practices  with  regard  to  building 
materials,  construction  technologies  and  building  and  plumbing  services.  Renewable  resources  like 
bamboo  and  practices  like  rain  water  harvesting  have  been  given  their  due  place. 

g)  The  latest  revised  earthquake  code,  IS  1893  (Part  1)  :  2002  'Criteria  for  earthquake  resistant  design  of 
structures:  Part  1  General  provisions  and  buildings',  has  been  incorporated,  due  implementation  of  the 
provisions  of  which  in  applicable  seismic  zone  of  the  country,  needs  to  be  duly  adhered  to  by  the 
Authorities. 

The  Code  now  published  is  the  third  version  representing  the  present  state  of  knowledge  on  various  aspects  of 
building  construction.  The  process  of  preparation  of  the  2005  version  of  the  Code  had  thrown  up  a  number  of 
problems;  some  of  them  were  answered  fully  and  some  partially.  Therefore,  a  continuous  programme  will  go  on 
by  which  additional  knowledge  that  is  gained  through  technological  evolution,  users'  views  over  a  period  of  time 
pinpointing  areas  of  clarification  and  coverage  and  results  of  research  in  the  field,  would  be  incorporated  in  to 
the  Code  from  time  to  time  to  make  it  a  living  document.  It  is,  therefore,  proposed  to  bring  out  changes  to  the 
Code  periodically. 

The  provisions  of  this  Code  are  intended  to  serve  as  a  model  for  adoption  by  Public  Works  Departments  and 
other  government  construction  departments,  local  bodies  and  other  construction  agencies.  Existing  PWD  codes, 
municipal  byelaws  and  other  regulatory  media  could  either  be  replaced  by  the  National  Building  Code  of  India 
or  suitably  modified  to  cater  to  local  requirements  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  the  Code.  Any  difficulties 
encountered  in  adoption  of  the  Code  could  be  brought  to  the  notice  of  the  Sectional  Committee  for  corrective 
action. 


This  publication  forms  part  of  the  National  Building  Code  of  India  2005  and  contains 
the  following  Parts: 

PART  0    INTEGRATED  APPROACH  —  PREREQUISITE  FOR  APPLYING 
PROVISIONS  OF  THE  CODE 

PART  7    CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 

The  provisions  contained  in  this  publication  which  would  guide  the  concerned 
professionals  in  the  field  to  execute  the  various  constructional  operations  in  a  safe  and 
efficient  manner. 


(vii) 


National  Building  Code  Sectional  Committee,  CED  46 


Chairman 

Dr  H.  C.  ViSVESVARAYA 

'Chandrika',  at  15th  Cross,  63-64  East  Park  Road 
Malleswaram,  Bangalore  560  003 

Vice-Chairman 

ShRI  V.  SURESH 

P-233/3,  Officers  Enclave, 
Air  Force  Station,  Rajokari,  New  Delhi  1 10  038 


Organization 
Ahmedabad  Municipal  Corporation,  Ahmedabad 

Bangalore  Mahanagara  Palike,  Bangalore 

Builders  Association  of  India,  Mumbai 

Building  Materials  and  Technology  Promotion  Council,  New  Delhi 
Bureau  of  Energy  Efficiency  (Ministry  of  Power),  New  Delhi 
Central  Building  Research  Institute  (CSIR),  Roorkee 

Central  Public  Health  and  Environmental  Engineering  Organisation 
(Ministry  of  Urban    Development  and  Poverty  Alleviation), 
New  Delhi 

Central  Public  Works  Department  (Central  Designs  Organization), 
New  Delhi 

Central  Public  Works  Department  (Electrical  Department), 
New  Delhi 

Centre  for  Disaster  Mitigation  and  Management,  Anna  University, 
Chennai 

Chennai  Metropolitan  Development  Authority,  Chennai 

Construction  Industry  Development  Council,  New  Delhi 

Council  of  Architecture,  New  Delhi 

Delhi  Development  Authority,  New  Delhi 

Delhi  Fire  Service,  Government  of  National  Capital  Territory 
of  Delhi,  Delhi 

Department  of  Science  and  Technology  (Ministry  of  Science 
and  Technology),  New  Delhi 

Directorate  General  of  Employment  and  Training,  New  Delhi 

Engineer-in-Chief's  Branch,  Army  Headquarters,  New  Delhi 

Forest  Research  Institute  (Indian  Council  for  Forestry  Research 
and  Education),  Dehra  Dun 

Housing  and  Urban  Development  Corporation  Ltd,  New  Delhi 
Indian  Geotechnical  Society,  New  Delhi 


Representative(s) 

Shri  Vatsal  S.  Patel 

Shri  Jagdish  A.  Patel  (Alternate) 

Shri  M.  R.  Sreenivasa  Murthy 

Shri  R.  Ramegowda  (Alternate  I) 
Shri  N.  Krishna  (Alternate  II) 

Shri  B.  G.  Ahuia 

Shri  T.  N.  Gupta  &  Shri  D.  B.  N.  Rao 

Representative 

Shri  V.  K.  Mathur 

Shri  B.  S.  Gupta  (Alternate) 

Shri  B.  B.  Uppal 

Shri  V.  K.  Chaurasia  (Alternate) 

Chief  Engineer  (Designs) 

Superintending  Engineer  (S  &  S)    (Alternate) 

Chief  Engineer  (Electrical)  I 

Director 

Member  Secretary 

Shri  N.  V.  Rakhunath  (Alternate) 

Shri  P.  R.  Swarup 

Shri  Anil  Chadha  (Alternate) 

Shri  Premendra  Raj  Mehta 

Shri  Sudhir  Vohra  (Alternate) 

Engineer  Member 

Chief  Engineer  (HQ)  (Alternate) 

Shri  R.  C.  Sharma 
Shri  V.  Rao  Alyagari 

Shri  Ashwani  Kumar 

Brig  S.  K.  Sharma 

Shri  D.  K.  Dinker  (Alternate) 

Director  General 

Director    (Alternate) 

Chairman  &  Managing  Director 
Shri  R.  K.  Safaya  (Alternate) 

Shri  D.  B.  Mahajan 

Dr  M.  D.  Desai  (Alternate) 


( viii ) 


Organization 

Indian  Institute  of  Technology  (Centre  for  Energy  Studies), 
New  Delhi 

Indian  Roads  Congress,  New  Delhi 

Institute  of  Town  Planners,  India,  New  Delhi 
Institution  of  Fire  Engineers  (India),  New  Delhi 

Ministry  of  Home  Affairs,  New  Delhi 

Ministry  of  Home  Affairs  (Disaster  Management  Division), 
New  Delhi 

Ministry  of  Non-Conventional  Energy  Sources,  New  Delhi 

Ministry  of  Road  Transport  and  Highways,  New  Delhi 

Municipal  Corporation  of  Greater  Mumbai,  Mumbai 

National  Buildings  Construction  Corporation,  New  Delhi 

National  Council  for  Cement  and  Building  Materials,  Ballabgarh 

National  Design  and  Research  Forum,  The  Institution  of  Engineers 
(India),  Bangalore 

National  Environmental  Engineering  Research  Institute  (CSIR), 
Nagpur 

North  Eastern  Council,  Shillong 

Public  Works  Department  (Roads  and  Buildings),  Gandhinagar 

Research,  Designs  and  Standards  Organization  (Ministry  of  Railways), 
Lucknow 

School  of  Planning  and  Architecture,  New  Delhi 

Structural  Engineering  Research  Centre  (CSIR),  Chennai 

Suri  and  Suri  Consulting  Acoustical  Engineers,  New  Delhi 
The  Energy  and  Resources  Institute,  New  Delhi 

The  Indian  Institute  of  Architects,  New  Delhi 

The  Institution  of  Engineers  (India),  Kolkata 

The  Institution  of  Surveyors,  New  Delhi 

Town  and  Country  Planning  Organization,  New  Delhi 

U.P.  Housing  and  Development  Board,  Lucknow 
Unitech  Ltd,  Gurgaon 

In  personal  capacity  (5,  Sunder  Nagar,  New  Delhi  110  003) 
BIS  Directorate  General 


Representative(s) 
Prof  N.  K.  Bansal 

Chief  Engineer  (Design),  CPWD 

Superintending  Engineer  (Design),  CPWD  (Alternate) 

Dr  S.  K.  Kulshrestha 

President 

General  Secretary  (Alternate) 

Fire  Advisor 

Shri  M.  p.  Sajnani 

Shri  S.  K.  Swami  (Alternate) 

Dr  T.  C.  Tripathi 

Shri  S.  B.  Basu 

Shri  P.  Halder  (Alternate) 

Director  (Engg  Services  &  Proiects) 
City  Engineer  (Alternate) 

Shri  B.  Prasad 

Shri  N.  P.  Agarwal  (Alternate) 

Shri  Shiban  Raina 

Dr  Anil  Kumar  (Alternate) 

Prof  R.  Narayana  Iyengar 
Shri  B.  Suresh  (Alternate) 

Dr  Arindam  Ghosh 

Dr  V.  P.  Deshpande  (Alternate) 

Shri  P.  K.  Deb 

Shri  V.  P.  Jamdar 

Shri  M.  S.  Jallundhwala  (Alternate) 

Shri  R.  K.  Gupta 

Shri  J.  P.  Das  (Alternate) 

Director 

Shri  C.  V.  Vaidyanathan 
Shri  K.  Mani  (Alternate) 

Shri  Gautam  Suri 

Ms  Mili  Maiumdar 

Ms  Vidisha  Salunke-Palsule  (Alternate) 

Shri  Balbir  Verma 

Shri  Abhijit  Ray  (Alternate) 

Prof  G.  P.  Lal 

Shri  O.  P.  Goel  (Alternate) 

Shri  K.  S.  Kharb 

Shri  R.  K.  Bhalla  (Alternate) 

Shri  K.  T.  Gurumukhi 

Shri  J.  B.  Kshirsagar  (Alternate) 

Shri  Hari  Gopal 

Shri  Sushil  Sharma 

Shri  Shahid  Mahmood  (Alternate) 

Dr  J.  R.  Bhalla 

Shri  S.  K.  Jain,  Director  &  Head  (Civil  Engineering) 
[Representing  Director  General  (Ex-ojficio  Member)} 


Member  Secretary 

Shri  Saniay  Pant 

Joint  Director  (Civil  Engineering),  BIS 


(ix) 


Special  Panel  for  Guiding 
Revision  of  National  Building 

Organization 

In  personal  capacity  (P-233/3,  Officers  Enclave,  Air  Force  Station, 
Rajokari,  New  Delhi  110  038) 

Building  Materials  and  Technology  Promotion  Council,  New  Delhi 

Central  Building  Research  Institute  (CSIR),  Roorkee 

Central  Public  Works  Department,  New  Delhi 

Council  of  Architecture,  New  Delhi 

Engineer-in-Chief  s  Branch,  Army  Headquarters,  New  Delhi 

The  Institution  of  Engineers  (India),  Kolkata 

Bureau  of  Indian  Standards,  New  Delhi 


and  Co-ordinating  the 
Code  of  India,  CED  46:SP 

Representative(s) 
Shri  V.  SuRESH  (Convener) 

Shri  T.  N.  Gupta 

Shri  V.  K.  Mathur 

Shri  H.  S.  Dogra 

Shri  Premendra  Raj  Mehta 

Lt-Gen  Hari  Uniyal 

Prof  G.  P.  Lal 

Shri  O.  P.  Goel  (Alternate) 

Shri  Sanjay  Pant 


Ad-hoc  Group  for  Part  0  of  NBC,  CED  46:AG 


Organization 


Representative!  s) 


In  personal  capacity  ('Chandrika',  at  15th  Cross,  63-64,  East  Park  Road,  Dr  H.  C.  Visvesvaraya  (Convener) 
Malleswaram,  Bangalore  560  003) 

Council  of  Architecture,  New  Delhi  Shri  Premendra  Raj  Mehta 

In  personal  capacity  (P-233/3,  Officers  Enclave,  Air  Force  Station,  Shri  V.  Suresh 
Rajokari,  New  Delhi  110  038) 

In  personal  capacity  (A-39/B,  DDA  Flats,  Munirka,  New  Delhi  110  067)  Shri  P.  B.  Vijay 

In  personal  capacity  (EA-345,  Maya  Enclave,  New  Delhi  110  064)  Shri  J.  N.  Bhavani  Prasad 


Panel  for  Constructional  Practices  and  Safety,  CED  46:P11 


Organization 

In      personal      capacity      (103,  Charak      Sadan,     Vikaspuri, 
New  Delhi  110  018) 

Adlakha  and  Associates,  New  Delhi 

Builders  Association  of  India,  Mumbai 

Central  Building  Research  Institute  (CSIR),  Roorkee 

Central  Public  Works  Department.  New  Delhi 
Construction  Industries  Development  Council,  New  Delhi 

Director  General  of  Factory  Advice  Service  and  Labour  Institute 
(Ministry  of  Labour),  Mumbai 

Engineer-in-Chief  s  Branch,  Army  Headquarters,  New  Delhi 

Engineers  India  Limited,  New  Delhi 

Gammon  India  Ltd,  Mumbai 

Indian  Plywood  Industries  Research  and  Training  Institute, 
Bangalore 

Larsen  and  Toubro  Ltd,  Chennai 

National  Building  Construction  Corporation,  New  Delhi 


Representative(s) 
Shri  P.  Krishnan  (Convener) 

Shri  Pramod  Adlakha 

Shri  Raj  Pal  Arora 

Shri  N.  K.  Shangari 

Shri  B.  S.  Gupta  (Alternate) 

Shri  R.  P.  Bhardwaj 

Shri  P.  R.  Swarup 

Shri  Sunil  Mahajan  (Alternate) 

Shri  S.  K.  Dutta 

Shri  I.  Roychowdhuri  (Alternate) 

Shri  Dinesh  Sikand 

Shri  A.  K.  Singh  (Alternate) 

Shri  M.  P.  Jain 

Shri  A.  K.  Tandon  (Alternate) 

Shri  K.  N.  Chatterjee 

Shri  S.  C.  Sarin  (Alternate) 

Shri  H.  Guruva  Reddy 

Shri  M.  Pavan  Kumar  (Alternate) 

Shri  R.  P.  Sakunia 

Shri  B.  Prasad 

Shri  N.  P.  Agarwal  (Alternate) 


(x) 


Organization 

School  of  Planning  and  Architecture,  New  Delhi 
The  Indian  Institute  of  Architects,  Mumbai 

The  Institution  of  Engineers  (India),  Kolkata 


Representative(s) 

Dr  V.  Thiruvengadam 

Shri  Kailash  Chandra  Jaitia 
Shri  C.  M.  Sapra  (Alternate) 

Shri  H.  P.  Jamdar 

Shri  K.  B.  Rajoria  (Alternate) 


Member  Secretary 

Shri  Saniay  Pant 

Joint  Director  (Civil  Engineering),  BIS 

Joint  Member  Secretary 

Shri  S.  K.  Verma 

Deputy  Director  (Civil  Engineering),  BIS 


(xi) 


Important  Explanatory  Note  for  Users  of  Code 

In  this  Code,  where  reference  is  made  to  'accepted  standards'  in  relation  to  material 
specification,  testing  or  other  related  information  or  where  reference  is  made  to  'good  practice' 
in  relation  to  design,  constructional  procedures  or  other  related  information,  the  Indian 
Standards  listed  at  the  end  of  the  concerned  Parts/Sections  may  be  used  to  the  interpretation 
of  these  terms. 

At  the  time  of  publication,  the  editions  indicated  in  the  above  Indian  Standards  were  valid. 
All  standards  are  subject  to  revision  and  parties  to  agreements  based  on  the  Parts/Sections 
are  encouraged  to  investigate  the  possibility  of  applying  the  most  recent  editions  of  the 
standards. 

In  the  list  of  standards  given  at  the  end  of  each  Part/Section,  the  number  appearing  in  the 
first  column  indicates  the  number  of  the  reference  in  that  Part/Section.  For  example: 

a)  good  practice  [7(4)]  refers  to  the  standard  given  at  serial  number  4  of  the  list  of  standards 
given  at  the  end  of  Part  7,  that  is  IS  2190  :  1992  'Code  of  practice  for  selection, 
installation  and  maintenance  of  portable  first-aid  fire  extinguishers  {third  revisionY . 

b)  good  practice  [7(7)]  refers  to  the  standard  given  at  serial  number  7  of  the  list  of  standards 
given  at  the  end  of  Part  7,  that  is  IS  3764  :  1992  'Safety  code  of  excavation  work  {first 
revisiony . 

c)  accepted  standard  7(9)  refers  to  the  standard  given  at  serial  number  9  of  the  list  of 
standards  given  at  the  end  of  Part  7,  that  is  IS  2925  :  1984  'Specification  for  industrial 
safety  helmets  {second  revisiony . 

d)  accepted  standard  7(18)  refers  to  the  standard  given  at  serial  number  18  of  the  list  of 
standards  given  at  the  end  of  Part  7,  that  is  IS  1 1057  :  1984  'Specification  for  industrial 
safety  nets'. 

e)  good  practice  [7(37)]  refers  to  the  standard  given  at  serial  number  37  of  the  list  of 
standards  given  at  the  end  of  Part  7,  that  is  IS  4130  :  1991  'Safety  code  for  demolition 
of  buildings  {second  revisiony . 


( xiii ) 


INFORMATION  FOR  THE  USERS 

For  the  convenience  of  the  users,  the  National  Building  Code  of  India  2005  is  available  as  a  comprehensive 
volume  as  well  as  in  the  following  five  groups,  each  incorporating  the  related  Parts/Sections  dealing  with  particular 
area  of  building  activity: 

Integrated    Approach    —   Prerequisite    for   Applying 

Provisions  of  the  Code 

Administration 

Development    Control    Rules    and    General   Building 

Requirements 

Fire  and  Life  Safety 

Building  Materials 

Landscaping,  Signs  and  Outdoor  Display  Structures 

Section  1     Landscape  Planning  and  Design 

Section  2     Signs  and  Outdoor  Display  Structures 


Group  1      For  Development,  Building     Part  0: 
Planning  and  Related 
Aspects  Part  2: 

Part  3: 

Part  4: 
Part  5: 
Part  10: 


Group  2     For  Structural  Design  and      Part  0: 
Related  Aspects 

Part  6: 


Group  3     For  Construction  Related 
Aspects  including  Safety 

Group  4     For  Aspects  Relating  to 
Building  Services 


PartO: 

Part?: 
PartO: 

Part  8: 


Group  5      For  Aspects  Relating  to 
Plumbing  Services 
including  Solid  Waste 
Management 


PartO: 
Part  9: 


Integrated    Approach    —   Prerequisite    for   Applying 

Provisions  of  the  Code 

Structural  Design 

Section  1     Loads,  Forces  and  Effects 

Section  2     Soils  and  Foundations 

Section  3     Timber  and  Bamboo 

3A  Timber 

3B    Bamboo 
Section  4     Masonry 
Section  5     Concrete 

5A  Plain  and  Reinforced  Concrete 

5B  Prestressed  Concrete 
Section  6     Steel 
Section  7     Prefabrication,     Systems     Building     and 

Mixed/Composite  Construction 

7A  Prefabricated  Concrete 

7B  Systems       Building       and       Mixed/ 

Composite  Construction 

Integrated    Approach    —   Prerequisite    for   Applying 
Provisions  of  the  Code 
Constructional  Practices  and  Safety 

Integrated    Approach    —   Prerequisite    for   Applying 

Provisions  of  the  Code 

Building  Services 

Section  1      Lighting  and  Ventilation 

Section  2     Electrical  and  Allied  Installations 

Section  3     Air  conditioning.  Heating  and  Mechanical 

Ventilation 
Section  4     Acoustics,    Sound    Insulation    and    Noise 

Control 
Section  5     Installation  of  Lifts  and  Escalators 

Integrated    Approach    —   Prerequisite    for   Applying 
Provisions  of  the  Code 
Plumbing  Services 

Section  1     Water    Supply,    Drainage    and    Sanitation 
(including  Solid  Waste  Management) 

Section  2    Gas  Supply 


The  information  contained  in  different  groups  will  essentially  serve  the  concerned  professionals  dealing  in  the 
respective  areas. 


(xiv) 


The  National  Building  Code  of  India  consists  of  the  following  Parts  and  Sections: 


Part  0  Integb^ated  Approach  —  Prerequisite  for  Applying  Provisions  of  the  Code 

Part  1  Definitions 

Part  2  Administration 

Part  3  Development  Control  Rules  and  General  Building  Requirements 

Part  4  Fire  and  Life  Safety 

Part  5  Building  Materials 

Part  6       Structural  Design 

Section  1       Loads,  Forces  and  Effects 
Section  2      Soils  and  Foundations 
Section  3      Timber  and  Bamboo 

3A  Timber 

3B  Bamboo 
Section  4      Masonry 
Section  5      Concrete 

5A  Plain  and  Reinforced  Concrete 

5B  Prestressed  Concrete 
Section  6      Steel 
Section  7      Prefabrication,  Systems  Building  and  Mixed/Composite 

Construction 

7A  Prefabricated  Concrete 

7B  Systems  Building  and  Mixed/Composite  Construction 

Part  7       Constructional  Practices  and  Safety 

Part  8       Building  Services 

Section  1      Lighting  and  Ventilation 

Section  2      Electrical  and  Allied  Installations 

Section  3      Air  Conditioning,  Heating  and  Mechanical  Ventilation 

Section  4      Acoustics,  Sound  Insulation  and  Noise  Control 

Section  5      Installation  of  Lifts  and  Escalators 

Part  9       Plumbing  Services 

Section  1      Water  Supply,  Drainage  and  Sanitation  (including  Solid 

Waste  Management) 
Section  2      Gas  Supply 

Part  10    Landscaping,  Signs  and  Outdoor  Display  Structures 
Section  1        Landscape  Planning  and  Design 
Section  2      Signs  and  Outdoor  Display  Structures 


Total  Pages 

...     12 

...  16 

...  24 

...  64 

...  88 

...  40 

...  104 

...  48 

...  50 

...  24 

...  44 

...  90 

...   6 

...   8 

...  22 

...  12 

70 

48 
68 

48 
44 

42 

90 
14 

30 

24 


(XV) 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 

PART  0  INTEGRATED  APPROACH  —  PREREQUISITE  FOR 
APPLYING  PROVISIONS  OF  THE  CODE 


BUREAU   OF  INDIAN   STANDARDS 


CONTENTS 


FOREWORD 


1  SCOPE 

2  TERMINOLOGY 

3  GENERAL 

4  TEAM  APPROACH 

5  PLANNING,  DESIGNING  AND  DEVELOPMENT 

6  CONSTRUCTION/EXECUTION  (ACTUALIZATION) 

7  OPERATION  AND  MAINTENANCE 


5 
5 
5 
5 
6 
7 


ANNEX  A       BRIEF  DETAILS  OF  THE  COVERAGE  OF  VARIOUS  PROVISIONS 
UNDER  DIFFERENT  OTHER  PARTS/SECTIONS  OF  THIS  CODE 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


National  Building  Code  Sectional  Committee,  CED  46 


FOREWORD 

In  order  to  provide  safe  and  healthy  habitat,  careful  consideration  needs  to  be  paid  to  the  building  construction 
activity.  Building  planning,  designing  and  construction  activities  have  developed  over  the  centuries.  Large  number 
of  ancient  monuments  and  historical  buildings  all  over  the  world  bear  testimony  to  the  growth  of  civilization 
from  the  prehistoric  era  with  the  extensive  use  of  manual  labour  and  simple  systems  as  appropriate  to  those  ages 
to  the  present  day  mechanized  and  electronically  controlled  operations  for  designing  and  constructing  buildings 
and  for  operating  and  maintaining  systems  and  services.  In  those  days  those  buildings  were  conceptualized  and 
built  by  master  builders  with  high  levels  of  artisan  skills.  Technological  and  socio-economic  developments  in 
recent  times  have  led  to  remarkable  increase  in  demand  for  more  and  more  sophistication  in  buildings  resulting 
in  ever  increasing  complexities.  These  perforce  demand  high  levels  of  inputs  from  professionals  of  different 
disciplines  such  as  architecture,  civil  engineering,  structural  engineering,  functional  and  life  safety  services 
including  special  aspects  relating  to  utilities,  landscaping,  etc  in  conceptualization,  spatial  planning,  design  and 
construction  of  buildings  of  various  material  and  technology  streams,  with  due  regard  to  various  services  including 
operation,  maintenance,  repairs  and  rehabilitation  aspects  throughout  the  service  life  of  the  building. 

This  Code,  besides  prescribing  the  various  provisions,  also  allows  freedom  of  action  to  adopt  appropriate  practices 
and  provides  for  building  planning,  designing  and  construction  for  absorbing  traditional  practices  as  well  as 
latest  developments  in  knowledge  in  the  various  disciplines  as  relevant  to  a  building  including  computer  aided 
and/or  other  modern  sensors  aided  activities  in  the  various  stages  of  conceptuahzation,  planning,  designing, 
constructing,  maintaining  and  repairing  the  buildings.  India  being  a  large  country  with  substantial  variations 
from  region  to  region,  this  Code  has  endeavoured  to  meet  the  requirements  of  different  regions  of  the  country, 
both  urban  and  rural,  by  taking  into  consideration  factors,  such  as,  climatic  and  environmental  conditions, 
geographical  terrain,  proneness  to  natural  disasters,  ecologically  appropriate  practices,  use  of  eco-friendly  materials, 
reduction  of  pollution,  protection  and  improvement  of  local  environment  and  also  socio-economic  considerations, 
towards  the  creation  of  sustainable  human  settlements. 

This  Part  of  the  Code  dealing  with  'integrated  approach'  is  being  included  for  the  first  time.  It  gives  an  overall 
direction  for  practical  applications  of  the  provisions  of  different  specialized  aspects  of  spatial  planning,  designing 
and  construction  of  buildings,  creation  of  services,  and  proposes  an  integrated  approach  for  utilizing  appropriate 
knowledge  and  experience  of  qualified  professionals  right  from  the  conceptualization  through  construction  and 
completion  stages  of  a  building  project  and  indeed  during  the  entire  life  cycle.  The  'integrated  approach'  should 
not  only  take  care  of  functional,  aesthetic  and  safety  aspects,  but  also  the  operational  and  maintenance  requirements. 
Also,  cost  optimization  has  to  be  achieved  through  proper  selection  of  materials,  techniques,  equipment 
installations,  etc.  Further,  value  engineering  and  appropriate  management  techniques  should  be  applied  to  achieve 
the  aim  set  forth  for  the  purpose  of  construction  of  a  building  fully  meeting  the  specified  and  implied  needs  of 
spatial  functions,  safety  and  durability  aspects,  life  and  health  safety,  comfort,  services,  etc  in  the  building. 

The  aim  of  the  'integrated  approach'  is  to  get  the  maximum  benefit  from  the  building  and  its  services  in  terms  of 
quality,  timely  completion  and  cost-effectiveness.  In  the  team  approach  which  is  an  essential  pre -requisite  for 
integrated  approach,  the  aim  clearly  is  to  maximize  the  efficiency  of  the  total  system  through  appropriate 
optimization  of  each  of  its  sub-systems.  In  other  words,  in  the  team,  the  inputs  from  each  of  the  professional 
disciplines  have  to  be  so  optimized  that  the  total  system's  efficiency  becomes  the  maximum.  It  may  be  re- 
emphasized  that  maximizing  the  efficiencies  of  each  sub-system  may  not  necessarily  assure  the  maximization  of 
the  efficiency  of  the  total  system.  It  need  hardly  to  be  stated  that  specified  or  imphed  safety  will  always  get 
precedence  over  functional  efficiency  and  economy.  Further,  progressive  approach  such  as  that  relating  to  the 
concept  of  intelligent  buildings  would  be  best  taken  care  of  by  the  'integrated  approach'  as  laid  down  in  this  Part. 

Quality  systems  approach  and  certification  thereunder  covering  the  various  dimensions  brought  out  above  may 
go  a  long  way  in  achieving  the  above  goal  of  real  integrated  approach. 


PART  0  INTEGRATED  APPROACH 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 

PART  0  INTEGRATED  APPROACH  —  PREREQUISITE  FOR 
APPLYING  PROVISIONS  OF  THE  CODE 


1  SCOPE 

This  Part  covers  guidelines  to  be  followed  for  judicious 
implementation  of  the  provisions  of  various  Parts/ 
Sections  of  the  Code. 

2  TERMINOLOGY 

2.0  For  the  purpose  of  this  Part,  the  following 
definitions  and  those  given  in  Part  1  'Definitions'  shall 
apply. 

2.1  Authority  Having  Jurisdiction  —  The  Authority 
which  has  been  created  by  a  statute  and  which,  for  the 
purpose  of  administering  the  Code/Part,  may  authorize 
a  committee  or  an  official  or  an  agency  to  act  on  its 
behalf;  hereinafter  called  the  'Authority' . 

2.2  Building  —  Any  structure  for  whatsoever  purpose 
and  of  whatsoever  materials  constructed  and  every  part 
thereof  whether  used  as  human  habitation  or  not  and 
includes  foundation,  plinth,  walls,  floors,  roofs, 
chimneys,  plumbing  and  building  services,  fixed 
platforms,  VERANDAH,  balcony,  cornice  or  projection, 
part  of  a  building  or  anything  affixed  thereto  or  any 
wall  enclosing  or  intended  to  enclose  any  land  or  space 
and  signs  and  outdoor  display  structures.  Tents/ 
SHAMIANAHS/PANDALS,  tarpaulin  shelters,  etc, 
erected  for  temporary  and  ceremonial  occasions  shall 
not  be  considered  as  building. 

2.3  Owner  —  Person  or  body  having  a  legal  interest 
in  land  and/or  building  thereon.  This  includes  free 
holders,  leaseholders  or  those  holding  a  sub-lease 
which  both  bestows  a  legal  right  to  occupation  and 
gives  rise  to  liabilities  in  respect  of  safety  or  building 
condition. 

In  case  of  lease  or  sub-lease  holders,  as  far  as  ownership 
with  respect  to  the  structure  is  concerned,  the  structure 
of  a  flat  or  structure  on  a  plot  belongs  to  the  allottee/ 
lessee  till  the  allotment/lease  subsists. 

NOTE  —  For  the  purpose  of  the  Code,  the  word  'owner'  will 
also  cover  the  generally  understood  terms  like  'client',  'user', 
etc. 

3  GENERAL 

3.1  Buildings,  shall  be  classified  as  Residential, 
Educational,  Institutional,  Assembly,  Business, 
Mercantile,  Industrial,  Storage  and  Hazardous  in 
groups  and  sub-division  as  classified  in  Part  4  'Fire 
and  Life  Safety'. 

For  further  sub-classification  of  buildings  and  various 
related  provisions  thereof  with  respect  to  administration; 


development  control  rules  and  general  building 
requirements;  building  materials;  fire  and  life  safety; 
structural  design;  constructional  practices  and  safety; 
building  and  plumbing  services;  and  landscaping,  signs 
and  outdoor  display  structures,  other  parts/sections  of 
the  Code  may  be  referred  to. 

3.2  The  scope  of  various  Parts/Sections  of  the  Code 
which  cover  detailed  provisions  on  different  aspects 
of  development  of  land/building  construction  activity, 
are  given  in  Annex  A,  with  a  view  to  providing  an 
overview  for  the  users  of  the  Code. 

4  TEAM  APPROACH 

A  land  development/building  project  comprises  the 
following  major  stages: 

a)  Location/siting, 

b)  Conceptualization  and  planning, 

c)  Designing  and  detailing, 

d)  Construction/execution,  and 

e)  Maintenance  and  repair. 

Each  stage  necessarily  requires  professionals  of  many 
disciplines  who  should  work  together  as  a  well 
coordinated  team  to  achieve  the  desired  product 
delivery  with  quality,  in  an  effective  manner. 

Appropriate  multi-disciplinary  teams  need  to  be 
constituted  to  successfully  meet  the  requirements  of 
different  stages.  Each  team  may  comprise  need  based 
professionals  out  of  the  following  depending  upon  the 
nature,  magnitude  and  complexity  of  the  project: 

a)  Architect, 

b)  Civil  engineer, 

c)  Structural  engineer, 

d)  Electrical  engineer, 

e)  Plumbing  engineer, 

f)  Fire  protection  engineer, 

g)  HVAC  engineer, 

h)  Environment  specialist, 

j)  Town  planner, 

k)  Urban  designer, 

m)  Landscape  architect, 

n)  Security  system  specialist, 

p)  Interior  designer, 

q)  Quantity  surveyor, 

r)  Project/construction  manager,  and 

s)  Other  subject  specialist(s). 


PART  0  INTEGRATED  APPROACH 


4.1  Design  Team 

In  building  projects  various  aspects  like  form;  space 
planning;  aesthetics;  fire  and  life  safety;  structural 
adequacy;  plumbing  services;  lighting  and  natural 
ventilation;  electrical  and  allied  installations;  air 
conditioning,  heating  and  mechanical  ventilation; 
acoustics,  sound  insulation  and  noise  control; 
installation  of  lifts  and  escalators;  building  automation; 
data  and  voice  communication;  other  utility  services 
installations;  landscape  planning  and  design;  urban 
planning;  etc  need  to  be  kept  in  view  right  at  the 
concept  stage.  The  project  requiring  such  multi- 
disciplinary  inputs  need  a  co-ordinated  approach 
among  the  professionals  for  proper  integration  of 
various  design  inputs.  For  this,  and  to  take  care  of  the 
complexities  of  multi-disciplinary  requirements,  a 
design  team  of  professionals  from  required  disciplines 
shall  be  constituted  at  the  appropriate  stage.  Here,  it  is 
desirable  that  the  multi-disciplinary  integration  is 
initiated  right  from  the  concept  stage.  The  team  shall 
finalize  the  plan.  The  composition  of  the  team  shall 
depend  on  the  nature  and  magnitude  of  the  project. 
Design  is  an  evolutionary  and  participatory  process, 
where  participation  of  owner  constitutes  a  very 
important  input  at  all  stages,  and  the  same  shall  be 
ensured  by  the  design  team. 

To  ensure  proper  implementation  of  the  design,  the 
design  team,  may  be  associated  during  the  construction/ 
execution  stage. 

4.2  Project  Management  and  Construction 
Management  Teams 

The  objective  of  project  management  or  construction 
management  is  primarily  to  achieve  accomplishment 
of  project  in  accordance  with  the  designs  and 
specifications  in  a  stipulated  time  and  cost  framework, 
with  a  degree  of  assurance  prior  to  commencement  and 
satisfaction  on  accomplishment. 

For  large  projects,  separate  teams  of  experienced 
professionals  from  the  required  disciplines  may 
be  constituted  for  project  management  and  for 
construction  management  depending  upon  the 
complexities  of  the  project.  However,  for  smaller 
projects  these  teams  may  be  combined.  The  teams  shall 
be  responsible  for  day-to-day  execution,  supervision, 
quality  control,  etc  and  shall  ensure  inter-disciplinary 
co-ordination  during  the  construction  stage.  The  team 
shall  be  responsible  to  achieve  satisfactory  completion 
of  the  project  with  regard  to  cost,  time  and  quality. 
Some  members  of  the  design  team  may  also  be 
included  in  the  project  management  team  and/or 
associated  actively  during  the  project  execution  stage. 
It  is  important  that  leaders  and  members  of  project 
management/construction  management  teams. 


depending  on  the  size  and  complexity  of  the  project, 
are  carefully  selected  considering  their  qualification, 
experience  and  expertise  in  these  fields. 

4.3  Operation  and  Maintenance  Team 

Operation,  maintenance  and  repairs  also  require  a 
multi-disciplinary  approach  to  ensure  that  all  the 
requirements  of  the  users  are  satisfactorily  met.  During 
maintenance  and  repairs,  the  jobs  requiring  inter- 
disciplinary co-ordination  have  to  be  executed  in  such 
a  manner  as  not  only  to  cause  least  inconvenience  to 
the  user  but  also  to  ensure  that  there  is  no  mismatch  or 
damage  to  the  structure,  finishings,  fittings  and  fixtures. 
For  carrying  out  routine  maintenance/repair  jobs, 
utilization  of  the  services  of  trained  technicians 
preferably  having  multi-disciplinary  skills  should  be 
encouraged. 

Special  repairs,  rehabilitation  and  retrofitting  are 
specialized  jobs  which  demand  knowledge  of  the 
existing  structure/installations.  Association  of 
concerned  specialists  may  be  helpful  for  these  works. 

The  Operation  and  Maintenance  Team  may  also  be 
known  as  Asset  Management  or  Estate  Management 
Team. 

5  PLANNING,  DESIGNING  AND  DEVELOPMENT 

5.1  The  main  functions  of  design  team  (see  4.1) 
constituted  for  the  planning,  designing  and  development, 
are  as  under: 

a)  Formalization  of  design  brief  in  consultation 
with  the  owner. 

b)  Site  investigation/survey. 

c)  Preparation  of  alternative  concept  designs. 

d)  Selection  of  a  concept  in  consultation  with 
and  with  the  consent  of  owner. 

e)  Sizing  the  system. 

f)  Development  of  design,  covering  : 

1)  Integration  of  architecture,  structure  and 
services, 

2)  Synthesis  of  requirements  of  each 
discipline,  and 

3)  Interaction  with  each  other  and  with  the 
owner. 

g)  Preparation  of  preliminary  designs  and 
drawings  and  obtaining  owner's  approval. 

h)     Preparation  of  preliminary  cost  estimates  for 

approval  of  owner, 
j)     Preparation  of  work-breakdown  structure  and 

programme  for  pre-construction  activities, 
k)     Assisting  client  to  obtain  approvals  of  the 

Authority, 
m)    Preparation  of  detailed  specification  and 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


construction  working  drawings  with  integration 

of  engineering  inputs  of  all  concerned 

disciplines, 
n)     Preparation  of  detailed  design  of  each 

discipline  for  various  services. 
p)     Peer  review/proof  checking  of  the  drawings/ 

designs  in  case  of  important  projects, 

depending    upon  their  complexity  and 

sensitivity, 
q)     Preparation  of  detailed  cost  estimate, 
r)     Obtaining  final  approval  of  client. 
s)     Preparation  of  bill  of  quantities,  specifications 

and  tender  documents. 

5.2  The  following  considerations,  as  may  be 
applicable  to  the  project,  may  be  considered  during 
planning,  notwithstanding  other  relevant  aspects 
specifically  prescribed  in  concerned  parts/sections  of 
this  Code;  these  considerations  in  general  are  with  the 
objective  of  addressing  to  the  important  issues  like 
environmental  protection,  energy  conservation, 
cultural  issues,  creating  barrier  free  built-environment, 
safety  aspects,  etc,  all  of  these  leading  towards 
sustainable  development,  and  have  to  be  applied  with 
due  regard  to  the  specific  requirements  of  size  and  type 
of  project: 

a)  Geoclimatic,  geological  and  topographical 
features. 

b)  Varied  sociological  pattern  of  living  in  the 
country. 

c)  Effective  land  use  to  cater  to  the  needs  of  the 
society  in  a  most  convenient  manner. 

d)  Modular  planning  and  standardization  to 
take  care  of  future  planning  giving  due 
consideration  to  the  specified  planning 
controls. 

e)  Emphasis  on  daylight  utilization,  natural 
ventilation,  shielding,  and  window  area 
and  its  disposition;  daylighting  to  be 
supplemented  with  an  integrated  design  of 
artificial  lighting. 

f)  Optimum  utilization  of  renewable  energy 
sources  duly  integrated  in  the  overall  energy 
system  design;  with  consideration  of  active 
and  passive  aspects  in  building  design 
including  thermal  performance  of  building 
envelope. 

g)  Rain  water  harvesting,  and  use  of  appropriate 
building  materials  considering  aspects 
like  energy  consumption  in  production, 
transportation  and  utilization,  recyclability, 
etc  for  promoting  sustainable  development. 

h)  Requisite  mandatory  provisions  for 
handicapped  persons. 


j)     Acoustical  controls  for  buildings  and  the 

surroundings, 
k)     Promotion  of  artwork  in  buildings,  specially 

buildings  of  importance, 
m)    Due  cognizance  of  recommendations  of  the 

Archeological  Survey  of  India  with  regard  to 

national  monuments  and  construction  in 

archeologically  important  sites. 
n)     Due  cognizance  of  relevant  provisions  of 

applicable  coastal  zone  regulation  act. 
p)     Conservation  of  heritage  structures  and  areas, 
q)     Environmental  and  social  impact  analysis, 
r)     Design  of  services  with  emphasis  on  aspects 

of  energy  efficiency,  environment  friendliness 

and  maintainability, 
s)     Integrated  waste  management. 
t)      Voice  and  data  communication,  automation 

of  building  services,  and  intelligent  building; 

use  of  security  and  surveillance  system  in 

important  and  sensitive  buildings,  such  as, 

access  control  for  the  people  as  well  as  for 

vehicle, 
u)     Interlinking  of  fire  alarm  system,  fire 

protection  system,  security  system,  ventilation, 

electrical  systems,  etc. 
v)     Analysis  of  emergency  power,  standby  power 

requirement  and  captive  power  systems, 
w)    Cost  optimization  through  techniques  like 

value  engineering. 
y)     Adoption  of  innovative  technologies  giving 

due  consideration  to  constructability  and 

quality  aspects, 
z)     Instrumentation  of  buildings  and  monitoring 

and  use  of  information  so  generated  to  effect 

improvements  in  planning  and  design  of 

future  building  projects. 

6  CONSTRUCTION/EXECUTION 
(ACTUALIZATION) 

6.1  The  main  functions  of  the  teams  (see  4.2) 
constituted  for  Project  Management/Construction 
Management  may  be,  to  : 

a)  specify  criteria  for  selection  of  constructors; 

b)  specify  quality  control,  quality  audit  system 
and  safety  system; 

c)  short-list  constructors; 

d)  have  pre-bid  meetings  with  the  intending 
constructors; 

e)  receive  and  evaluate  tenders; 

f)  select  constructors; 

g)  execution  and  supervision; 

h)     monitor  quality,  time  and  cost  control; 


PART  0  INTEGRATED  APPROACH 


j)     prepare/certify  the  completion  (as-built) 

drawings;  and 
k)     ensure  availability  of  operation  manuals  for 

field  use. 

6.2  Apart  from  the  specific  provisions  laid  down  in 
the  concerned  Parts/Sections  of  the  Code,  the  following 
considerations,  as  may  be  applicable  to  the  project 
concerned,  shall  be  given  due  attention: 

a)  Adopting  scientific  principles  of  construction 
management,  quality  management,  cost  and 
time  control. 

b)  Engagement  of  executing  and  supervising 
agencies,  which  meet  the  specified  norms  of 
skills,  specialization,  experience,  resource- 
fulness, etc  for  the  work. 

c)  Ensuring  inter-disciplinary  co-ordination 
during  construction. 

d)  Contract  management  and  techno-legal 
aspects. 

e)  Completion,  commissioning  and  trial  run  of 
installations/equipments  and  their  operation 
and  maintenance  through  the  suppliers/other 
teams,  where  necessary. 

f)  Make  available  shop  drawings  as  well  as  as- 
built  drawings  for  the  building  and  services. 

g)  Arrange  all  maintenance  and  operation 
manual  from  the  concerned  suppliers/ 
manufacturers. 

6.3  The  team  of  professionals  {see  4.2)  shall  work 
and  monitor  the  project  activities  for  successful 
construction/execution  of  the  project  with  regard  to 
cost,  time,  quality  and  safety. 

7  OPERATION  AND  MAINTENANCE 

7.1  The  team  of  professionals  (see  4.3)  shall  set  up  a 


system  of  periodic  maintenance  and  upkeep  of 
constructed  buildings. 

7.2  The  operation  and  maintenance  team  shall  be 
responsible  for  preparation/application  of  operation 
and  maintenance  manual,  and  draw  maintenance 
schedule/frequencies  and  guidelines  for  maintenance 
personnel.  Apart  from  the  specific  provisions  laid  down 
in  concerned  Parts/Sections  of  the  Code,  the  following, 
as  may  be  applicable  to  the  project  concerned  shall 
additionally  be  taken  into  account; 

a)  Periodic  validation  of  buildings  by  competent 
professionals  through  inspection  of  the 
buildings  in  respect  of  structural  safety  and 
safety  of  electrical  and  other  installations  and 
ensuring  that  all  fire  safety  equipments/ 
systems  are  in  proper  working  condition. 

b)  Preparation  of  preventive  maintenance 
schedules  for  all  installations  in  the  building 
and  strictly  following  the  same;  the  record  of 
the  preventive  maintenance  to  be  properly 
kept. 

c)  Ensuring  inter-disciplinary  co-ordination 
during  maintenance  and  repairs;  deployment 
of  trained  personnel  with  multi-disciplinary 
skills  to  be  encouraged. 

d)  Condition  survey  of  structures  and 
installations,  identification  of  distress  of 
various  elements  and  initiating  plans  for 
rehabilitation/retrofitting  well  in  time. 

7.3  The  proposals  for  rehabilitation/retrofitting  should 
be  prepared  after  detailed  investigations  through  visual 
inspection,  maintenance  records  and  testing  as  required 
and  got  executed  through  specialized  agencies 
under  the  guidance  and  supervision  of  competent 
professionals. 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


ANNEX  A 
{Clause  3.2) 

BRIEF  DETAILS  OF  THE  COVERAGE  OF  VARIOUS  PROVISIONS  UNDER 
DIFFERENT  OTHER  PARTS/SECTIONS  OF  THIS  CODE 


A-1  PART  1  DEFINITIONS 

It  lists  the  terms  appearing  in  all  the  Parts/Sections  of 
the  Code.  However,  some  common  definitions  are 
reproduced  in  this  Part  also. 

A-2  PART  2  ADMINISTRATION 

It  covers  the  administrative  aspects  of  the  Code,  such 
as  applicability  of  the  Code,  organization  of  building 
department  for  enforcement  of  the  Code,  procedure 
for  obtaining  development  and  building  permits,  and 
responsibility  of  the  owner  and  all  professionals 
involved  in  the  planning,  design  and  construction  of 
the  building. 

A-3  PART  3  DEVELOPMENT  CONTROL  RULES 
AND  GENERAL  BUILDING  REQUIREMENTS 

It  covers  the  development  control  rules  and  general 
building  requirements  for  proper  planning  and  design 
at  the  layout  and  building  level  to  ensure  health  safety, 
public  safety  and  desired  quality  of  life. 

A-4  PART  4  FIRE  AND  LIFE  SAFETY 

It  covers  the  requirements  for  fire  prevention,  life 
safety  in  relation  to  fire,  and  fire  protection  of 
buildings.  The  Code  specifies  planning  and 
construction  features  and  fire  protection  features  for 
all  occupancies  that  are  necessary  to  minimize  danger 
to  life  and  property. 

A-5  PARTS  BUILDING  MATERIALS 

It  covers  the  requirements  of  building  materials  and 
components,  and  criteria  for  accepting  new  or 
alternative  building  materials  and  components. 

A-6  PART  6  STRUCTURAL  DESIGN 

This  Part  through  its  seven  sections  provides  for 
structural  adequacy  of  buildings  to  deal  with  both 
internal  and  external  environment,  and  provide 
guidance  to  engineers/structural  engineers  for  varied 
usage  of  material/technology  types  for  building 
design. 

A-6.1  Section  1  Loads,  Forces  and  Effects 

It  covers  basic  design  loads  to  be  assumed  in  the  design 
of  buildings.  The  live  loads,  wind  loads,  seismic  loads, 
snow  loads  and  other  loads,  which  are  specified  therein, 
are  minimum  working  loads  which  should  be  taken 
into  consideration  for  purposes  of  design. 


A-6.2  Section  2  Soils  and  Foundations 

It  covers  structural  design  (principles)  of  all  building 
foundations,  such  as,  raft,  pile  and  other  foundation 
systems  to  ensure  safety  and  serviceability  without 
exceeding  the  permissible  stresses  of  the  materials  of 
foundations  and  the  bearing  capacity  of  the  supporting 
soil. 

A-6.3  Section  3  Timber  and  Bamboo 

A-6.3.1  Section  3A  Timber 

It  covers  the  use  of  structural  timber  in  structures  or 
elements  of  structures  connected  together  by  fasteners/ 
fastening  techniques. 

A-6.3.2  Section  3B  Bamboo 

It  covers  the  use  of  bamboo  for  constructional  purposes 
in  structures  or  elements  of  the  structure,  ensuring 
quality  and  effectiveness  of  design  and  construction 
using  bamboo.  It  covers  minimum  strength  data, 
dimensional  and  grading  requirements,  seasoning, 
preservative  treatment,  design  and  jointing  techniques 
with  bamboo  which  would  facilitate  scientific 
application  and  long-term  performance  of  structures. 
It  also  covers  guidelines  so  as  to  ensure  proper 
procurement,  storage,  precautions  and  design 
limitations  on  bamboo. 

A-6.4  Section  4  Masonry 

It  covers  the  structural  design  aspects  of  unreinforced 
load  bearing  and  non-load  bearing  walls,  constructed 
using  various  bricks,  stones  and  blocks  permitted  in 
accordance  with  this  Section.  This,  however,  also 
covers  provisions  for  design  of  reinforced  brick  and 
reinforced  brick  concrete  floors  and  roofs.  It  also 
covers  guidelines  regarding  earthquake  resistance  of 
low  strength  masonry  buildings. 

A-6.5  Section  5  Concrete 

A-6.5.1  Section  5A  Plain  and  Reinforced  Concrete 

It  covers  the  general  structural  use  of  plain  and 
reinforced  concrete. 

A-6.5.2  Section  5B  Prestressed  Concrete 

It  covers  the  general  structural  use  of  prestressed 
concrete.  It  covers  both  work  carried  out  on  site  and 
the  manufacture  of  precast  prestressed  concrete 
units. 


PART  0  INTEGRATED  APPROACH 


A-6.6  Section  6  Steel 

It  covers  the  use  of  structural  steel  in  general  building 
construction  including  the  use  of  hot  rolled  steel 
sections  and  steel  tubes. 

A-6.7  Section  7  Prefabrication,  Systems  Building 
and  Mixed/Composite  Construction 

A-6.7.1  Section  7 A  Prefabricated  Concrete 

It  covers  recommendations  regarding  modular 
planning,  component  sizes,  prefabrication  systems, 
design  considerations,  joints  and  manufacture,  storage, 
transport  and  erection  of  prefabricated  concrete 
elements  for  use  in  buildings  and  such  related 
requirements  for  prefabricated  concrete. 

A-6.7.2  Section  7B  Systems  Building  and  Mixed/ 
Composite  Construction 

It  covers  recommendations  regarding  modular 
planning,  component  sizes,  joints,  manufacture, 
storage,  transport  and  erection  of  prefabricated 
elements  for  use  in  buildings  and  such  related 
requirements  for  mixed/composite  construction. 

A-7  PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES 
AND  SAFETY 

It  covers  the  constructional  planning,  management  and 
practices  in  buildings;  storage,  stacking  and  handling 
of  materials  and  safety  of  personnel  during  construction 
operations  for  all  elements  of  a  building  and  demolition 
of  buildings.  It  also  covers  guidelines  relating  to 
maintenance  management,  repairs,  retrofitting  and 
strengthening  of  buildings.  The  objective  can  be  best 
achieved  through  proper  coordination  and  working  by 
the  project  management  and  construction  management 
teams. 

A-8  PARTS  BUILDING  SERVICES 

This  Part  through  its  five  elaborate  sections  on  utilities 
provides  detailed  guidance  to  concerned  professionals/ 
utility  engineers  for  meeting  necessary  functional 
requirements  in  buildings. 

A-8.1  Section  1  Lighting  and  Ventilation 

It  covers  requirements  and  methods  for  lighting  and 
ventilation  of  buildings. 

A-8.2  Section  2  Electrical  and  Allied  Installations 

It  covers  the  essential  requirements  for  electrical  and 
allied  installations  in  buildings  to  ensure  efficient  use 
of  electricity  including  safety  from  fire  and  shock.  This 
Section  also  includes  general  requirements  relating  to 
lightning  protection  of  buildings. 


A-8.3  Section  3  Air  Conditioning,  Heating  and 
Mechanical  Ventilation 

This  Section  covers  the  design,  construction  and 
installation  of  air  conditioning  and  heating  systems  and 
equipment  installed  in  buildings  for  the  purpose 
of  providing  and  maintaining  conditions  of  air 
temperature,  humidity,  purity  and  distribution  suitable 
for  the  use  and  occupancy  of  the  space. 

A-8.4  Section  4  Acoustics,  Sound  Insulation  and 
Noise  Control 

It  covers  requirements  and  guidelines  regarding 
planning  against  noise,  acceptable  noise  levels  and  the 
requirements  for  sound  insulation  in  buildings  with 
different  occupancies. 

A-8. 5  Section  5  Installation  of  Lifts  and 
Escalators 

It  covers  the  essential  requirements  for  the  installation, 
operation,  maintenance  and  also  inspection  of  lifts 
(passenger  lifts,  goods  lifts,  hospital  lifts,  service  lifts 
and  dumb-waiter)  and  escalators  so  as  to  ensure  safe 
and  satisfactory  performance. 

A-9  PART  9  PLUMBING  SERVICES 

This  Part  through  its  two  sections  gives  detailed 
guidance  to  concerned  professionals/plumbing 
engineers  with  regard  to  plumbing  and  other  related 
requirements  in  buildings. 

A-9.1  Section  1  Water  Supply,  Drainage  and 
Sanitation  (Including  Solid  Waste  Management) 

It  covers  the  basic  requirements  of  water  supply  for 
residential,  business  and  other  types  of  buildings, 
including  traffic  terminal  stations.  This  Section  also 
deals  with  general  requirements  of  plumbing  connected 
to  public  water  supply  and  design  of  water  supply 
systems. 

It  also  covers  the  design,  layout,  construction  and 
maintenance  of  drains  for  foul  water,  surface  water 
and  sub-soil  water  and  sewage;  together  with  all 
ancillary  works,  such  as  connections,  manholes  and 
inspection  chambers  used  within  the  building  and  from 
building  to  the  connection  to  a  public  sewer,  private 
sewer,  individual  sewage-disposal  system,  cess-pool, 
soakaway  or  to  other  approved  point  of  disposal/ 
treatment  work.  It  also  includes  the  provisions  on  solid 
waste  management. 

A-9.2  Section  2  Gas  Supply 

It  covers  the  requirements  regarding  the  safety  of  persons 
and  property  for  all  piping  uses  and  for  all  types  of  gases 
used  for  fuel  or  lighting  purposes  in  buildings. 


10 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


A-10  PART  10  LANDSCAPING,  SIGNS  AND  A-10.2  Section  2  Signs  and  Outdoor  Display 

OUTDOOR  DISPLAY  STRUCTURES  Structures 

A-10.1  Section  1  Landscape  Planning  and  Design  It  covers  the  requirements  with  regard  to  public  safety. 

It  covers  requirements  of  landscape  planning  and  structural  safety  and  fire  safety  of  all  signs  and  outdoor 

design  with  the  view  to  promoting  quahty  of  outdoor  "^'""P^^y  structures  including  the  overall  aesthetical 

built  environment  and  protection  of  land  and  its  aspects  of  imposition  of  signs  and  outdoor  display 

resources  structures  in  the  outdoor  built  environment. 


PART  0  INTEGRATED  APPROACH  11 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 

PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


BUREAU   OF  INDIAN   STANDARDS 


CONTENTS 


FOREWORD 
1    SCOPE 


SECTION  1   CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES 

2  PLANNING,  MANAGEMENT  AND  PRACTICES 

SECTION  2  STORAGE,  STACKING  AND  HANDLING 
PRACTICES 

3  GENERAL 

4  STORAGE,  STACKING  AND  HANDLING  OF  MATERIALS 

5  UNLOADING  RAIL/ROAD  WAGONS  AND  MOTOR  VEHICLES 


11 
12 
21 


SECTION  3  SAFETY  IN  CONSTRUCTION  OF 
ELEMENTS  OF  A  BUILDING 

6  GENERAL 

7  TERMINOLOGY 

8  TEMPORARY  CONSTRUCTION,  USE  OF  SIDE  WALLS  AND 
TEMPORARY  ENCROACHMENTS 

9  TESTING 

1 0  INSPECTION  AND  RECTIFICATION  OF  HAZARDOUS  DEFECTS 

11  FOUNDATIONS 

12  GENERAL  REQUIREMENTS  AND  COMMON  HAZARDS  DURING 
EXCAVATION 

1 3  PILING  AND  OTHER  DEEP  FOUNDATIONS 

14  WALLS 

1 5  COMMON  HAZARDS  DURING  WALLING 

16  ROOFING 

17  ADDITIONAL  SAFETY  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  ERECTION  OF 
CONCRETE  FRAMED  STRUCTURES  (HIGH-RISE  BUILDINGS) 

1 8  ADDITIONAL  SAFETY  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  ERECTION  OF 
STRUCTURAL  STEEL  WORK 

19  MISCELLANEOUS  ITEMS 

20  FINISHES 

21  FRAGILE  FIXTURES 

22  SAFETY  IN  SPECIAL  OPERATIONS 

23  ELECTRICAL  INSTALLATIONS  AND  LIFTS 

24  GENERAL  REQUIREMENTS 

25  CONSTRUCTION  MACHINERY 


22 
22 
23 

23 
23 
24 
24 

25 
27 
28 
29 
30 

33 

36 

38 
38 
38 
38 
38 
40 


SECTION  4  MAINTENANCE  MANAGEMENT,  REPAIRS,  RETROFITTING 
AND  STRENGTHENING  OF  BUILDINGS 

26    MAINTENANCE  MANAGEMENT 


40 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


27  PREVENTION  OF  CRACKS 

28  REPAIRS  AND  SEISMIC  STRENGTHENING  OF  BUILDINGS 


46 

47 


SECTION  5  SAFETY  IN  DEMOLITION  OF  BUILDINGS 

29  GENERAL 

30  PRECAUTIONS  PRIOR  TO  DEMOLITION 

3 1  PRECAUTIONS  DURING  DEMOLITION 

32  SEQUENCE  OF  DEMOLITION  OPERATIONS 

33  WALLS 

34  FLOORING 

35  DEMOLITION  OF  STEEL  STRUCTURES 

36  CATCH  PLATFORM 

37  STAIRS,  PASSAGEWAYS  AND  LADDERS 

38  MECHANICAL  DEMOLITION 

39  DEMOLITION  OF  CERTAIN  SPECIAL  TYPES  AND  ELEMENTS  OF 
STRUCTURES 

40  LOWERING,  REMOVAL  AND  DISPOSAL  OF  MATERIALS 

41  MISCELLANEOUS 

42  FIRST-AID 

ANNEX  A      PROGRAMME  EVALUATION  AND  REVIEW  TECHNIQUE, 
AND  CRITICAL  PATH  METHOD 

ANNEX  B      CHECK  LIST  FOR  STACKING  AND  STORAGE  OF  MATERIALS 

ANNEX  C      COMMON  CAUSES  FOR  MAINTENANCE  PROBLEMS 

ANNEX  D      FORMAT  FOR  INSPECTION  REPORT 

ANNEX  E      GUIDELINES  FOR  MAINTENANCE  OF  ELECTRICAL 
EQUIPMENTS 


LIST  OF  STANDARDS 


48 
49 
50 
50 
50 
50 
50 
51 
51 
51 
51 

52 
53 
53 

54 

55 
56 
57 
58 

60 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


National  Building  Code  Sectional  Committee,  CED  46 


FOREWORD 

This  Part  of  the  Code  emphasizes  the  importance  of  carrying  out  all  constructional  operations  in  a  safe  and 
efficient  manner.  Workers  in  large  number,  both  skilled  and  unskilled,  are  engaged  in  the  innumerable  construction 
works.  Due  to  increased  tempo  of  such  a  building  activity  and  large  scale  mechanization,  hazards  of  accidents 
could  increase  considerably.  It  is,  therefore,  imperative  that  adequate  safety  rules  are  laid  down  for  every  phase 
of  construction  work. 

Planning  the  various  constructional  operations  before  hand  and  making  adequate  arrangements  for  procurement 
and  storage  of  materials,  and  the  machinery  to  get  work  done  is  as  important  as  carrying  out  these  constructional 
operations  in  accordance  with  good  practice.  Lack  of  planning  or  defective  planning  may  result  in  avoidable 
delay  in  the  completion  of  work  and  consequently  increased  hazards  from  the  point  of  view  of  fire,  health  and 
structural  soundness. 

The  first  version  of  this  Part  was  prepared  in  1970,  which  was  subsequently  revised  in  1983.  In  the  first  revision, 
information  regarding  handling  operations,  that  is  unloading,  stacking,  lifting,  loading  and  conveying  of  building 
materials,  was  also  given  along  with  the  storage  practices.  Additional  information  regarding  the  use  of  ladders; 
safety  requirements  for  floor  and  wall  openings,  railings  and  toe  boards;  piling  and  other  deep  foundations; 
constructions  involving  use  of  hot  bituminous  materials;  and  erection  of  structural  steel  work  and  concrete  framed 
structures,  etc,  were  included. 

As  a  result  of  experience  gained  in  implementation  of  1983  version  of  this  part  and  feedback  received  as  well  as 
in  view  of  formulation  of  new  standards  in  the  field  of  constructional  practices  and  safety  and  revision  of  some 
existing  standards,  a  need  to  revise  this  Part  was  felt.  This  revision  has,  therefore,  been  prepared  to  take  care  of 
these  aspects.  The  significant  changes  incorporated  in  this  revision  include: 

a)  The  Section  1  Constructional  Practices  have  been  revamped  and  now  includes  the  Planning  and 
Management  aspects. 

b)  The  provisions  with  regard  to  stacking  and  storage  of  building  materials  and  components  have  been 
updated  and  comprehensively  covered  in  line  with  IS  4082  :  1996.  This  revision  now  also  covers 
provisions  for  materials  like  stones,  blocks,  roof  tiles,  partially  prefabricated  wall  and  roof  components, 
cinder,  aluminium  section,  cast  iron  and  aluminium  sheets,  plastic  sheets,  doors  and  windows,  etc. 

c)  Provisions  on  constructional  practices  using  bamboo  have  been  included. 

d)  Provisions  of  safety  requirements  of  hoists/lifts  for  worker  during  construction  have  been  added. 

e)  Provisions  with  regard  to  safety  at  work  site  have  been  detailed  incorporating  aspects  like  preventive 
measures,  such  as,  falling  material  hazards  prevention,  fall  prevention,  disposal  of  debris,  fire  protection, 
etc. 

f)  Provisions  regarding  safety  management  at  work  sites  have  been  added. 

g)  A  new  section  on  'Maintenance  management,  repairs,  retrofitting  and  strengthening  of  buildings'  has 
been  added,  covering  aspects  like  maintenance  management,  prevention  of  cracks,  and  repairs  and 
seismic  strengthening  of  buildings. 

h)     Safety  provisions  with  respect  to  demolition  of  buildings  have  been  updated, 
j)      Reference  to  all  the  concerned  Indian  Standards  have  been  updated. 

Bamboo  is  a  versatile  renewable  resource  having  low  gestation  period,  characterized  by  high  strength,  low  mass 
and  ease  of  working  with  simple  tools.  Resilience  coupled  with  lightness  makes  it  suitable  for  housing  in 
earthquake-prone  and  disaster-prone  areas.  It  has  the  capacity  to  absorb  more  energy  and  shows  larger  deflections 
before  collapse  and  as  such  is  safer  under  earth  tremors.  In  this  revision  of  this  Part,  therefore,  provisions  on 
construction  using  bamboo  have  been  incorporated.  The  structural  design  aspects  are  covered  in  Part  6  'Structural 
Design,  Section  3  Timber  and  Bamboo,  3B  Bamboo'. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


The  information  contained  in  tliis  Part  is  largely  based  on  the  following  Indian  Standards  and  Special  Publications: 

Title 
Safety  code  for  scaffolds  and  ladders: 
Scaffolds 
Ladders 

Code  of  practice  for  excavation  work  (first  revision) 

Recommendations  on  stacking  and  storage  of  construction  materials  and  components 
at  site  {second  revision) 

Safety  code  for  demolition  of  buildings  {second  revision) 

Safety  requirements  for  floor  and  wall  openings,  railing  and  toe  boards  (first  revision) 
Safety  code  for  piling  and  other  deep  foundations 
Safety  code  for  construction  involving  use  of  hot  bituminous  materials 
Safety  code  for  erection  of  structural  steel  work 
Safety  code  for  handling  and  storage  of  building  materials 
Safety  code  for  erection  of  concrete  framed  structures 
Safety  code  for  protective  barrier  in  and  around  buildings 
Recommendations  for  preventive  measures  against  hazards  at  work  places: 
Falling  material  hazards  prevention 
Fall  prevention 
Disposal  of  debris 
Timber  structures 
Fire  protection 

Code  of  practice  for  safety  during  additional  construction  and  alteration  to  existing 
buildings 


IS  No. 

3696 

(Part  1)  :  1987 

(Part  2):  1991 

3764  :  1992 

4082  :  1996 

4130:  1991 

4912  :  1978 

5121  :  1969 

5916  :  1970 

7205  :  1974 

7969  :  1975 

8989  :  1978 

13415  :  1992 

13416 

(Part  1) 

1992 

(Part  2) 

1992 

(Part  3) 

1994 

(Part  4) 

1994 

(Part  5) 

1994 

13430  :  1992 


A  reference  to  SP  62  :  1992  'Handbook  on  building  construction  practices  (excluding  electrical  works)'  and 
SP  70  :  2001  'Handbook  on  construction  safety  practices'  may  also  be  made. 

All  standards,  whether  given  herein  above  or  cross  referred  to  in  the  main  text  of  this  Part,  are  subject  to  revision. 
The  parties  to  agreement  based  on  this  Part  are  encouraged  to  investigate  the  possibility  of  applying  the  most 
recent  editions  of  the  standards. 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


1  SCOPE 

This  Part  of  the  Code  covers  the  constructional 
planning,  management  and  practices  in  buildings; 
storage,  stacking  and  handling  of  materials  and  safety 
of  personnel  during  construction  operations  for  all 
elements  of  a  building  and  demolition  of  buildings.  It 
also  covers  guidelines  relating  to  maintenance 
management,  repairs,  retrofitting  and  strengthening  of 
buildings. 

SECTION  1   CONSTRUCTIONAL 
PRACTICES 

2  PLANNING,  MANAGEMENT  A>JD  PRACTICES 

2.1  Planning  Aspects 

Construction  planning  aspects  aim  to  identify  and 
develop  various  stages  of  project  execution  on  site 
which  should  be  consistent  with  the  management 
considerations.  Planning  aspects  evolve  out  of  the 
objectives  of  project  and  requirements  of  the  final 
completed  constructed  facility.  These  objectives  could 
relate  to  the  final  constraints,  cost  considerations, 
quality  standards,  safety  standards,  environmental 
considerations  and  health  considerations.  Construction 
practices  would,  then  have  to  satisfy  these  objectives 
during  construction  phase  of  the  project. 

Having  established  objectives  of  the  construction 
phase,  planning  determines  processes,  resources 
(including  materials,  equipments,  human  and 
environmental)  and  monitoring  system  to  ensure  that 
the  practices  are  appropriately  aligned.  Adequate 
knowledge  about  pre-construction  phase  evolution  of 
project,  especially  related  to  customer' s  requirements, 
is  an  essential  prerequisite  for  construction  planning. 

2.1.1  Preconstruction  Phase 

2.1.1.1  Besides  the  design  aspects,  preconstruction 
phase  should  also  address  all  the  issues  related  to  the 
implementation  of  the  design  at  the  site  through  suitable 
construction  strategy.  During  the  design  stage,  the  site 
conditions  should  be  fully  understood  with  anticipated 
difficulties  and  avoid  the  risk  of  subsequent  delays  and 
changes  after  the  construction  has  started. 

2.1.1.2  The  selection  of  construction  methods, 
building  systems  and  materials,  components, 
manpower  and  equipments  and  techniques  are  best 
done  in  the  preconstruction  phase.  Such  selection  is 
influenced  by  the  local  conditions  like  terrain,  climate, 
vulnerability  for  disasters,  etc. 

2.1.1.3  Construction  in  busy  localities  of  cities  needs 


special  considerations  and  meticulous  planning  due  to 
restricted  space,  adjoining  structures,  underground 
utilities,  traffic  restrictions,  noise  and  other 
environmental  pollution  and  other  specific  site 
constraints. 

2.1.1.4  The  constructability  aspects  of  the  proposed 
construction  methods  needs  to  be  carefully  evaluated 
at  the  planning  stage  to  ensure  ease  of  construction 
besides  optimizing  the  construction  schedule  and 
achieving  quality,  reliability  and  maintainability  of  the 
constructed  facilities. 

2.1.1.5  Constructional  practices  in  hilly  regions  needs 
to  take  into  considerations  the  problem  of  landslides, 
slope  stability,  drainage,  etc,  besides  ensuring  no 
adverse  impact  on  the  fragile  environmental  conditions. 

2.1.1.6  Durability  of  constructions  in  corrosive 
atmospheric  conditions  like  coastal  regions  and 
aggressive  ground  situations  with  high  chlorides  and 
sulphates  should  also  be  taken  care  of  with  appropriate 
constructional  practices. 

2.1.1.7  Constructional  practices  in  disaster  prone  areas 
need  specific  planning.  The  type  of  construction,  use 
of  materials,  construction  techniques  require  special 
considerations  in  such  areas. 

2.1.1.8  Adverse  weather  conditions  have  strong 
bearing  on  construction  phase.  Situations  wherein 
constructions  are  to  be  carried  out  in  adverse  weather 
conditions,  such  as  heavy  and  continuous  rain  fall, 
extreme  hot  or  cold  weather,  dust  storms,  etc,  the 
practices  have  to  address  the  relevant  aspects. 
Accordingly,  suitable  design  and  field  operations 
should  be  adapted  or  redefined  in  anticipation  of  these 
aspects.  Some  of  these  aspects  are: 

a)  Site  layout  which  enables  accessibility  in 
adverse  weather. 

b)  Adequate  protected  storage  for  weather 
sensitive  materials/equipments. 

c)  Protections  to  personnel  from  extreme  hot/ 
control  conditions. 

d)  Scheduling  to  allow  maximization  of  outdoor 
activities  during  fair  weather  conditions. 

e)  Special  design  and  construction  provisions  for 
activities  in  extreme  temperature  conditions 
like  hot  or  cold  weather  concreting,  staple  of 
false  work  in  extreme  wind  conditions  (gusts). 

f)  Adequate  lighting  for  shorter  days  in  winter/ 
night  work. 

g)  Design  for  early  enclosure. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


2.1.2  Resource  Planning 

Resource  planning  aims  to  identify  requirement, 
availability  and  regulatory /control  processes  related  to 
resources.  Resource  planning  is  a  generic  expression 
but  the  actual  process  of  planning  is  specific  to  the 
resources  considered. 

In  construction  phases,  the  resources  could  be 
categorized  as  materials,  manufactured  products, 
equipments  for  construction,  installation  and 
fabrication,  human  resources  as  a  part  of  overall 
organization,  information  resources,  such  as,  reference 
standards  and  other  practice  documents,  environmental 
conditions  for  work  on  site  and  infrastructure  facilities. 
Therefore,  the  resource  planning  encompasses 
identification,  estimation,  scheduling  and  allocation  of 
resources.  Resource  planning  needs  to  establish 
a  control  system  for  controlling  consumption 
monitoring,  corrective  action  and  resource  reappropriation 
in  the  event  of  favourable  deviation.  Organizational 
capability,  commitment  to  the  project  requirements  and 
other  constraints  such  as  time  and  cost,  need  to  be 
considered  as  inputs  while  planning  resources. 
Techniques  of  management  and  planning,  such  as. 
Programme  Evaluation  and  Review  Technique  (PERT) 
and  Critical  Path  Method  (CPM)  (see  Annex  A)  may 
be  used. 

Non-availability  of  basic  building  materials  (brick, 
stone  aggregate,  etc)  within  reasonable  lead  would 
influence  the  constructional  practice  by  alternative 
materials.  The  constructional  practices  also  get 
decided  by  the  local  skills  of  the  manpower  for 
constructional  activities.  The  equipment  selection 
would  also  be  governed  by  the  site  constraints. 
Therefore,  as,  the  resource  planning  is  critical  to  the 
project  viability  itself,  the  inputs  to  the  resource 
planning  need  to  be  validated  appropriately  and 
established  for  such  management.  Resource  planning 
should  establish  a  proper  system  of  data  collection 
so  as  to  facilitate  effective  resources  control 
mechanism.  Resource  planning  responsibility  has  to 
be  specifically  defined  in  the  overall  organizational 
setup. 

2.1.3  Construction  Phase 

2.1.3.1  Organizational  structure 

The  site  management  should  be  carried  out  through 
suitable  site  organization  structure  with  roles  and 
responsibilities  assigned  to  the  construction  personnel 
for  various  construction  related  functions.  Safety 
management  is  one  of  the  important  components  of 
site  management. 

2.1.3.2  Site  layout 

The  layout  of  the  construction  site  should  be  carefully 


planned  keeping  in  view  the  various  requirements  to 
construction  activities  and  the  specific  constraints  in 
terms  of  its  size,  shape,  topography,  traffic  and  other 
restrictions,  in  public  interest.  A  well  planned  site 
layout  would  enable  safe  smooth  and  efficient 
construction  operations.  The  site  layout  should  take 
into  considerations  the  following  factors: 

a)  Easy  access  and  exit,  with  proper  parking  of 
vehicle  and  equipments  during  construction. 

b)  Properly  located  material  stores  for  easy 
handling  and  storage. 

c)  Adequate  stack  areas  for  bulk  construction 
materials. 

d)  Optimum  location  of  plants  and  equipments 
(batching  plants,  etc). 

e)  Layout  of  temporary  services  (water,  power, 
power  suppression  unit,  hoists,  cranes, 
elevators,  etc). 

f)  Adequate  yard  lighting  and  lighting  for  night 
shifts. 

g)  Temporary  buildings;  site  office  and  shelter 
for  workforce  with  use  of  non-combustible 
materials  as  far  as  possible  including 
emergency  medical  aids. 

h)     Roads  for  vehicular  movement  with  effective 

drainage  plan, 
j)      Construction  safety  with  emergency  access 

and  evacuations  and  security  measures, 
k)     Fabrication    yards    for  reinforcement 

assembly,  concrete  precasting  and  shuttering 

materials, 
m)    Fencing,  barricades  and  signages. 

2.1.3.3  Access  for  fire  fighting  equipment  vehicles 

Access  for  fire  fighting  equipment  shall  be  provided 
to  the  construction  site  at  the  start  of  construction  and 
maintained  until  all  construction  work  is  completed. 

2.1.3.3.1  Free  access  from  the  street  to  fire  hydrants/ 
static  water  tanks,  where  available,  shall  be  provided 
and  maintained  at  all  times. 

2.1.3.3.2  No  materials  for  construction  shall  be  placed 
within  3  m  of  hydrants/static  water  tanks. 

2.1.3.3.3  During  building  operations,  free  access  to 
permanent,  temporary  or  portable  first-aid  fire  fighting 
equipment  shall  be  maintained  at  all  times. 

2.1.3.4  Access  to  the  upper  floors  during  construction 

In  all  buildings  over  two  storeys  high,  at  least  one 
stairway  shall  be  provided  in  usable  condition  at  all 
times.  This  stairway  shall  be  extended  upward  as  each 
floor  is  completed.  There  shall  be  a  handrail  on  the 
staircase. 


8 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


2.1.3.5  Construction  strategy  and  construction 
sequence 

Construction  strategy  and  construction  methods  are  to 
be  evolved  at  the  planning  and  design  stage  specific  to 
the  conditions  and  constraints  of  the  project  site  and 
implemented  by  the  site  management  personnel  to 
ensure  ease  of  construction  and  smooth  flow  of 
construction  activities.  Sites  of  high  water  table 
conditions  with  aggressive  chemical  contents  of  subsoil 
needs  special  design  considerations.  Buildings  with 
basement  in  sites  of  high  water  table  should  be  planned 
with  dewatering  scheme  with  appropriate  construction 
sequence.  Duration  of  dewatering  should  continue  till 
sufficient  dead  loads  are  achieved  to  stabilize  the 
buoyancy  loads  with  adequate  factor  of  safety.  The 
construction  sequence  should  be  planned  taking  into 
consideration  the  following  aspects: 

a)  Availability  of  resources  (men,  material  and 
equipment); 

b)  Construction  methods  employed  including 
prefabrication; 

c)  Planned  construction  time; 

d)  Design  requirements  and  load  transfer 
mechanism; 

e)  Stability  of  ground  like  in  hilly  terrain; 

f)  Ensuring  slope  stability  with  retaining 
structure  before  the  main  construction; 

g)  Installation    and    movement    of   heavy 
equipments  like  cranes  and  piling  equipments; 

h)     Effect  of  weather;  and 
j )      Minimum  time  to  be  spent  below  ground  level 
working. 

2.1.4  Scope  Management 

Construction  management  efforts  should  ensure  that 
the  project  features  and  functions  that  characterise  the 
project  scope  remain  as  established  during  the  design 
finalization  stage.  Accordingly,  construction  phase 
practices  need  to  be  oriented  to  manage  the  project 
scope.  As  a  part  of  overall  project  scope  management 
functions,  the  processes  of  scope  planning,  scope 
definition  and  scope  verification  are  associated  with 
the  preconstruction  phase  of  the  project.  The  scope 
monitoring  and  the  change  control  are  critical  to  the 
construction  phase  leading  to  serious  implications  on 
the  time  and  cost  aspects.  In  this  respect,  consolidated 
brief  of  the  project  established  at  the  end  of  the  design 
completion  is  an  essential  reference  for  scope  baseline. 

2.2  Construction  Management 

Construction  phase  of  the  project  transfers  the  project 
conceived  on  paper  in  the  form  of  plans  and  designs, 
into  reality  by  use  of  resources  like  materials,  machines 


and  men  through  one  or  more  construction  agencies. 
To  fulfil  the  construction  scope  with  quality,  in  time 
and  under  safe  conditions  within  a  reasonable  cost,  it 
is  desired  that  the  project  is  planned  for  managing 
construction  for  amalgamation  of  above  resources  for 
their  optimum  use  and  its  continuous  monitoring. 
Agencies  managing  the  supervision  and/or  construction 
are  desired  to  plan  and  document  a  management  system 
with  clear  cut  responsibilities  and  for  managing  various 
parameters  like  scope,  time,  quality,  health,  safety  and 
environment  and  cost  for  implementation,  monitoring 
and  control  for  their  effectiveness.  This  may  be 
preferably  inline  with  proven  National/International 
documentation  system  covering  all  aspects  of 
monitoring  and  controls.  Various  parameters  to  be 
managed  during  construction  are  as  below. 

2.2.1  Time  Management 

Considering  the  importance  of  time  in  a  project,  it  is 
desirable  that  project  is  completed  in  the  defined  time 
schedule  to  get  its  fruitful  benefits.  The  system  planned 
should  cover  total  schedule  of  completion  with  one  or 
more  construction  agencies,  number  of  vendors, 
identification  of  total  resources,  timely  availability  of 
all  inputs,  including  critical  ones,  its  processing  during 
construction  of  a  project.  The  system  should  include  a 
periodic  review  of  a  project  with  all  parameters  as  well 
as  catch  up  plans  in  case  of  delay  identified  for  controls 
and  reporting  from  time  to  time.  The  system  planned 
should  preferably  be  computer  friendly  and  simple  to 
follow  for  implementation,  monitoring  and  controls 
and  for  reporting  from  time-to-time. 

2.2.2  Quality  Management 

Quality  of  a  project  should  be  planned  for  all  activities 
from  inception  to  completion.  It  is  desirable  that  the 
system  planned  gives  adequate  assurance  and  controls 
that  it  shall  meet  project  quality  objectives.  The  system 
shall  cover  review  of  existing  requirements,  sub- 
contracting, materials,  processes  and  controls  during 
process,  auditing,  training  of  personnel,  final  inspection 
and  acceptance.  All  activities  shall  be  planned  and 
controlled.  Quality  systems  approach  may  be  referred 
for  planning,  suitable  to  a  particular  project  for 
implementation . 

2.2.3  Health,  Safety  and  Environement 

Each  project  affects  the  safety  and  health  of  the 
workmen  and  surroundings  during  construction. 
Various  activities  having  impact  on  health,  safety  and 
environment  need  to  be  identified  with  their  likely 
effect  and  proposed  preventive  corrective  actions, 
together  with  the  concerned  statutory  obligations.  The 
system  planned  for  health,  safety  and  environment  shall 
address  and  cover  the  above  including  use  of  personnel 
protective  equipments  by  all  concerned,  and  reporting 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


on  their  monitoring  and  controls  during  project 
implementation. 

2.2.4  Cost  Management 

To  keep  the  project  under  viable  proposition,  it  is 
desired  that  cost  of  the  project  during  construction  are 
monitored  and  controlled  through  a  documentation 
system.  The  various  parameters  which  may  affect  the 
basic  cost,  escalations,  cost  due  to  variation  in  scope 
and  quantities,  etc  need  to  be  monitored  at  a  defined 
frequency.  The  system  planned  may  be  in  line  with  a 
proven  cost  control  method  or  similar  in  nature  and 
cost  incurred  vis-a-vis  cost  sanctioned  and  cost 
anticipated  to  be  reported  and  controlled  from  time  to 
time. 

2.3  Construction  Control  and  Practices 

2.3.1  Professional  Services  and  Responsibilities 

The  responsibility  of  professionals  with  regard  to 
planning  designing  and  supervision  of  building 
construction  work,  etc  and  that  of  the  owner  shall  be 
in  accordance  with  Part  2  'Administration'.  All 
applications  for  permits  and  issuance  of  certificates, 
etc  shall  be  as  given  in  Part  2  'Administration'. 
Employment  of  trained  workers  shall  be  encouraged 
for  building  construction  activity. 

2.3.2  Construction  of  all  Elements 

Construction  of  all  elements  of  a  building  shall  be  in 
accordance  with  good  practice  [7(1)].  Constructional 
aspects  using  bamboo  shall  be  as  given  in  2.3.3.  It  shall 
also  be  ensured  that  the  elements  of  structure  satisfy 
the  appropriate  fire  resistance  requirements  as  specified 
in  Part  4  'Fire  and  Life  Safety',  and  quality  of  building 
materials/components  used  shall  be  in  accordance  with 
Part  5  'Building  Materials'. 

2.3.3  Construction  Using  Bamboo 

2.3.3.1  Bamboo  being  a  versatile  resource  characterized 
by  high  strength,  low  mass  and  ease  of  working  with 
simple  tools,  it  is  desirable  to  increasingly  make 
appropriate  use  of  this  material.  Design  of  structures 
using  bamboo  shall  be  done  in  accordance  with 
Part  6  'Structural  Design,  Section  3  Timber  and 
Bamboo,  3B  Bamboo'.  For  construction  using  bamboo, 
some  of  the  important  constructional  provisions  given 
in  2.3.3.2  to  2.3.3.6  shall  be  followed. 

2.3.3.2  Working  finishing 

2.3.3.2.1  Bamboo  can  be  cut  and  split  easily  with  very 
simple  hand  tools.  Immature  bamboos  are  soft,  pliable 
and  can  be  moulded  to  desired  shape.  It  takes  polish 
and  paint  well. 

2.3.3.2.2  While  it  is  possible  to  walk  with  bamboo 
simply  using  a  machete,  a  few  basic  tools,  such  as. 


machete,  hack  saw,  axe,  hatchet,  sharpening  tools, 
adze,  chisel  (20  mm),  drill,  wood  rasps,  steel  rod,  and 
pliers,  will  greatly  increase  the  effectiveness  of  the 
construction  process. 

2.3.3.2.3  For  providing  safety  to  the  structure  against 
fire,  bamboo  may  be  given  fire  retardant  treatment 
using  following  chemicals;  a  few  drops  of  concentrated 
HCl  shall  be  added  to  the  solution  to  dissolve  the 
precipitated  salts: 

Ammonium  phosphate  3  parts 

Boric  acid  3  parts 

Copper  sulphate  1  part 

Zinc  chloride  5  parts 

Sodium  dichromate  3  parts 

Water  100  parts 

2.3.3.2.4  Foundations 

Bamboo  in  direct  contact  with  ground,  bamboo  on  rock 
or  preformed  concrete  footing,  bamboo  incorporated 
into  concrete  or  bamboo  piles  may  form  the  foundation 
structure  {see  Fig.  1). 

2.3.3.2.5  Floors 

The  floor  of  bamboo  may  be  at  ground  level  with 
covering  of  bamboo  matting,  etc.  In  elevated  floors, 
bamboo  members  become  an  integral  part  of  structural 
framework  of  building.  The  floor  will  comprise 
structural  bamboo  elements  and  bamboo  decking. 

2.3.3.2.6  Jointing  Techniques 

The  jointing  techniques  in  construction  using  bamboo 
shall  be  in  accordance  with  Part  6  'Structural  Design, 
Section  3  Timber  and  Bamboo,  3B  Bamboo'. 

2.3.4  Low  Income  Housing 

For  low  income  housing,  appropriate  planning  and 
selection  of  building  materials  and  techniques  of 
construction  have  to  be  judiciously  done  and  applied 
in  practice.  Requirements  of  low  income  housing 
specified  in  Part  3  'Development  Control  Rules  and 
General  Building  Requirements',  shall  be  followed. 
However,  all  requirements  regarding  structural  safety, 
health  safety  and  fire  safety  shall  be  in  accordance  with 
this  Code. 

2.3.5  Site  Preparation 

While  preparing  the  site  for  construction,  bush  and 
other  wood,  debris,  etc,  shall  be  removed  and  promptly 
disposed  of  so  as  to  minimize  the  attendant  hazards. 

Temporary  buildings  for  construction  offices  and 
storage  shall  be  so  located  as  to  cause  the  minimum 
fire  hazards  and  shall  be  constructed  from  non- 
combustible  materials  as  far  as  possible. 


10 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


1A  BAMBOO  ON  PREFORMED 
CONCRETE  FOOTINGS 


IB  BAMBOO  INCORPORATED  INTO  CONCRETE 
FOOTINGS  (SINGLE  POST  FOOTING) 


1C  BAMBOO  OUT  OF  GROUND  CONTACT  ON  STRIP  FOOTINGS  OF  CONCRETE  (LARGE 
DIAMETER  THICK  WALLED  BAMBOO  WITH  CLOSELY  SPACED  NODES  TO  BE  USED) 

Fig.   1  Bamboo  Foundations 


2.3.6   Use  of  New/Alternative  Construction  Techniques 

The  provisions  of  this  part  are  not  intended  to  prevent 
use  of  any  construction  techniques  including  any 
alternative  materials,  not  specifically  prescribed  by  the 
Code,  provided  any  such  alternative  has  been  approved. 
The  Authority  may  approve  any  such  alternative  such 
as  ferrocement  construction,  row-lock  (rat  trap)  bond 
in  masonry,  stretcher  bond  in  filler  slab  and  filler  slab 
provided  it  is  found  that  the  proposed  alternative  is 
satisfactory  and  conforms  to  the  provisions  of  relevant 
parts  regarding  material,  design  and  construction  and 
that  material,  method,  or  work  offered  is,  for  the 
purpose  intended,  at  least  equivalent  to  that  prescribed 
in  the  Code  in  quality,  strength,  compatibility, 
effectiveness,  fire  and  water  resistance,  durability  and 
safety. 

SECTION  2  STORAGE,  STACKING  AND 
HANDLING  PRACTICES 

3  GENERAL 

3.1  Planning  and  Storage  Layout 

3.1.1  For  any  site,  there  should  be  proper  planning  of 


the  layout  for  stacking  and  storage  of  different 
materials,  components  and  equipments  with  proper 
access  and  proper  manoeuvrability  of  the  vehicles 
carrying  the  material.  While  planning  the  layout,  the 
requirements  of  various  materials,  components  and 
equipments  at  different  stages  of  construction  shall  be 
considered. 

3.1.2  Materials  shall  be  segregated  as  to  kind,  size  and 
length  and  placed  in  neat,  orderly  piles  that  are  safe 
against  falling.  If  piles  are  high  they  shall  be  stepped 
back  at  suitable  intervals  in  height.  Piles  of  materials 
shall  be  arranged  so  as  to  allow  a  passageway  of  not 
less  than  1  m  width  in  between  the  piles  or  stacks  for 
inspection  or  removal.  All  passageways  shall  be  kept 
clear  of  dry  vegetation. 

3.1.3  Materials  shall  be  stored,  stacked  and  handled 
in  such  a  manner  as  to  prevent  deterioration  or  intrusion 
of  foreign  matter  and  to  ensure  the  preservation  of  their 
quality  and  fitness  for  the  work. 

3.1.4  Materials  shall  be  stacked  on  well  drained,  firm 
and  unyielding  surface.  Materials  shall  not  be  stacked 
so  as  to  impose  any  undue  stresses  on  walls  or  other 
structures. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


11 


3.1.5  Materials  shall  be  stacked  in  such  a  manner  as 
not  to  constitute  a  hazard  to  passerby.  At  such  places 
the  stacks  shall  have  suitable  warning  signs  in  day  time 
and  red  lights  on  and  around  them  at  night. 

3.1.6  Stairways,  passageways  and  gangways  shall  not 
become  obstructed  by  storage  of  building  materials, 
tools  or  accumulated  rubbish. 

3.2  Protection  Against  Atmospheric  Agencies 

Materials  stored  at  site,  depending  upon  the  individual 
characteristics,  shall  be  protected  from  atmospheric 
actions,  such  as  rain,  sun,  winds  and  moisture,  to  avoid 
deterioration. 

3.3  Manual  Handling 

When  heavy  materials  have  to  be  handled  manually 
each  workman  shall  be  instructed  by  his  foreman  or 
supervisor  for  the  proper  method  of  handling  such 
materials.  Each  workman  shall  be  provided  with 
suitable  equipment  for  his  personal  safety  as  necessary. 
Supervisors  shall  also  take  care  to  assign  enough  men 
to  each  such  job  depending  on  the  weight  and  the 
distance  involved. 

3.4  Protection  Against  Fire  and  Other  Hazards 

3.4.1  Materials,  like  timber,  bamboo,  coal,  paints,  etc, 
shall  be  stored  in  such  a  way  that  there  may  not  be  any 
possibility  of  fire  hazards.  Inflammable  materials  like 
kerosene  and  petrol,  shall  be  stored  in  accordance  with 
the  relevant  rules  and  regulations  so  as  to  ensure  the 
desired  safety  during  storage.  Stacks  shall  not  be  piled 
so  high  as  to  make  them  unstable  under  fire  fighting 
conditions  and  in  general  they  shall  not  be  more  than 

4.5  m  in  height.  The  provisions  given  in  good  practice 
[7(2)]  shall  be  followed.  Explosives  like  detonators 
shall  be  stored  in  accordance  with  the  existing 
regulations  of  Indian  Explosives  Act. 

3.4.2  Materials  which  are  likely  to  be  affected  by 
subsidence  of  soil  like  precast  beams,  slabs  and  timber 
of  sizes  shall  be  stored  by  adopting  suitable  measures 
to  ensure  unyielding  supports. 

3.4.3  Materials  liable  to  be  affected  by  floods,  tides, 
etc  shall  be  suitably  stored  to  prevent  their  being 
washed  away  or  damaged  due  to  floods,  tides,  etc. 

4  STORAGE,  STACKING  AND  HANDLING  OF 
MATERIALS 

4.1  The  storage  stacking  and  handling  of  materials 
generally  used  in  construction  shall  be  as  given  in  4.2 
to  4.31,  which  have  been  summarized  in  the  form  of  a 
check  list  in  Annex  B.  Exposure  to  asbestos  fibres/ 
dust  is  known  to  be  harmful  to  health  of  human  beings. 
Prescribed  guidelines  in  accordance  with  good  practice 


[7(3)]  shall  be  followed  for  handling  and  usage  asbestos 
cement  products. 

4.2  Cement 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Cement  shall  be 
stored  at  the  work  site  in  a  building  or  a  shed 
which  is  dry,  leakproof  and  as  moisture-proof 
as  possible.  The  building  or  shed  for  storage 
should  have  minimum  number  of  windows 
and  close  fitting  doors  and  these  should  be 
kept  closed  as  far  as  possible. 
Cement  received  in  bags  shall  be  kept  in  such 
a  way  that  the  bags  are  kept  free  from  the 
possibility  of  any  dampness  or  moisture 
coming  in  contact  with  them.  Cement  bags 
shall  be  stacked  off  the  floor  on  wooden 
planks  in  such  a  way  as  to  keep  them  about 
150  mm  to  200  mm  clear  above  the  floor.  The 
floor  may  comprise  lean  cement  concrete  or 
two  layers  of  dry  bricks  laid  on  a  well 
consolidated  earth.  A  space  of  600  mm 
minimum  shall  be  left  alround  between  the 
exterior  walls  and  the  stacks  (see  Fig.  2).  In 
the  stacks  the  cement  bags  shall  be  kept  close 
together  to  reduce  circulation  of  air  as  such 
as  possible.  Owing  to  pressure  on  bottom 
layer  of  bags  sometimes  'warehouse  pack'  is 
developed  in  these  bags.  This  can  be  removed 
easily  by  rolling  the  bags  when  cement  is 
taken  out  for  use.  Lumped  bags,  if  any  should 
be  removed  and  disposed  off. 
The  height  of  stack  shall  not  be  more  than  10 
bags  to  prevent  the  possibility  of  lumping  up 
under  pressure.  The  width  of  the  stack  shall 
be  not  more  than  four  bags  length  or  3  metres. 
In  stacks  more  than  8  bags  high,  the  cement 
bags  shall  be  arranged  alternately  length-wise 
and  cross-wise  so  as  to  tie  the  stacks  together 
and  minimize  the  danger  of  toppling  over. 
Cement  bags  shall  be  stacked  in  a  manner  to 
facilitate  their  removal  and  use  in  the  order 
in  which  they  are  received;  a  table  showing 
date  of  receipt  of  cement  shall  be  put  on  each 
stack  to  know  the  age  of  cement. 
For  extra  safety  during  monsoon,  or  when  it 
is  expected  to  store  for  an  unusually  long 
period,  the  stack  shall  be  completely  enclosed 
by  a  water  proofing  membrane  such  as 
polyethylene,  which  shall  close  on  the  top  of 
the  stack.  Care  shall  be  taken  to  see  that  the 
waterproofing  membrane  is  not  damaged  any 
time  during  the  use. 

Cement  in  gunny  bags,  paper  bags  and 
polyethylene  bags  shall  be  stored  separately. 
In  case  cement  is  received  in  drums,  these 


12 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


AC.  OR  G.I.  SHEET 
OR  ANY  KIND  OF 
WEATHER  PROOF 
ROOF 


GL 


<,^^^■u.L^^.■WJ■j^■..]il!!.ll||.■^.'■l■J^^l^J^■LlJll^..,!^^^.p■■S; 


*  10  BAGS  MAXIMUM 


SECTION  XX 


A 


-LOAD  BEARING 
WALL 


I— D 


=^ 


C— ' 


.6m 


1.40m 


P 
A 
S 
S 
A 
G 
E 

.6m 


1.40m 


.6m 


DOOR 
PLAN 


A  =  Planks 

B  =  Wooden  Battens 

C  =  150  Dry  Bricks  in  Two  Layer  or  Lean  Cement  Concrete 

D  =  150  Consolidated  Eartli 

Fig.  2  Typical  Arrangement  in  Cement  Godown 


shall  be  stored  on  plane  level  ground,  as  far 
as  possible  near  the  concrete  mixing  place. 
After  taking  out  the  required  quantity  of 
cement,  the  lid  of  the  drum  shall  be  securely 
tied  to  prevent  ingress  of  moisture. 
In  case  cement  is  received  in  silos,  the  silos 
shall  be  placed  near  the  concrete  batching 


b) 


plan.  Proper  access  shall  be  provided  for  the 

replacement  of  silos. 

Different  types  of  cements  shall  be  stacked 

and  stored  separately. 

Handling  —  Hooks  shall  not  be  used  for 

handling  cement  bags  unless  specifically 

permitted  by  the  engineer-in-charge. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


13 


For  information  regarding  bulk  handling  of 
cement,  see  4.4. 

4.3  Lime 

4.3.1  Quicklime  Before  Slaking 

a)  Storage  and  stacking  —  Quicklime  should  be 
slaked  as  soon  as  possible.  If  unavoidable  it 
may  be  stored  in  compact  heaps  having  only 
the  minimum  of  exposed  area.  The  heaps  shall 
be  stored  on  a  suitable  platform  and  covered 
to  avoid  direct  contact  with  rain  or  being 
blown  away  by  wind.  In  case  quick  lime  is 
stored  in  a  covered  shed,  a  minimum  space 
of  300  mm  should  be  provided  alround  the 
heaps  to  avoid  bulging  of  walls. 
Unslaked  lime  shall  be  stored  in  a  place 
inaccessible  to  water  and  because  of  fire 
hazards,  shall  be  segregated  from  the 
combustible  materials. 

b)  Handling  —  See  4.4. 

4.3.2  Hydrated  Lime 

a)  Storage  and  stacking  —  Hydrated  lime  is 
generally  supplied  in  containers,  such  as  jute 
bags  lined  with  polyethylene  or  craft  paper 
bags.  It  should  be  stored  in  a  building  to 
protect  the  lime  from  dampness  and  to 
minimize  warehouse  deterioration. 

The  building  should  be  with  a  concrete  floor 
and  having  least  ventilation  to  eliminate 
draughts  through  the  walls  and  roof.  In 
general,  the  recommendations  given  in  4.2  for 
storing  of  cement  shall  be  applicable  for 
hydrated  lime.  When  air  movement  is  reduced 
to  a  practical  minimum,  hydrated  lime  can  be 
stored  for  up  to  three  months  without 
appreciable  change. 

b)  Handling  —  See  4.4. 

4.3.3  Dry  Slaked  Lime 

a)  Storage  and  stacking  —  The  lime  shall  be 
stored  in  a  dry  and  closed  godown. 

b)  Handling  —  See  4.4. 

4.4  Handling  of  Cement  and  Lime 

Workmen,  handling  bulk  cement  or  lime  shall  wear 
protective  clothing,  respirators,  and  goggles;  shall  be 
instructed  in  the  need  of  cleanliness  to  prevent 
dermatitis,  and  shall  be  provided  with  hand  cream, 
petroleum  jelly,  or  similar  preparation  for  protection 
of  exposed  skin. 

Bulk  cement  stored  in  silos  or  bins  may  fail  to  feed 
to  the  ejection  system.  When  necessary  to  enter  a  silo 
or  bin  for  any  purpose,  the  ejection  system  employed 


shall  be  shut  down  and  locked  out  electrically  as  well 
as  mechanically.  When  necessary  for  a  workman  to 
enter  such  storage  area,  he  shall  wear  a  life-line,  with 
another  workman  outside  the  silo  or  hopper  attending 
the  rope. 

4.5  Masonry  Units 

a)  Stones  —  Stones  of  different  sizes,  types  and 
classification  shall  be  stored  separately. 
Stones  shall  be  stacked  on  dry  firm  ground  in 
a  regular  heap  not  more  than  1  m  in  height. 
Veneering  stones  shall  be  stacked  against 
vertical  support  on  a  firm  dry  ground  in  tiers, 
up  to  a  height  of  1.2  m.  A  distance  of  about 
0.8  m  shall  be  kept  between  two  adjacent 
stacks. 

b)  Bricks  —  Bricks  shall  be  stacked  in  regular 
tiers  as  and  when  they  are  unloaded  to 
minimize  breakage  and  defacement.  These 
shall  not  be  dumped  at  site.  In  the  case  of 
bricks  made  from  clays  containing  lime 
KANKAR,  the  bricks  in  stack  should  be 
thoroughly  soaked  in  water  (docked)  to 
prevent  lime  bursting. 

Bricks  shall  be  stacked  on  dry  firm  ground. 
For  proper  inspection  of  quality  and  east  in 
counting,  the  stacks  shall  be  50  bricks  long, 
10  bricks  high  and  not  more  than  4  bricks  in 
width,  the  bricks  being  placed  on  edge,  two 
at  a  time  along  the  width  of  the  stack.  Clear 
distance  between  adjacent  stacks  shall  not  be 
less  than  0.8  m.  Bricks  of  each  truck  load  shall 
be  put  in  one  stack.  Bricks  of  different  types, 
such  as,  clay  bricks,  clay  fly  ash  bricks,  fly 
ash  lime  bricks,  sand  lime  (calcium  silicate) 
bricks  shall  be  stacked  separately.  Bricks  of 
different  classifications  from  strength 
consideration  and  size  consideration  (such  as, 
conventional  and  modular)  shall  be  stacked 
separately.  Also  bricks  of  different  types,  such 
as,  solid,  hollow  and  perforated  shall  be 
stacked  separately. 

c)  Blocks  —  Blocks  are  available  as  hollow  and 
solid  concrete  blocks,  hollow  and  solid  light 
weight  concrete  blocks,  autoclaved  aerated 
concrete  blocks,  concrete  stone  masonry 
blocks  and  soil  based  blocks.  Blocks  shall  be 
unloaded  one  at  a  time  and  stacked  in  regular 
tiers  to  minimize  breakage  and  defacement. 
These  shall  not  be  dumped  at  site.  The  height 
of  the  stack  shall  not  be  more  than  1.2  m,  the 
length  of  the  stack  shall  not  be  more  than 
3.0  m,  as  far  as  possible  and  the  width  shall 
be  of  two  or  three  blocks.  Normally  blocks 
cured  for  28  days  only  should  be  received  at 


14 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


site.  In  case  blocks  cured  for  less  than  28  days 
are  received,  these  shall  be  stacked  separately. 
All  blocks  should  be  water  cured  for  10  to  14 
days  and  air  cured  for  another  15  days;  thus 
no  blocks  with  less  than  28  days  curing  shall 
be  used  in  building  construction.  Blocks  shall 
be  placed  close  to  the  site  of  work  so  that  least 
effort  is  required  for  their  transportation.  The 
date  of  manufacture  of  the  blocks  shall  be 
suitably  marked  on  the  stacks  of  blocks 
manufactured  at  factory  or  site, 
d)  Handling  —  Brick  stacks  shall  be  placed  close 
to  the  site  of  work  so  that  least  effort  is 
required  to  unload  and  transport  the  bricks 
again  by  loading  on  pallets  or  in  barrows. 
Unloading  of  building  bricks  or  handling  in 
any  other  way  likely  to  damage  the  corners 
or  edges  or  other  parts  of  bricks  shall  not  be 
permitted. 

4.6  Floors,  Wall  and  Roof  Tiles 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Floor,  wall  and  clay 
roof  tiles  of  different  types,  such  as,  cement 
concrete  tiles  (plain,  coloured  and  terrazzo)  and 
ceramic  tiles  (glazed  and  unglazed)  shall  be 
stacked  on  regular  platform  as  far  as  possible 
under  cover  in  proper  layers  and  in  tiers  and 
they  shall  not  be  dumped  in  heaps.  In  the  stack, 
the  tiles  shall  be  so  placed  that  the  mould 
surface  of  one  faces  that  of  another.  Height  of 
the  stack  shall  not  more  than  1  m. 

Tiles  of  different  quality,  size  and  thickness 
shall  be  stacked  separately  to  facilitate  easy 
removal  for  use  in  work.  Tiles  when  supplied 
by  manufacturers  packed  in  wooden  crates 
shall  be  stored  in  crates.  The  crates  shall  be 
opened  one  at  a  time  as  and  when  required 
for  use. 

b)  Handling  —  Ceramic  tiles  and  roof  tiles  are 
generally  supplied  in  cartons  which  shall  be 
handled  with  care  to  avoid  breakage.  It  is 
preferable  to  transport  these  at  the  site  on 
platform  trolleys. 

4.7  Aggregate 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Aggregates  shall  be 
stored  at  site  on  a  hard  dry  and  level  patch  of 
ground.  If  such  a  surface  is  not  available,  a 
platform  of  planks  or  old  corrugated  iron 
sheets,  or  a  floor  of  bricks,  or  a  thin  layer  of 
lean  concrete  shall  be  made  so  as  to  prevent 
the  mixing  with  clay,  dust,  vegetable  and  other 
foreign  matter. 

Stacks  of  fine  and  coarse  aggregate  shall  be 
kept  in  separate  stock  piles  sufficiently 


removed  from  each  other  to  prevent  the 
material  at  the  edges  of  the  piles  from  getting 
intermixed.  On  a  large  job  it  is  desirable  to 
construct  dividing  walls  to  give  each  type  of 
aggregates  its  own  compartment.  Fine 
aggregates  shall  be  stacked  in  a  place  where 
loss  due  to  the  effect  of  wind  is  minimum, 
b)  Handling  —  When  withdrawals  are  made 
from  stock  piles,  no  over  hang  shall  be 
permitted. 

Employees  required  to  enter  hoppers  shall  be 
equipped  with  safety  belts  and  life-lines, 
attended  by  another  person.  Machine  driven 
hoppers,  feeders,  and  loaders  shall  be  locked 
in  the  off  position  prior  to  entry  electrically 
as  well  as  mechanically. 

4.8  Pulverized  Fuel  Ash/Fly  Ash 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Fly  ash  shall  be 
stored  in  such  a  manner  as  to  permit  easy 
access  for  proper  inspection  and  identification 
of  each  consignment.  Fly  ash  in  bulk 
quantities  shall  be  stored  in  stack  similar  to 
fine  aggregates,  avoiding  any  intrusion  of 
foreign  matter.  Fly  ash  in  bags  shall  be  stored 
in  stacks  not  more  than  10  bags  high. 

b)  Handling  —  See  4.4. 

4.9  Cinder 

Cinder  shall  be  stored  in  bulk  quantities  in  stacks 
similar  to  coarse  aggregates  avoiding  any  extrusion  of 
foreign  matter. 

4.10  Timber 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Timber  shall  be 
stored  in  stacks  upon  well  treated  and  even 
surfaced  beams,  sleepers  or  brick  pillars  so 
as  to  be  above  the  ground  level  by  at  least 
150  mm  to  ensure  that  the  timber  will  not  be 
affected  by  accumulation  of  water  under  it. 
Various  members  shall  preferably  be  stored 
separately  in  different  lengths,  and  material 
of  equal  lengths  shall  be  piles  together  in 
layers  with  wooden  battens,  called  crossers, 
separating  one  layer  from  another.  The 
crossers  shall  be  of  sound  wood,  straight  and 
uniform  in  thickness.  In  case,  where  separate 
crossers  are  not  available  smaller  sections  of 
the  available  structural  timber  may  be 
employed  in  their  place.  In  any  layer  an  air 
space  of  about  25  mm  shall  be  provided 
between  adjacent  members.  The  longer  pieces 
shall  be  placed  in  the  bottom  layers  and 
shorter  pieces  in  the  top  layers  but  one  end  of 
the  stack  shall  be  in  true  vertical  alignment. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


15 


The  crossers  in  different  layers  shall  be  in 
vertical  alignment.  The  most  suitable  width 
and  height  of  a  stack  are  recommended  to  be 
about  1.5  m  and  2.0  m.  Distance  between 
adjacent  stacks  is  recommended  to  be  at  least 
450  mm.  In  case  the  stacking  with  the  help  of 
battens  is  not  possible,  the  timber  may  be 
close  piled  in  heaps  on  raised  foundations  with 
the  precautions  specified  above. 
The  stacks  shall  be  protected  from  hot  dry 
winds  or  direct  sun  and  rain.  Heavy  weights, 
such  as  metal  rails  or  large  sections  of  wood, 
are  recommended  to  be  placed  on  the  top  of 
the  stack  to  prevent  distortion  or  warping  of 
the  timber  in  the  stack.  In  case  timber  is  to  be 
stored  for  about  a  year  or  more,  to  prevent 
end-cracking  in  the  material,  the  ends  of  all 
members  shall  be  coated  with  coal  tar, 
aluminium  leaf  paints  (hardened  gloss  oil), 
microcrystalline  wax  or  any  other  suitable 
material, 
b)  Care  must  be  taken  that  handler  or  workmen 
are  not  injured  by  rails,  straps,  etc,  attached 
to  the  used  timber.  This  applies  particularly 
to  planks  and  formwork  for  shuttering. 

4.11  Bamboo 

4.11.1  The  site  shall  be  properly  inspected  and  termite 
colonies  or  mounds  if  detected  shall  be  destroyed. 

All  refuse  and  useless  cellulosic  materials  shall  be 
removed  from  the  site.  The  ground  may  then  be 
disinfected  by  suitable  insecticides.  The  area  should 
have  good  drainage. 

4.11.2  Bamboo  may  preferably  be  stacked  on  high 
skids  or  raised  platform  atleast  300  mm  above  ground. 
Storage  under  cover  reduces  the  liability  to  fungal 
attack.  Good  ventilation  and  frequent  inspection  are 
important. 

4.11.3  Bamboo  dries  by  air-seasoning  under  cover  in 
the  storage  yards  from  6  to  12  weeks  time. 

4.11.4  Prophylactic  treatment  of  bamboo  during 
storage  prevents  losses  due  to  fungi  and  insects  even 
under  open  storage.  Following  chemicals  are  found 
suitable  at  the  coverage  rate  of  24  litres  per  tonne. 

Sodium  pentachlorophenate  :  1  percent  solution 
Boric  acid  +  borax  (1:1)         :  2  percent  solution 
Sodium  pentachlorophenate 
+  boric  acid  +  borax  (5:1:1)  :  2.5  percent  solution 

A  mixture  of  these  compounds  yields  the  best  results. 

NOTE  —  For  better  protection  of  structural  bamboo  (if  stored 
outside),  repetition  of  tire  treatment  after  four  to  six  months  is 
desirable. 


4.12  Partially  Prefabricated  Wall  and  Roof 
Components 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  The  wall  components 
comprise  blocks,  sills,  lintels,  etc.  The  blocks 
shall  be  stacked  in  accordance  with  4.5(c). 
These  shall  be  stacked  on  plane  level  ground 
having  a  floor  of  bricks  or  a  thin  layer  of  lean 
concrete. 

The  roof  components  such  as  precast  RC 
joists,  prefabricated  brick  panels,  RC  planks, 
channel  units,  cored  units,  waffle  units, 
L-panel,  single  tee  and  double  tee  sections, 
ferrocement  panels,  etc  shall  be  unloaded  as 
individual  components.  These  shall  be 
stacked  on  plane  level  ground  having  a  floor 
of  bricks  or  a  thin  layer  of  lean  concrete.  RC 
planks,  prefabricated  brick  panels  and 
ferrocement  panels  shall  be  stacked  against  a 
brick  masonry  wall  in  slightly  inclined 
position  on  both  sides  of  the  wall.  Channel 
units,  cored  units  and  L-panels  shall  be 
stacked  one  over  the  other  up  to  five  tiers. 
The  waffle  units  shall  be  stacked  upside  down 
as  individual  units.  The  RC  joists,  single  tee 
and  double  tee  sections  shall  be  stacked  as 
individual  units  one  adjacent  to  the  other.  The 
distance  between  any  two  adjacent  stacks 
shall  not  be  less  than  450  mm. 

b)  Handling  —  The  components  shall  be 
handled  by  holding  the  individual  component 
by  holding  a  specified  points  so  that  the 
stresses  due  to  handling  are  minimized. 

4.13  Steel 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  For  each  classification 
of  steel,  separate  areas  shall  be  earmarked.  It 
is  desirable  that  ends  of  bars  and  sections  of 
each  class  be  painted  in  distinct  separate 
colours.  Steel  reinforcement  shall  be  stored 
in  a  way  as  to  prevent  distortion  and  corrosion. 
It  is  desirable  to  coat  reinforcement  with 
cement  wash  before  stacking  to  prevent 
scaling  and  rusting. 

Bars  of  different  classification,  sizes  and 
lengths  shall  be  stored  separately  to  facilitate 
issues  in  such  sizes  and  lengths  as  to  minimize 
wastage  in  cut  from  standard  lengths. 
In  case  of  long  storage  or  in  coastal  areas, 
reinforcement  bars  shall  be  stacked  above 
ground  level  by  at  least  150  mm  and  a  coat  of 
cement  wash  shall  be  given  to  prevent  scaling 
and  rusting. 

Structural  steel  of  different  sections,  sizes  and 
lengths  shall  be  stored  separately.  It  shall  be 


16 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


stored  above  ground  level  by  at  least  150  mm 
upon  platforms,  skids  or  any  other  suitable 
supports  to  avoid  distortion  of  sections.  In 
case  of  coastal  areas  or  in  case  of  long  storage, 
suitable  protective  coating  of  cement  wash 
shall  be  given  to  prevent  scaling  and  rusting, 
b)  Handling  —  Tag  lines  shall  be  used  to  control 
the  load  in  handling  reinforcements  or 
structural  steel  when  a  crane  is  employed. 
Heavy  steel  sections  and  bundles  shall  be 
lifted  and  carried  with  the  help  of  slings  and 
tackles  and  shall  not  be  carried  on  the 
shoulders  of  the  workmen. 

4.14  Aluminium  Sections 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Aluminium  sections 
of  different  classification,  sizes  and  lengths 
shall  be  stored  separately,  on  a  level  platform 
under  cover. 

b)  Handling  —  The  aluminium  sections  shall  not 
be  pulled  or  pushed  from  the  stack  nor  shall 
be  slided  over  each  other,  to  protect  the 
anodizing  layer. 

4.15  Doors,  Windows  and  Ventilators 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Metal  and  plastic 
doors,  windows  and  ventilators  shall  be 
stacked  upright  (on  their  sills)  on  level  ground 
preferably  on  wooden  battens  and  shall  not 
come  in  contact  with  dirt  or  ashes.  If  received 
in  crates  they  shall  be  stacked  according  to 
manufacturer's  instructions  and  removed 
from  the  crates  as  and  when  required  for  the 
work. 

Metal  and  plastic  frames  of  doors,  windows 
and  ventilators  shall  be  stacked  upside  down 
with  the  kick  plates  at  the  top.  These  shall 
not  be  allowed  to  stand  for  long  in  this  manner 
before  being  fixed  so  as  to  avoid  the  door 
frames  getting  out  of  shape  and  hinges  being 
strained  and  shutters  drooping. 
During  the  period  of  storage  of  aluminium 
doors,  windows  and  ventilators,  these  shall 
be  protected  form  loose  cement  and  mortar 
by  suitable  covering,  such  as  tarpaulin.  The 
tarpaulin  shall  be  hung  loosely  on  temporary 
framing  to  permit  circulation  of  air  to  prevent 
moisture  condensation. 

All  timber  and  other  lignocellulosic  material 
based  frames  and  shutters  shall  be  stored  in  a 
dry  and  clean  covered  space  away  from  any 
infestation  and  dampness.  The  storage  shall 
preferably  be  in  well-ventilated  dry  rooms. 
The  frames  shall  be  stacked  one  over  the  other 
distances  to  keep  the  stack  vertical  and 


straight.  These  cross  battens  should  be  of 
uniform  thickness  and  placed  vertically  one 
above  the  other.  The  door  shutters  shall  be 
stacked  in  the  form  of  clean  vertical  stacks 
one  over  the  other  and  at  least  80  mm  above 
ground  on  pallets  or  suitable  beams  or  rafters. 
The  top  of  the  stack  shall  be  covered  by  a 
protecting  cover  and  weighted  down  by 
means  of  scantlings  or  other  suitable  weights. 
The  shutter  stack  shall  rest  on  hard  and  level 
surface. 

If  any  timber  or  other  lignocellulosic  material 
based  frame  or  shutter  becomes  wet  during 
transit,  it  shall  be  kept  separate  from  the 
undamaged  material.  The  wet  material  may 
be  dried  by  stacking  in  shade  with  battens  in 
between  adjacent  boards  with  free  access  of 
dry  air.  Separate  stacks  shall  be  built  up  for 
each  size,  each  grade  an  each  type  of  material. 
When  materials  of  different  sizes,  grades  and 
types  are  to  be  stacked  in  one  stack  due  to 
shortage  of  space,  the  bigger  size  shall  be 
stacked  in  the  lower  portion  of  the  stacks. 
Suitable  pallets  or  separating  battens  shall  be 
kept  in  between  the  two  types  of  material. 
Precast  concrete  door  and  window  frames 
shall  be  stored  in  upright  position  adopting 
suitable  measures  against  risk  of  subsidence 
of  soil/support, 
b)  Handling  —  While  unloading,  shifting, 
handling  and  stacking  timber  or  other 
lignocellulosic  material  based,  metal  and 
plastic  door  and  window  frames  and  shutters, 
care  shall  be  taken  that  the  pieces  are  not 
dragged  one  over  the  other  as  it  may  cause 
damage  to  their  surface  particularly  in  case 
of  the  decorative  shutters.  The  pieces  should 
be  lifted  and  carried  preferably  flat  avoiding 
damage  to  corners  or  sides. 

4.16  Roofing  Materials 

4.16.1  Roofing  sheets  shall  be  stored  and  stacked  in 
such  a  manner  as  not  to  damage  them  in  any  way. 
Damaged  sheets  shall  not  be  stacked  with  sound 
materials.  All  damaged  sheets  shall  be  salvaged  as  early 
as  possible. 

4.16.2  Asbestos  Cement  Sheet 

a)  Storage  and  stackings  —  Asbestos  cement 
sheets  shall  be  stacked  to  a  height  of  not  more 
than  one  metre  on  firm  and  level  ground,  with 
timber  or  other  packing  beneath  them.  If 
stacked  in  exposed  position,  they  shall  be 
protected  from  damage  by  the  winds. 

b)  Handling  —  Not  more  than  two  sheets  shall 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


17 


be  first  pushed  forward  along  the  valley  line 
say  about  one  fourth  of  the  sheet  length  and 
preferably  carried  by  two  workmen.  Asbestos 
cement  sheets  shall  be  lowered  or  raised 
gently  and  not  thrown. 

4.16.3  CGI  Sheets 

a)  Storage  and  stacking  —  CGI  sheets  shall  be 
stacked  in  not  more  than  100  bundles  per 
stack  built  solidly,  each  bundle  consisting  of 
10  sheets.  Bundles  shall  be  so  laid  that  the 
corrugations  run  in  the  same  directions  in 
every  course.  One  end  of  the  stack  shall  be 
raised  by  100  mm  to  150  mm  to  allow  water 
flowing  freely.  If  the  sheets  are  not  to  be  used 
immediately,  these  shall  be  stacked  under  roof 
cover. 

b)  Handling  —  In  bulk  handling  of  CGI  sheets, 
workmen  shall  be  provided  with  suitable  hand 
protection. 

4.17  Boards 

4.17.1  Gypsum  Boards 

a)  Storage  and  stacking  —  Gypsum  boards  shall 
be  stored  flat  in  a  covered  clean  and  dry  place. 

b)  Handling  —  See  4.11.2(b). 

4.17.2  Plywood,  Fibre  Board,  Particle  Board,  Block 
Board,  etc 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Plywood,  fibre  board, 
particle  board,  block  board,  etc,  shall  not  be 
stored  in  the  open  and  exposed  to  direct  sun 
and  rain.  The  boards  shall  be  stacked  on  a  flat 
dunnage,  on  the  top  of  which  a  wooden 
frame  shall  be  constructed  with  battens  of 
50  mm  X  25  mm  {Min)  in  such  a  way  that  it 
supports  all  four  edges  and  corners  of  the 
boards  with  intermediate  battens  placed  at 
suitable  intervals  to  avoid  warping.  If  required, 
the  stack  shall  be  adequately  raised  above 
ground  level  to  ensure  that  it  will  not  be 
affected  by  accumulation  of  water  under  it. 
The  board  shall  be  stacked  in  a  solid  block  in 
a  clear  vertical  alignment.  The  top  sheet  of 
each  stack  shall  be  suitably  weighed  down  to 
prevent  warping,  wherever  necessary. 

b)  Handling  —  The  board  shall  be  unloaded  and 
stacked  with  utmost  care  avoiding  damage  to 
the  corners  and  surface.  In  case  of  decorative 
plywood  and  decorative  boards,  the  surfaces 
of  which  are  likely  to  get  damaged  by 
dragging  one  sheet  over  another,  it  is 
advisable  that  these  are  lifted  as  far  as  possible 
in  pairs  facing  each  other. 


4.18  Plastic  and  Rubber  Flooring  Sheets  and  Tiles 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Plastic  and  rubber 
sheets  have  tendency  to  break-down  during 
storage.  Plastic  and  rubber  sheets  shall 
be  stored  according  to  manufacturer's 
instructions. 

The  coolest  store  room  available  shall  be 
utilized  for  the  storage  of  the  sheets.  The  store 
rooms  where  the  sheets  are  stored  shall  be  well 
ventilated  and  direct  light  should  not  be 
allowed  to  fall  on  them. 
The  sheets  shall  be  stored  away  from  electric 
generators,  electric  motors,  switchgears  and 
other  such  electrical  equipment  as  they 
produce  harmful  gases  as  they  produce 
harmful  order  in  their  vicinity. 
Contamination  of  the  sheets  with  vegetable 
and  mineral  oils;  greases;  organic  solvents; 
acids  and  their  fumes;  alkalies;  dust  and 
grit  shall  be  prevented.  Where  greasy 
contamination  occurs  this  shall  be  removed 
immediately  with  petrol  and  the  sheets  and 
tiles  thoroughly  wiped  dry  and  dusted  with 
chalk  chalk. 

Undue  stretch  and  strain,  kinks,  sharp  bends 
or  folds  of  the  sheets  and  tiles  shall  be 
avoided.  In  case  of  long  storage,  the  sheets 
shall  be  turned  over  periodically  and  treated 
with  chalk  powder,  if  necessary. 

b)  Handling  —  While  handling  plastic  and 
rubber  sheets,  workmen  shall  lift  the  sheets 
and  carry  them  flat  to  avoid  sharp  bends  or 
folds  of  the  sheets. 

4.19  Glass  Sheets 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  It  is  important  that 
all  glass  sheets  whether  stored  in  crates  or  not 
shall  be  kept  dry.  Suitable  covered  storage 
space  shall  be  provided  for  the  safe  storage 
of  the  glass  sheets.  The  glass  sheets  shall  be 
lifted  and  stored  on  their  long  edges  and  shall 
be  put  into  stacks  of  not  more  than  25  panes, 
supported  at  two  points  by  fillets  of  wood  at 
about  300  mm  from  each  end.  The  first  pane 
laid  in  each  stack  shall  be  so  placed  that  its 
bottom  edge  is  about  25  mm  from  the  base  of 
the  wall  or  other  support  against  which  the 
stack  rests.  The  whole  stack  shall  be  as  close 
and  as  upright  as  possible.  To  prevent  slipping 
on  smooth  floor,  the  floor  shall  be  covered 
with  gunny  bags.  The  glass  sheets  of  different 
sizes,  thickness  and  type  shall  be  stacked 
separately.  The  distance  between  any  two 
stacks  shall  be  of  the  order  of  400  mm. 


18 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


b)  Handling  —  Workmen  handling  glass  panes, 
waste  glass  pieces  and  fibre  glass  shall  be 
provided  with  suitable  hand  protection.  In 
removing  glass  sheets  from  crates,  due  care 
shall  be  taken  to  avoid  damages.  Glass  edges 
shall  be  covered  or  otherwise  protected  to 
prevent  injuries  to  workmen. 

4.20  Cast  Iron,  Galvanized  Iron  and  Asbestos 
Cement  Pipes  and  Fittings 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  The  pipes  shall  be 
unloaded  where  they  are  required,  when  the 
trenches  are  ready  to  receive  them. 
Storage  shall  be  provided  at  the  bottom  layer 
to  keep  the  stack  stable.  The  stack  shall  be  in 
pyramid  shape  or  the  pipes  placed  length-wise 
and  cross-wise  in  alternate  layers.  The 
pyramid  stack  is  advisable  in  smaller  diameter 
pipes  for  conserving  space  in  storing  them. 
The  height  of  the  stack  shall  not  exceed  1.5  m. 
Each  stack  shall  contain  only  pipes  of  the 
same  class  and  size. 

Each  stack  shall  contain  only  pipes  of  same 
class  and  size,  with  consignment  or  batch 
number  marked  on  it  with  particulars  or 
suppliers  wherever  possible. 
Cast  iron  detachable  joints  and  fittings  shall 
be  stacked  under  cover  and  separated  from 
the  asbestos  cement  pipes  and  fittings. 
Rubber  rings  shall  be  kept  clean,  away  from 
grease,  oil,  heat  and  light. 

b)  Handling  —  Pipes  in  the  top  layer  shall  be 
handled  first.  At  a  time  only  one  pipe  shall  be 
handled  by  two  labourers  while  conveying 
to  the  actual  site  and  shall  be  carried 
on  shoulders.  Fittings  shall  be  handled 
individually. 

4.21  Polyethylene  Pipes 

a)     Storage  and  Stacking  —  Black  polyethylene 
pipes  may  be  stored  either  under  cover  or  in 
the  open.  Natural  polyethylene  pipes, 
however,  should  be  stored  under  cover  and 
protected  from  direct  sunlight. 
Coils  may  be  stored  either  on  edge  or  stacked 
flat  one  on  top  of  the  other,  but  in  either  case 
they  should  not  be  allowed  to  come  into 
contact  with  hot  water  or  steam  pipes  and 
should  be  kept  away  from  hot  surface. 
Straight  lengths  should  be  stored  on  horizontal 
racks  giving  continuous  support  to  prevent  the 
pipe  taking  on  a  permanent  set. 
Storage  of  pipes  in  heated  areas  exceeding 
27°C  should  be  avoided. 


b)  Handling  —  Removal  of  pipe  from  a  pile  shall 
be  accomplished  by  working  from  the  ends 
of  the  pipe. 

4.22  Unplasticized  PVC  Pipes 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Pipes  should  be 
stored  on  a  reasonably  flat  surface  free  from 
stones  and  sharp  projections  so  that  the  pipe 
is  supported  throughout  its  length.  The  pipe 
should  be  given  adequate  support  at  all  times. 
In  storage,  pipe  racks  should  be  avoided.  Pipe 
should  not  be  stacked  in  large  piles  especially 
under  warm  temperature  conditions  as  the 
bottom  pipes  may  distort  thus  giving  rise  to 
difficulty  in  jointing.  Socket  and  spigot  pipes 
should  be  stacked  in  layers  with  sockets 
placed  at  alternate  ends  or  the  stacks  to  avoid 
lopsided  stacks. 

It  is  recommended  not  to  store  a  pipe  inside 
another  pipe.  On  no  account  should  pipes  be 
stored  in  a  stressed  or  bend  condition  or  near 
a  source  of  heat.  Pipes  should  not  be  stacked 
more  than  1.5  m  high.  Pipes  of  different  sizes 
and  classes  should  be  stacked  separately. 
In  tropical  conditions,  pipes  should  be  stored 
in  shade.  In  very  cold  weather,  the  impact 
strength  of  PVC  is  reduced  making  it  brittle. 
The  ends  of  pipe  should  be  protected  from 
abrasion  particularly  those  specially  prepared 
for  jointing  either  spigot  or  socket  solvent 
welded  joints  or  soldered  for  use  with 
couplings. 

If  due  to  unsatisfactory  storage  or  handling  a 
pipe  become  brittle  in  very  cold  weather. 

b)  Handling  —  Great  care  shall  be  exercised  in 
handling  these  pipes  in  wintry  conditions  as 
these  come  brittle  in  very  cold  weather. 

4.23  Pipes  of  Conducting  Materials 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Pipes  shall  be 
stacked  on  solid  level  sills  and  contained  in  a 
manner  to  prevent  spreading  or  rolling  of  the 
pipe.  Where  quantity  storage  is  necessary, 
suitable  packing  shall  be  placed  between 
succeeding  layers  to  reduce  the  pressure  and 
resulting  spreading  of  the  pile. 
In  stacking  and  handling  of  pipes  and  other 
conducting  materials,  the  following  minimum 
safety  distances  shall  be  ensured  from  the 
overhead  power  lines: 

1 1  kV  and  below  1 .40  m 

Above  1 1  and  below  33  kV  3.60  m 

Above  33  and  below  132  kV  4.70  m 
Above  132  and  below  275  kV  5.70  m 
Above  275  and  below  400  kV      6.50  m 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


19 


b)  Handling  —  Removal  of  pipes  from  a  pile 
shall  be  accomplished  by  working  from  the 
ends  of  the  pipe.  During  transportation,  the 
pipes  shall  be  so  secured  as  to  insure  against 
displacement. 

4.24  Piles  and  Poles 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Piles  and  poles  shall 
be  carefully  stacked  on  solid,  level  sills  so  as 
to  prevent  rolling  or  spreading  of  the  pile. 
The  storage  area  shall  be  maintained  free  of 
vegetation  and  flammable  materials. 

b)  Handling  —  When  placing  piles  or  poles  on 
the  stack,  workmen  shall  work  from  the  ends 
of  the  piles/poles.  Similar  precautions  shall 
be  observed  in  removal  of  piles/poles  from 
the  stack.  Tag  lines  shall  be  used  to  control 
piles  and  poles  when  handling  for  any 
purpose. 

In  stacking  and  handling  of  piles  and  poles, 
precautions  as  laid  down  in  4.18(a)  shall  be 
followed. 

4.25  Paints,  Varnishes  and  Thinners 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Paints,  varnishes, 
lacquers,  thinners  and  other  flammable 
materials  shall  be  kept  in  properly  sealed  or 
closed  containers.  The  containers  shall  be  kept 
in  a  well  ventilated  location,  free  from 
excessive  heat,  smoke,  sparks  or  flame.  The 
floor  of  the  paint  stores  shall  be  made  up  of 
100  mm  thick  loose  sand. 

Paint  materials  in  quantities  other  than 
required  for  daily  use  shall  be  kept  stocked 
under  regular  storage  place. 
Where  the  paint  is  likely  to  deteriorate  with 
age,  the  manner  of  storage  shall  facilitate 
removal  and  use  of  lots  in  the  same  order  in 
which  they  are  received. 
Temporary  electrical  wirings/fittings  shall  not 
be  installed  in  the  paint  store.  When  electric 
lights,  switches  or  electrical  equipment  are 
necessary,  they  shall  be  of  explosion  proof 
design. 

b)  Handling  —  Ventilation  adequate  to  prevent 
the  accumulation  of  flammable  vapours  to 
hazardous  levels  of  concentration  shall  be 
provided  in  all  areas  where  painting  is  done. 
When  painting  is  done  is  confined  spaces 
where  flammable  or  explosive  vapours  may 
develop,  any  necessary  heat  shall  be  provided 
through  duct  work  remote  from  the  source  of 
flame. 

Sources  of  ignition,  such  as  open  flame  and 


exposed  heating  elements,  shall  not  be 
permitted  in  area  or  rooms  where  spray 
painting  is  done  nor  shall  smoking  be  allowed 
there. 

Care  should  be  taken  not  to  use  any  naked 
flame  inside  the  paint  store.  Buckets 
containing  sand  shall  be  kept  ready  for  use  in 
case  of  fire.  Fire  extinguishers  when  required 
shall  be  of  foam  type  conforming  to  accepted 
standards  [7(4)]. 

Each  workman  handling  lead  based  paints 
shall  be  issued  Vi  litre  milk  per  day  for  his 
personal  consumption. 

4.26  Bitumen,  Road  Tar,  Asphalt,  Etc 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Drums  or  containers 
containing  all  types  of  bitumen,  road  tar, 
asphalt,  etc,  shall  be  stacked  vertically  on  their 
bottoms  in  up  to  three  tiers.  Leaky  drums  shall 
be  segregated.  Empty  drums  shall  be  stored 
in  pyra  midal  stacks  neatly  in  rows. 

b)  Handling  —  See  19.3.1.2  and  19.3.4. 

4.27  Bituminous  Roofing  Felts 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  Bituminous  roofing 
felts  shall  be  stored  away  from  other 
combustible  materials  and  shall  be  kept  under 
shade. 

b)  Handling  —  Bituminous  roofing  felts  should 
be  handled  in  a  manner  to  prevent  cracking 
and  other  damages. 

4.28  Flammable  Materials 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  In  addition  to  the 
requirements  as  laid  down  in  3.4,  the 
following  provisions  shall  also  apply; 

1)  Outdoor  storage  of  drums  requires  some 
care  to  avoid  contamination  because 
moisture  and  dirt  in  hydraulic  brake  and 
transmission  fluid,  gasoline,  or  lubricants 
may  cause  malfunction  or  failure  of 
equipment,  with  possible  danger  to 
personnel.  The  storage  area  should  be 
free  of  accumulations  of  spilled  products, 
debris  and  other  hazards. 

2)  Compressed  gases  and  petroleum 
products  shall  not  be  stored  in  the  same 
building  or  close  to  each  other.  Storage 
of  petroleum  products  should  be  as  per 
Petroleum  Rules. 

b)  Handling  —  Petroleum  products  delivered  to 
the  job  site  and  stored  there  in  drums  shall  be 
protected  during  handling  to  prevent  loss  of 
identification  through  damage  to  drum 


20 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


markings,  tags,  etc.  Unidentifiable  petroleum 
products  may  result  in  improper  use,  with 
possible  fire  hazard,  damage  to  equipment  or 
operating  failure. 

Workmen  shall  be  required  to  guard  carefully 
against  any  part  of  their  clothing  becoming 
contaminated  with  flammable  fluids.  They 
shall  not  be  allowed  to  continue  work  when 
their  clothing  becomes  so  contaminated. 

4.29  Water 

Water  to  be  stored  for  construction  purposes  shall  be 
stored  in  proper  tanks  to  prevent  any  organic  impurities. 
The  aggregate  capacity  of  storage  tanks  shall  be 
determined  after  taking  into  account  the  requirements 
of  fire  fighting. 

4.30  Sanitary  Appliances 

a)  Storage  and  Stacking  —  All  sanitary 
appliances  shall  be  carefully  stored  under 
cover  to  prevent  damage.  When  accepting  and 
storing  appliances,  consideration  shall  be 
given  to  the  sequence  of  removal  from  the 
store  to  the  assembly  positions.  Vitreous 
fittings  shall  be  stacked  separately  from  the 
metal  ones. 

b)  Handling  —  Bigger  sanitary  appliances  shall 
be  handled  one  at  a  time.  Traps,  water  seals 
and  gullies  shall  be  handled  separately.  While 
handling  sanitary  fittings  they  shall  be  free 
from  any  oil  spillings,  etc.  The  hands  of  the 
workers  shall  also  be  free  from  any  oily 
substance.  Before  lowering  the  appliances  in 
their  position  the  supporting  brackets, 
pedestals,  etc,  shall  be  checked  for  their 
soundness  and  then  only  the  fixtures  be 
attached. 

4.31  Other  Materials 

Polymeric  materials  such  as  coatings,  sheetings, 
reflective  surfacings/sheetings,  etc  shall  be  stored  as 
per  the  manufacturers'  instructions.  Special  precautions 
shall  be  taken  in  case  of  storage,  handling  and  usage 
of  toxic  materials. 

Small  articles  like  screws,  bolts,  nuts,  door  and  window 
fittings,  polishing  stones,  protective  clothing,  spare 
parts  of  machinery,  linings,  packings,  water  supply  and 
sanitary  fittings,  and  electrical  fittings,  insulation 
board,  etc,  shall  be  kept  in  suitable  and  properly 
protected  containers  or  store  rooms.  Valuable  small 
materials  shall  be  kept  under  lock  and  key. 

4.32  Special  Considerations 

4.32.1  Materials  constantly  in  use  shall  be  relatively 
nearer  the  place  of  use. 


4.32.2  Heavy  units  like  precast  concrete  members  shall 
be  stacked  near  the  hoist  or  the  ramp. 

4.32.3  Materials  which  normally  deteriorate  during 
storage  shall  be  kept  constantly  moving,  by  replacing 
old  materials  with  fresh  stocks.  Freshly  arrived 
materials  shall  never  be  placed  over  materials  which 
had  arrived  earlier. 

4.32.4  Appropriate  types  of  fire  extinguishers  shall  be 
provided  at  open  sites  where  combustible  materials  are 
stored  and  for  each  storage  shed/room  where 
flammable/combustible  materials  are  stored.  For 
guidance  regarding  selection  of  the  appropriate  types 
of  fire  extinguishers  reference  may  be  made  to  good 
practice  [7(4)].  It  is  desirable  that  a  minimum  of  two 
extinguishers  are  provided  at  each  such  location. 

4.32.5  Workers  handling  excavated  earth  from 
foundation,  particularly  if  the  site  happens  to  be 
reclaimed  area  or  marshy  area  or  any  other  infected 
area,  shall  be  protected  against  infection  affecting  their 
exposed  body  portions. 

4.32.6  House  Keeping 

Stairways,  walkways,  scaffolds,  and  accessways  shall 
be  kept  free  of  materials,  debris  and  obstructions.  The 
engineer-in-charge/the  foreman  shall  initiate  and  carry 
out  a  programme  requiring  routine  removal  of  scrap 
and  debris  from  scaffolds  and  walkways. 

4.32.7  Where  stacking  of  the  materials  is  to  be  done 
on  road  side  berms  in  the  street  and  other  public  place, 
the  owner  shall  seek  permission  from  the  Authority 
for  such  stacking  and  also  for  removing  the  remnants 
of  the  same  after  the  construction  is  over,  so  as  to  avoid 
any  hazard  to  the  public. 

5  UNLOADING  RAIL/ROAD  WAGONS  AND 
MOTOR  VEHICLES 

5.1  Loading  and  Unloading  Rail/Road  Wagons 

5.1.1  Appropriate  warning  signals  shall  be  displayed 
to  indicate  that  the  wagons  shall  not  be  coupled  or 
moved. 

5.1.2  The  wheels  of  wagons  shall  always  be  sprigged 
or  chained  while  the  wagons  are  being  unloaded.  The 
brakes  alone  shall  not  be  depended  upon. 

5.1.3  Special  level  bars  shall  preferably  be  used  for 
moving  rail  wagons  rather  than  ordinary  crow  bars. 

5.1.4  Where  gangplanks  are  used  between  wagons  and 
platforms  of  piles  (heaps),  cleats  at  lower  end  of 
gangplank,  or  pin  through  end  of  gangplanks,  shall  be 
used  to  prevent  sliding.  If  gangplank  is  on  a  gradient, 
cleats  or  abrasive  surface  shall  be  provided  for  the 
entire  length. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


21 


5.1.5  When  rail/road  wagons  are  being  loaded  or 
unloaded  near  passageways  or  walkways,  adequate 
warning  signals  shall  be  placed  on  each  end  of  the 
wagon  to  warn  pedestrians. 


other  hazards  wherever  specified  by  the  Local/State 
Authority  or  in  the  Acts  of  the  Government  take 
precedence  over  whatever  is  herein  specified  in  case 
of  a  doubt  or  dispute. 


5.2  Loading  and  Unloading  from  Motor  Vehicles         6.3  Safety  Management 


5.2.1  The  motor  vehicles  shall  be  properly  blocked 
while  being  loaded  or  unloaded;  brakes  alone  shall  not 
be  depended  upon  to  hold  them. 

5.2.2  When  motor  vehicles  are  being  loaded  or 
unloaded  near  passageways  or  walkways,  adequate 
warning  signs  shall  be  placed  on  each  end  of  the  vehicle 
to  warn  the  pedestrians. 

5.3  Handling  Heavy/Long  Items 

5.3.1  Loading  and  unloading  of  heavy  items,  shall,  as 
far  as  possible,  be  done  with  cranes  or  gantries.  The 
workman  shall  stand  clear  of  the  material  being  moved 
by  mechanical  equipment.  The  slings  and  the  ropes 
used  shall  be  of  adequate  load  carrying  capacity,  so  as 
not  to  give  way  and  result  in  accidents. 

5.3.2  While  heavy  and  long  components  are  being 
manually  loaded  into  motor  vehicle,  wagons,  trailer, 
etc,  either  wooden  sleepers  or  steel  rails  of  sufficient 
length  and  properly  secured  in  position  shall  be  put  in 
a  gentle  slope  against  the  body  of  the  wagon/vehicle 
at  3  or  4  places  for  loading.  These  long  items  shall  be 
dragged,  one  by  one,  gently  and  uniformly  along  these 
supports  by  means  of  ropes,  being  pulled  by  men  with 
feet  properly  anchored  against  firm  surface.  As  soon 
as  the  items  come  on  the  floor  of  the  vehicle,  the  same 
may  be  shifted  by  crowbars  and  other  suitable  leverage 
mechanism,  but  not  by  hands  to  avoid  causing  accident 
to  the  workmen. 

5.3.3  Similar  procedure  as  outlined  in  5.3.2  shall 
be  followed  for  manual  unloading  of  long  or  heavy 
items. 

SECTION  3  SAFETY  IN  CONSTRUCTION 
OF  ELEMENTS  OF  A  BUILDING 

6  GENERAL 

6.1  The  provisions  of  this  Section  shall  apply  to  the 
erection/alterational  of  the  various  parts  of  a  building 
or  similar  structure.  The  construction  of  the  different 
elements  shall  conform  to  2.3.2. 

6.2  Other  Laws 

Nothing  herein  stated  shall  be  construed  to  nullify  any 
rules,  regulations,  safety  standards  or  statutes  of  the 
local  state  governments  or  those  contained  in  the 
various  Acts  of  the  Government  of  India.  The  specific 
Rules,  Regulations  and  Acts  pertaining  to  the 
protection  of  the  public  or  workmen  from  health  and 


6.3.1  The  safety  of  personnel  engaged  in  building 
construction  should  be  ensured  through  a  well  planned 
and  well  organized  mechanism.  For  this,  depending 
on  the  size  and  complexity  of  building  construction 
project,  safety  committee  shall  be  constituted  to 
efficiently  manage  all  safety  related  affairs.  The  site 
in-charge  or  his  nominee  of  a  senior  rank  shall  head 
the  committee  and  a  safety  officer  shall  act  as  member- 
secretary.  The  meetings  of  the  safety  committee  shall 
be  organized  regularly  say  fortnightly  or  monthly 
depending  on  the  nature  of  the  project,  however, 
emergency  meetings  shall  be  called  as  and  when 
required.  The  safety  committees  shall  deal  with  all  the 
safety  related  issues  through  well  structured  agenda, 
in  the  meetings  and  all  safety  related  measures  installed 
at  the  site  and  implementation  thereof  shall  be 
periodically  reviewed. 

6.3.2  Notwithstanding  the  guidelines  given  in  6.3.1, 
all  provisions  given  in  relevant  Act/Rules/Regulations 
as  amended  from  time  to  time  shall  be  followed;  in 
this  regard,  reference  shall  also  be  made  to  the  Building 
and  Other  Construction  Workers  Act,  1996  and  the 
Rules/Regulations  framed  thereunder. 

7  TERMINOLOGY 

7.1  For  the  purpose  of  this  Part  the  following 
definitions  shall  apply. 

7.2  Authority  Having  Jurisdiction  —  The  Authority 
which  has  been  created  by  a  statute  and  which  for  the 
purpose  of  administering  the  Code/Part,  may  authorize 
a  committee  or  an  official  to  act  on  its  behalf; 
hereinafter  called  the  'Authority'. 

7.3  Construction  Equipment  —  All  equipment, 
machinery,  tools  and  temporary  retaining  structures 
and  working  platforms,  that  is,  tools,  derricks,  staging, 
scaffolds,  runways,  ladders  and  all  material,  handling 
equipment  including  safety  devices. 

7.4  Floor  Hole  —  An  opening  measuring  less  than 
300  mm  but  more  than  25mm  in  its  least  dimension, 
in  any  floor,  platform,  pavement,  or  yard,  through 
which  materials  but  not  persons  may  fall;  such  as,  a 
belt  hole,  pipe  opening  or  slot  opening. 

7.5  Floor  Opening  —  An  opening  measuring  300  mm 
or  more  in  its  least  dimension,  in  any  floor,  platform, 
pavement  or  yard  through  which  person  may  fall;  such 
as  hatch  way,  stair  or  ladder  opening,  pit  or  large 
manhole. 


22 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


7.6  Guard  Railing  —  A  barrier  erected  along  exposed 
edges  of  an  open  side  floor  opening,  wall  opening, 
ramp,  platform,  or  catwalk  or  balcony,  etc,  to  prevent 
fall  of  persons. 

7.7  Materials  Handing  Hoists  —  A  platform, 
bucket  or  similar  enclosure  exclusively  meant  for 
the  lifting  or  lowering  of  construction  material  the 
hoists  being  operated  from  a  point  outside  the 
conveyance. 

7.8  Pile  Rig  —  The  complete  pile  driving  equipment 
comprising  piling  frame,  leader,  hammer,  extractor 
winch  and  power  unit.  Complete  pile  driving  rig  may 
be  mounted  on  rafts  or  pontoon  or  rails.  Pile  rig  may 
also  be  a  mobile  unit  mounted  on  trailers  or  trucks,  or 
a  special  full  revolving  rig  for  raking  piles. 

7.9  Platform  —  A  working  space  for  persons, 
elevated  above  the  surrounding  floor  or  ground,  such 
as  balcony  or  platform  for  the  operation  of  machinery 
and  equipment. 

7.10  Scaffold  —  A  temporary  erection  of  timber  or 
metal  work  used  in  the  construction,  alteration  or 
demolition  of  a  building,  to  support  or  to  allow  the 
hoisting  and  lowering  of  workmen,  their  tools  and 
materials. 

7.11  Toe  Board  —  A  vertical  barrier  erected  along 
exposed  edge  of  a  floor  opening,  wall  opening, 
platform,  catwalk  or  ramp  to  prevent  fall  of  materials 
or  persons. 

7.12  Wall  Hole  —  An  opening  in  any  wall  or  partition 
having  height  of  less  than  750  mm  but  more  than 
25  mm  and  width  unrestricted. 

7.13  Wall  Opening  —  An  opening  in  any  wall  or 
partition  having  both  height  of  at  least  750  mm  and 
width  of  at  least  450  mm. 

8  TEMPORARY  CONSTRUCTION,  USE  OF  SIDE 
WALLS  AND  TEMPORARY  ENCROACHMENTS 

8.1  Temporary  Construction 

The  plans  and  specifications  of  temporary 
constructions,  which  are  likely  to  interfere  with 
facilities  or  right  of  way  provided  by  the  Authority, 
shall  be  submitted  to  the  Authority  for  approval 
showing  clearly  the  layout,  design  and  construction. 

8.1.1  Temporary  structure  referred  in  8.1  shall  apply 
to  the  following  types  of  structures: 

a)  Structures  with  roof  or  walls  made  of  straw, 
hay,  ulugrass,  golpatta,  hogle,  darma,  mat, 
canvas  cloth  or  other  like  materials  not 
adopted  for  permanent  or  continuous 
occupancy. 


b)     Site-work  sheds,  track-runways,  trestles,  foot- 
bridges, etc. 

8.2  For  detailed  information  regarding  fire  safety 
aspects  in  respect  of  constraction,  location,  maintenance 
and  use  of  temporary  structures  [mentioned  in  8.1.1(a)] 
including  PANDALS  used  by  public  for  outdoor 
assembly,  reference  may  be  made  to  good  practice 
[7(5)]. 

8.3  Special  permits  shall  be  obtained  for  the  storage 
of  the  materials  on  side  walks  and  highways.  It  shall 
be  ensured  that  the  material  dump  or  the  storage  shed 
does  not  create  a  traffic  hazard,  nor  it  shall  interfere 
with  the  free  flow  of  the  pedestrian  traffic.  Special 
permits  shall  also  be  obtained  for  the  use  of  water 
and  electricity  from  the  public  facilities.  Whenever 
such  utilities  are  made  use  of,  adequate  safety 
precautions  regarding  drainage  and  elimination  of 
contamination  and  hazards  from  electricity  shall  be 
taken. 

8.4  In  order  to  ensure  safety  for  the  adjoining  property, 
adequate  temporary  protective  guards  are  to  be 
provided.  In  case  these  protective  devices  project 
beyond  the  property,  the  consent  of  the  Authority  and 
that  of  the  owner  of  the  adjoining  property  shall  be 
obtained. 

9  TESTING 

9.1  Tests 

No  stracture,  temporary  support,  scaffolding  or  any 
construction  equipment  during  the  construction  or 
demolition  of  any  building  or  structure  shall  be  loaded 
beyond  the  allowable  loads  and  working  stresses  as 
provided  for  in  Part  6  'Structural  Design'  {see  also 
good  practice  [7(6)] }. 

9.1.1  Whenever  any  doubt  arises  about  the 
structural  adequacy  of  a  scaffolding,  support  or  any 
other  construction  equipment,  it  shall  be  tested  to 
two  and  a  half  times  the  superimposed  dead  and 
imposed  loads  to  which  the  material  or  the 
equipment  is  subjected  to  and  the  member/material 
shall  sustain  the  test  load  without  failure  if  it  is  to 
be  accepted. 

9.2  Notwithstanding  the  test  mentioned  above,  if  any 
distress  in  any  member  is  visible,  the  member  shall  be 
rejected. 

10  INSPECTION  AND  RECTIFICATION  OF 
HAZARDOUS  DEFECTS 

10.1  Inspection 

The  Authority  shall  inspect  the  construction  equipment 
and  if  during  the  inspection,  it  is  revealed  that  unsafe/ 
illegal  conditions  exist,  the  Authority  shall  intimate 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


23 


the  owner  and  direct  him  to  take  immediate  remedial 
measures  to  remove  the  hazard/violation. 

10.2  Rectification 

The  owner  shall  proceed  to  rectify  the  defect, 
hazardous  condition  or  violation  within  24  h  of  the 
receipt  of  the  notice  from  the  Authority.  The 
Authority  shall  have  full  powers  to  rectify  the  unsafe 
condition  and  all  expenses  incurred  in  this  connection 
is  payable  by  the  owner  of  the  property.  Illegal 
encroachments  and  non-payment  of  money  due,  in 
respect  of  the  rectification  of  unsafe  conditions  may 
vest  a  lien  on  the  property  with  the  Authority  (see 
also  Part  2  'Administration'). 

10.3  When  the  strength  and  adequacy  of  any  scaffold 
or  other  construction  equipment  is  in  doubt  or  when 
any  complaint  is  made,  the  Authority  shall  get  the  same 
inspected  before  use. 

11  FOUNDATIONS 

11.1  General 

The  distribution  of  the  supporting  foundation  shall  be 
such  as  to  avoid  any  harmful  differential  settlement  of 
the  structure.  The  type  and  design  of  the  foundation 
adopted  shall  ensure  safety  to  workmen  during 
construction  and  residents  of  the  neighbouring 
property.  Sufficient  care  shall  be  taken  in  areas,  where 
withdrawal  of  ground  water  from  surrounding  areas 
could  result  in  damages  to  such  foundations.  During 
the  construction  of  the  foundation,  it  shall  be  ensured 
that  the  adjoining  properties  are  not  affected  by  any 
harmful  effects. 

11.2  Adjoining  Properties 

The  person  causing  excavation  shall,  before  starting 
the  work,  give  adequate  notices  in  writing  to  the 
owner  of  the  adjoining  properties,  safety  of  which  is 
likely  to  be  affected  due  to  excavation.  After  having 
given  such  notices,  wherein  details  regarding  the  type 
of  protective  works  that  are  anticipated  to  be 
incorporated  in  the  excavation  are  shown,  written 
permission  shall  be  obtained  for  such  excavation  from 
the  adjoining  property  owners.  Where  necessary,  the 
person  causing  excavation  shall  make  adequate 
provision  to  protect  the  safety  of  adjacent  property. 
If  on  giving  such  notices  and  the  precautionary 
measures  having  been  approved  by  the  Authority,  the 
adjoining  property  owner  still  refuses  to  give 
necessary  facilities  to  the  person  causing  excavation 
for  protecting/providing  both  temporary  and 
permanent  supports  to  such  property,  the 
responsibility  for  any  damage  to  the  adjoining 
property  shall  be  that  of  the  adjoining  property  owner. 
The  person  causing  excavation  shall  be  absolved  of 


responsibility  for  any  loss  of  property  or  life  in  the 
adjoining  property. 

In  driven  piles  vibration  is  set  up  which  may  cause 
damage  to  adjoining  structures  or  service  lines 
depending  on  the  nature  of  soil  condition  and  the 
construction  standard  of  such  structures  and  service 
lines.  Possible  extent  of  all  such  damages  shall  be 
ascertained  in  advance,  and  operation  and  mode  of 
driving  shall  be  planned  with  appropriate  measures  to 
ensure  safety. 

Where  in  the  vicinity  of  a  site  where  bored  or  driven 
piling  works  are  to  be  carried  out  there  are  old 
structures  which  are  likely  to  be  damaged,  tell-tales 
shall  be  fixed  on  such  structures  to  watch  their 
behaviour  and  timely  precautions  taken  against  any 
undesirable  effect. 

11.3  During  construction,  inspection  shall  be  made  by 
the  engineer-in-charge  to  ensure  that  all  protective 
works  carried  out  to  safe-guard  the  adjoining  property 
are  sufficient  and  in  good  order  to  ensure  safety  (see 
Part  2  'Administration'). 

11.4  Before  carrying  out  any  excavation  work/pile 
driving,  the  position,  depth  and  size  of  underground 
structures,  such  as  water  pipes,  mains,  cables  or  other 
services  in  the  vicinity  to  the  proposed  work,  may  be 
obtained  from  the  Authority  to  prevent  accidents  to 
workmen  engaged  in  excavation  work  and  calamities 
for  the  general  public. 

Prior  to  commencement  of  excavation  detailed  data  of 
the  type  of  soils  that  are  likely  to  be  met  with  during 
excavation  shall  be  obtained  and  the  type  of  protective 
works  by  way  of  shoring  timbering,  etc,  shall  be 
decided  upon  for  the  various  strata  that  are  likely  to 
be  encountered  during  excavation.  For  detailed 
information  regarding  safety  requirements  during 
excavation  reference  may  be  made  to  good  practice 
[7(7)]. 

12  GENERAL  REQUIREMENTS  AND  COMMON 
HAZARDS  DURING  EXCAVATION 

12.1  Location  of  Machinery  and  Tools 

Excavating  machinery  consisting  of  both  heavy  and 
light  types  shall  be  kept  back  from  the  excavation 
site  at  a  distance  which  would  be  safe  for  such  type 
of  equipment.  Heavy  equipment,  such  as  excavating 
machinery  and  road  traffic  shall  be  kept  back  from 
the  excavated  sites  at  a  distance  of  not  less  than  the 
depth  of  trench  or  at  least  6  m  for  trench  deeper  than 
6  m.  Care  shall  also  be  taken  to  keep  excavating  tools 
and  materials  far  away  from  the  edge  of  trench  to 
prevent  such  items  being  inadvertently  knocked  into 
the  trench. 


24 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


12.2  Excavated  Materials 

Excavated  materials  shall  be  kept  back  from  the  edges 
of  the  trench  to  provide  clear  berm  of  safe  width.  Where 
this  is  not  feasible,  the  protective  works  designed  for 
the  trenches  shall  take  into  consideration,  the  additional 
load  due  to  overburden  of  materials. 

12.2.1   Other  Surcharges 

Proximity  of  buildings,  piles  of  lumber,  crushed  rocks, 
sand  and  other  constructional  materials,  large  trees, 
etc,  may  impose  surcharges  on  the  side  of  the  trench 
to  cause  sliding,  etc.  Under  these  conditions  additional 
protective  works  shall  be  provided  to  support  the  sides 
of  the  trench. 

12.3  Type  of  Strata 

Adequate  precautions,  depending  upon  the  type  of 
strata  met  with  during  excavation  (like  quick  sand, 
loose  fills  and  loose  boulder)  shall  be  taken  to  protect 
the  workmen  during  excavation.  Effect  of  climatic 
variations  and  moisture  content  variations  on  the 
materials  under  excavation  shall  be  constantly  watched 
and  precautions  taken,  where  necessary,  immediately 
to  prevent  accidents  at  work  site. 

12.4  Overhang  and  Slopes 

During  any  excavation,  sufficient  slopes  to  excavated 
sides  by  way  of  provision  of  steps  or  gradual  slopes 
shall  be  provided  to  ensure  the  safety  of  men  and 
machine  working  in  the  area. 

12.5  Blasting  for  foundation  of  building  is  prohibited 
unless  special  permission  is  obtained  from  the 
Authority.  Where  blasting  technique  has  to  be  resorted 
to,  prior  inspection  for  the  stability  of  slopes  shall  be 
carried  out.  After  blasting,  overhangs  or  loose  boulders 
shall  be  cleared  by  expert  workers  carrying  out  blasting 
prior  to  continuation  of  the  excavation  by  normal 
working  parties. 

12.5.1  Burrowing  or  mining  or  what  is  known  as 
'gophering'  shall  not  be  allowed.  In  any  trench  where 
such  methods  have  been  followed,  the  cavities  felt  shall 
be  eliminated  by  cutting  back  the  bare  slope  before 
removing  any  further  material  from  the  section  of  the 
trench. 

12.6  Health  Hazards 

Where  gases  or  fumes  are  likely  to  be  present  in 
trenches,  sufficient  mechanical  ventilation,  to  protect 
the  health  and  safety  of  persons  working  there,  shall 
be  provided.  If  necessary,  the  personnel  working  there, 
shall  be  provided  with  respiratory  protective  equipment 
when  work  in  such  unhealthy  conditions  has  to  be 
carried  out.  The  precautionary  measures  provided  shall 


be  inspected  by  the  local  health  authorities  prior  to 
commencement  of  the  work. 

12.7  Safety  of  Materials 

Materials  required  for  excavation,  like  ropes,  planks 
for  gangways  and  walkways,  ladders,  etc,  shall  be 
inspected  by  the  engineer-in-charge  who  shall  ensure 
that  no  accident  shall  occur  due  to  the  failure  of  such 
materials  (see  Part  5  'Building  Materials'). 

12.8  Fencing  and  Warning  Signals 

Where  excavation  is  going  on,  for  the  safety  of  public 
and  the  workmen,  fencing  shall  be  erected,  if  there  is 
likelihood  of  the  public  including  cattle  frequenting 
the  area.  Sufficient  number  of  notice  boards  and  danger 
sign  lights  shall  be  provided  in  the  area  to  avoid  any 
member  of  public  from  inadvertently  falling  into  the 
excavation.  When  excavations  are  being  done  on  roads, 
diversion  of  the  roads  shall  be  provided  with  adequate 
notice  board  and  lights  indicating  the  diversion  well 
ahead.  Where  necessary,  recourse  may  be  had 
for  additional  precautionary  measures  by  way  of 
watchmen  to  prevent  accident  to  the  general  public, 
especially  during  hours  of  darkness. 

12.9  Effect  of  Freezing  and  Thawing 

Due  to  expansion  of  water  when  freezing,  rock 
fragments,  boulders,  etc,  are  frequently  loosened. 
Therefore,  the  side  walls  of  the  excavation  shall  be 
constantly  watched  for  signs  of  cracks  during  a  thaw. 
When  depending  in  whole  or  in  part  on  freezing  to 
support  the  side  walls,  great  care  shall  be  taken  during 
thaws  to  provide  suitable  bracing  or  remedy  the 
condition  by  scaling  of  the  loose  material  from  the 
sides. 

12.10  Vibrations  from  Nearby  Sources 

Vibration  due  to  adjacent  machinery,  vehicles,  rail- 
roads, blasting,  piling  and  other  sources  require 
additional  precautions  to  be  taken. 

12.11  Precautions  While  Using  Petroleum  Powered 
Equipment 

At  the  site  of  excavation,  where  petroleum  powered 
equipment  is  used,  petroleum  vapours  are  likely  to 
accumulate  at  lower  levels  and  may  cause  fire 
explosion  under  favourable  circumstances.  Care 
should,  therefore,  be  taken  to  avoid  all  sources  of 
ignition  in  such  places. 

13  PILING  AND  OTHER  DEEP  FOUNDATIONS 

13.1  General 

13.1.1  Safety  Programme 

All  operations  shall  be  carried  out  under  the  immediate 
charge  of  a  properly  qualified  and  competent  foreman 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


25 


who  shall  also  be  responsible  for  the  safety 
arrangements  of  the  work. 

13.1.2  For  work  during  night,  lighting  of  at  least  100 
lux  intensity  shall  be  provided  at  the  work  site. 

13.1.3  Every  crane  driver  or  hoisting  appliance 
operator  shall  be  competent  to  the  satisfaction  of  the 
engineer-in-charge  and  no  person  under  the  age  of  21 
years  should  be  in-charge  of  any  hoisting  machine 
including  any  scaffolding  winch,  or  give  signals  to 
operator. 

13.1.4  Working  in  compressed  air,  in  case  of  deep 
foundations,  requires  several  precautions  to  be 
observed  to  safeguard  the  workmen  against  severe 
hazards  to  life,  compressed  air  disease  and  related 
ailments.  For  detailed  information  regarding  safety 
requirements,  reference  may  be  made  to  good  practice 
[7(8)]. 

13.2  Piling  Rig 

13.2.1  Pile  drivers  shall  not  be  erected  in  dangerous 
proximity  to  electric  conductors.  If  two  pile  drivers 
are  erected  at  one  place  these  shall  be  separated  by  a 
distance  at  least  equal  to  the  longest  leg  in  either  rig. 

13.2.2  The  frame  of  any  rig  shall  be  structurally  safe 
for  all  anticipated  dead,  live  or  wind  loads.  Whenever 
there  is  any  doubt  about  the  structural  strength,  suitable 
test  shall  be  carried  out  by  the  foreman  and  the  results 
of  the  test  recorded.  No  pile  driving  equipment  shall 
be  taken  into  use  until  it  has  been  inspected  and  found 
to  be  safe. 

13.2.3  Pile  drivers  shall  be  firmly  supported  on  heavy 
timber  sills,  concrete  beds  or  other  secure  foundation. 
If  necessary,  to  prevent  danger,  pile  drivers  shall  be 
adequately  guyed. 

When  the  rig  is  not  in  use,  extra  precautionary  measures 
for  stability,  such  as  securing  them  with  minimum  four 
guys,  shall  be  adopted  to  prevent  any  accidents  due  to 
wind,  storm,  gales  and  earthquake. 

13.2.4  Access  to  working  platforms  and  the  top  pulley 
shall  be  provided  by  ladders.  Working  platforms  shall 
be  protected  against  the  weather. 

13.2.4.1  In  tall  driven  piling  rigs  or  rigs  of  similar 
nature  where  a  ladder  is  necessary  for  regular  use,  the 
ladder  shall  be  securely  fastened  and  extended  for  the 
full  height  of  the  rig. 

13.2.5  Exposed  gears,  fly  wheels,  etc,  shall  be  fully 
enclosed. 

13.2.6  Pile  driving  equipment  in  use  shall  be  inspected 
by  a  competent  engineer  at  regular  intervals  not 
exceeding  three  months.  A  register  shall  be  maintained 
at  the  site  of  work  for  recording  the  results  of  such 


inspected  pile  lines  and  pulley  blocks  shall  be  inspected 
by  the  foreman  before  the  beginning  of  each  shift,  for 
any  excess  wear  or  any  other  defect. 

13.2.6.1  Defective  parts  of  pile  drivers,  such  as 
sheaves,  mechanism  slings  and  hose  shall  be  repaired 
by  only  competent  person  and  duly  inspected  by 
foreman-in-charge  of  the  rig  and  the  results  recorded 
in  the  register.  No  steam  or  air  equipment  shall  be 
repaired  while  it  is  in  operation  or  under  pressure. 
Hoisting  ropes  on  pile  drivers  shall  be  made  of 
galvanized  steel. 

13.2.7  Steam  and  air  lines  shall  be  controlled  by  easily 
accessible  shut-off  valves.  These  lines  shall  consist  of 
armoured  hose  or  its  equivalent.  The  hose  of  steam 
and  air  hammers  shall  be  securely  lashed  to  the  hammer 
so  as  to  prevent  it  from  whipping  if  a  connection  breaks. 
Couplings  of  sections  of  hose  shall  be  additionally 
secured  by  ropes  or  chains. 

13.2.8  When  not  in  use  the  hammer  shall  be  in  dropped 
position  and  shall  be  held  in  place  by  a  cleat,  timber  or 
any  other  suitable  means. 

13.2.9  For  every  hoisting  machine  and  for  every 
chain  rig  hook,  shackle,  swivel  and  pulley  block  used 
in  hoisting  or  as  means  of  suspension,  the  safe 
working  loads  shall  be  ascertained.  In  case  of  doubt, 
actual  testing  shall  be  carried  out  and  the  working 
load  shall  be  taken  as  half  of  the  tested  load.  Every 
hoisting  machine  and  all  gears  referred  to  above  shall 
be  plainly  marked  with  the  safe  working  load.  In  case 
of  a  hoisting  machine  having  a  variable  safe  working 
load,  each  safe  working  load  together  with  the 
conditions  under  which  it  is  applicable  shall  be  clearly 
indicated.  No  part  of  any  machine  or  any  gear  shall 
be  loaded  beyond  the  safe  working  load  except  for 
the  purpose  of  testing. 

13.2.10  Motor  gearing,  transmission,  electrical  wiring 
and  other  dangerous  parts  of  hoisting  appliances  should 
be  provided  with  efficient  safe  guards.  Hoisting 
appliances  shall  be  provided  with  such  means  as  will 
reduce,  to  the  minimum,  the  risk  of  accidental  descent 
of  the  load  and  adequate  precautions  shall  be  taken  to 
reduce  to  the  minimum,  the  risk  of  any  part  of 
suspended  load  becoming  accidentally  displaced. 
When  workers  are  employed  on  electrical  installations 
which  are  already  energized,  insulating  mats  and 
wearing  apparel,  such  as  gloves,  etc,  as  may  be 
necessary,  shall  be  provided.  Sheaves  on  pile  drivers 
shall  be  guarded  so  that  workers  may  not  be  drawn 
into  them. 

13.2.10.1  When  loads  have  to  be  inclined: 

a)     they  shall  be  adequately  counter-balanced, 
and 


26 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


b)     the  tilting  device  shall  be  secured  against 
slipping. 

13.2.11  Adequate  precautions  shall  be  taken  to  prevent 
a  pile  driver  from  overturning  if  a  wheel  breaks. 

13.2.12  Adequate  precautions  shall  be  taken  by 
providing  stirrups  or  by  other  effective  means,  to 
prevent  the  rope  from  coming  out  of  the  top  pulley  or 
wheel. 

13.2.13  Adequate  precautions  shall  be  taken  to  prevent 
the  hammer  from  missing  the  pile. 

13.2.14  If  necessary,  to  prevent  danger,  long  piles  and 
heavy  sheet  piling  should  be  secured  against  falling. 

13.2.15  Wherever  steam  boilers  are  used,  the  safety 
regulations  of  boilers  shall  be  strictly  followed  and 
safety  valves  shall  be  adjusted  to  7N/cm-  in  excess  of 
working  pressure  accurately. 

13.2.16  Where  electricity  is  used  as  power  for  piling 
rig,  only  armoured  cable  conforming  to  the  relevant 
Indian  Standard  shall  be  used. 

13.2.17  All  checks  as  given  in  the  Indian  Standards 
and  any  manuals  issued  by  the  manufacturers  shall  be 
carried  out. 

13.3  Operation  of  Equipment 

13.3.1  Workers  employed  in  the  vicinity  of  pile  drivers 
shall  wear  helmets  conforming  to  accepted  standards 
[7(9)]. 

13.3.2  Piles  shall  be  prepared  at  a  distance  at  least 
equal  to  twice  the  length  of  the  longest  pile  from  the 
pile  driver. 

13.3.3  Piles  being  hoisted  in  the  rig  should  be  so  slung 
that  they  do  not  have  to  be  swung  round,  and  may  not 
inadvertently,  swing  or  whip  round.  A  hand  rope  shall 
be  fastened  to  a  pile  that  is  being  hoisted  to  control  its 
movement.  While  a  pile  is  being  guided  into  position 
in  the  leads,  workers  shall  not  put  their  hands  or  arms 
between  the  pile  and  the  inside  guide  or  on  top  of  the 
pile,  but  shall  use  a  rope  for  guiding. 

13.3.4  Before  a  good  pile  is  hoisted  into  position  it 
shall  be  provided  with  an  iron  ring  or  cap  over  the 
driving  end  to  prevent  brooming.  When  creosoted 
wood  piles  are  being  driven,  adequate  precautions  shall 
be  taken,  such  as  the  provision  of  personal  protective 
equipment  and  barrier  creams,  to  prevent  workers 
receiving  eye  or  skin  injuries  from  splashes  of  creosote. 

13.3.5  When  piles  are  driven  at  an  inclination  to  the 
vertical,  if  necessary,  to  prevent  danger,  these  should 
rest  in  a  guide. 

13.3.6  No  steam  or  air  shall  be  blown  down  until  all 
workers  are  at  a  safe  distance. 


14  WALLS 

14.1  General 

Depending  on  the  type  of  wall  to  be  constructed  the 
height  of  construction  per  day  shall  be  restricted  to 
ensure  that  the  newly  constructed  wall  does  not  come 
down  due  to  lack  of  strength  in  the  lower  layers. 
Similarly,  in  long  walls  adequate  expansion/crumple 
joints  shall  be  provided  to  ensure  safety. 

14.2  Scaffold 

Properly  designed  and  constructed  scaffolding  built  by 
competent  workmen  shall  be  provided  during  the 
construction  of  the  walls  to  ensure  the  safety  of  workers. 
The  scaffolding  may  be  of  timber,  metal  or  bamboo 
sections  and  the  materials  in  scaffolding  shall  be 
inspected  for  soundness,  strength,  etc,  at  site  by  the 
engineer-in-charge  prior  to  erection  of  scaffolds. 
Steel  scaffolds  intended  for  use  in  normal  building 
construction  work  shall  conform  to  accepted  standards 
[7(10)].  Bamboo  and  timber  scaffolds  shall  be  properly 
tied  to  the  junctions  with  coir  ropes  of  sufficient  strength 
or  mechanical  joints  to  ensure  that  joints  do  not  give 
way  due  to  the  load  of  workmen  and  material.  Joining 
the  members  of  scaffolds  only  with  nails  shall  be 
prohibited  as  they  are  likely  to  get  loose  under  normal 
weathering  conditions.  In  the  erection  or  maintenance 
of  tall  buildings,  scaffoldings  shall  be  of  non- 
combustible  material  especially  when  the  work  is  being 
done  on  any  building  in  occupation.  After  initial 
construction  of  the  scaffolding,  frequent  inspections  of 
scaffolding.  The  platforms,  gangways  and  runways 
provided  on  the  scaffoldings  shall  be  of  sufficient 
strength  and  width  to  ensure  safe  passage  for  the 
workmen  working  on  the  scaffolding.  The  joints 
provided  in  these  gangways,  platforms,  etc,  shall  be  such 
as  to  ensure  a  firm  foot-hold  to  the  workmen.  Where 
necessary,  cross  bars  shall  be  provided  to  the  full  width 
of  gangway  or  runway  to  facilitate  safe  walking.  For 
detailed  information  regarding  safety  requirements  for 
erection,  use  and  dismantling  of  scaffolds,  reference  may 
be  made  to  good  practice  [7(1 1)]. 

14.2.1  The  engineer-in-charge  shall  ensure  by  frequent 
inspections  that  gangways  of  scaffolding  have  not 
become  slippery  due  to  spillage  of  material.  Loose 
materials  shall  not  be  allowed  to  remain  on  the 
gangways.  Where  necessary,  because  of  height  or 
restricted  width,  hand-rails  shall  be  provided  on  both 
sides.  Workers  shall  not  be  allowed  to  work  on  the 
scaffolding  during  bad  weather  and  high  winds. 

14.2.2  In  the  operations  involved  in  the  erection  or 
maintenance  of  outside  walls,  fittings,  etc,  of  tall 
buildings,  it  is  desirable  to  use  one  or  more  net(s)  for 
the  safety  of  the  workmen  when  the  workmen  are 
required  to  work  on  scaffoldings. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


27 


14.3  Ladders 

All  ladders  shall  be  constructed  of  sound  materials  and 
shall  be  capable  of  carrying  their  intended  loads  safely. 
The  ladders  shall  have  not  only  adequate  strength  but 
rigidity  as  well.  If  a  ladder  shows  tendency  to  spring, 
a  brace  shall  be  attached  to  its  middle  and  supported 
from  some  other  non-yielding  fixed  object.  No  ladder 
having  a  missing  or  defective  rung  or  one  which 
depends  for  its  support  solely  on  nails,  shall  be  used. 
Ladders  shall  not  be  used  as  guys,  braces  or  skids  or 
for  any  other  purpose  for  which  they  are  not  intended. 
They  shall  not  be  used  in  horizontal  position  as 
runways.  They  shall  not  be  overcrowded.  Wherever 
possible,  ladders  shall  not  be  spliced.  Where  splicing 
is  unavoidable,  it  shall  be  done  only  under  the 
supervision  of  engineer-in-charge.  Ladders  leading  to 
landings  or  walkways  shall  extend  at  least  one  metre 
above  the  landing  and  shall  be  secured  at  the  upper 
end.  To  prevent  slipping,  a  ladder  shall  be  secured  at 
the  bottom  end.  If  this  cannot  be  done,  a  person  shall 
be  stationed  at  the  base  whenever  it  is  in  use.  As  a 
further  precautions,  the  pitch  at  which  a  lean-to-ladder 
is  used  shall  be  such  that  the  horizontal  distance  of  its 
foot  from  the  vertical  plane  of  its  top  shall  be  not  more 
than  one  quarter  of  its  length.  If  the  surface  of  the  floor 
on  which  the  ladder  rests  is  smooth  or  sloping,  the 
ladder  shall  be  provided  with  non-slip  bases.  If  the  use 
of  a  ladder  is  essential  during  strong  winds,  it  shall  be 
securely  lashed  in  position.  No  ladder  shall  be  placed 
or  leant  against  window  pane,  sashes  or  such  other 
unsafe  or  yielding  objects,  nor  placed  in  front  of  doors 
opening  towards  it.  If  setup  in  driveways,  passageways 
or  public  walkways,  it  shall  be  protected  by  suitable 
barricades.  When  ascending  or  descending,  the  user 
shall  face  the  ladder,  use  both  his  hands  and  place  his 
feet  near  the  ends  of  the  rungs  rather  than  near  the 
middle.  It  is  dangerous  to  lean  more  than  30  cm  to  side 
in  order  to  reach  a  larger  area  from  a  single  setting  of 
the  ladder.  Instead,  the  user  shall  get  down  and  shift 
the  ladder  to  the  required  position. 

Metal  ladders  shall  not  be  used  around  electrical 
equipment  or  circuits  of  any  kind  where  there  is  a 
possibility  of  coming  in  contact  with  the  current.  Metal 
ladders  shall  be  marked  with  signs  reading  'CAUTION: 
DO  NOT  USE  NEAR  ELECTRICAL  EQUIPMENT' . 

Wooden  ladders  shall  be  inspected  at  least  once  in  a 
month  for  damage  and  deterioration.  Close  visual 
inspection  is  recommended  in  preference  to  load 
testing.  This  condition  is  particularly  applicable  to  rope 
and  bamboo  ladders  wherein  fraying  of  ropes  and 
damage  to  bamboo  is  likely  to  occur  due  to  materials 
falling  on  them.  When  a  ladder  has  been  accidentally 
dropped  it  shall  be  inspected  by  the  engineer-in-charge 
prior  to  re-use.  Overhead  protection  shall  be  provided 


for  workmen  under  ladder.  For  detailed  information 
regarding  safety  requirements  for  use  of  ladders, 
reference  may  be  made  to  good  practice  [7(12)]. 

14.4  Opening  in  Walls 

Whenever  making  of  an  opening  in  the  existing  wall 
is  contemplated,  adequate  supports  against  the  collapse 
or  cracking  of  the  wall  portion  above  or  roof  or 
adjoining  walls  shall  be  provided. 

14.4.1  Guarding  of  Wall  Openings  and  Holes 

Wall  opening  barriers  and  screens  shall  be  of  such 
construction  and  mounting  that  they  are  capable  of 
withstanding  the  intended  loads  safely.  For  detailed 
information  reference  may  be  made  to  good  practice 
[7(13)].  Every  wall  opening  from  which  there  is  a  drop 
of  more  than  1  200  mm  shall  be  guarded  by  one  of  the 
following: 

a)  Rail,  roller,  picket  fence,  half  door  or 
equivalent  barrier  —  The  guard  may  be 
removable  but  should  preferably  be  hinged 
or  otherwise  mounted  so  as  to  be  conveniently 
replaceable.  Where  there  is  danger  to  persons 
working  or  passing  below  on  account  of  the 
falling  materials,  a  removable  toe  board  or 
the  equivalent  shall  also  be  provided.  When 
the  opening  is  not  in  use  for  handling 
materials,  the  guards  shall  be  kept  in  position 
regardless  of  a  door  on  the  opening.  In 
addition,  a  grab  handle  shall  be  provided  on 
each  side  of  the  opening.  The  opening  should 
have  a  sill  that  projects  above  the  floor  level 
at  least  25  mm. 

b)  Extension  platform  into  which  materials  may 
be  hoisted  for  handling,  shall  be  of  full  length 
of  the  opening  and  shall  have  side  rails  or 
equivalent  guards. 

14.4.2  Every  chute  wall  opening  from  which  there  is 
a  drop  of  more  than  1  200  mm  shall  be  guarded  by 
one  or  more  of  the  barriers  specified  in  14.4.1  or  as 
required  by  the  conditions. 

14.5  Projection  from  Walls 

Whenever  projections  cantilever  out  of  the  walls, 
temporary  formwork  shall  be  provided  for  such 
projections  and  the  same  shall  not  be  removed  till  walls 
over  the  projecting  slabs  providing  stability  load 
against  overturning  are  completely  constructed. 

15  COMMON  HAZARDS  DURING  WALLING 

15.1  Lifting  of  Materials  for  Construction 

Implements  used  for  carrying  materials  to  the  top  of 
scaffoldings  shall  be  of  adequate  strength  and  shall 
not  be  overloaded  during  the  work.  Where  workmen 


28 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


have  to  work  below  scaffoldings  or  ladder,  overhead 
protection  against  the  falling  materials  shall  be 
provided.  Care  shall  be  taken  in  carrying  large  bars, 
rods,  etc,  during  construction  of  the  walls  to  prevent 
any  damage  to  property  or  injury  to  workmen. 

15.2  Haulage  of  Materials 

15.2.1  In  case  of  precast  columns,  steel  beams,  etc, 
proper  precautions  shall  be  taken  to  correctly  handle, 
use  and  position  them  with  temporary  arrangement  of 
guys  till  grouting  of  the  base. 

15.2.2  Manila  or  sisal  rope  shall  not  be  used  in  rainy 
season  for  hoisting  of  heavy  materials  as  they  lose  their 
strength  with  alternate  wetting  and  drying. 

15.3  Electical  Hazards 

No  scaffolding,  ladder,  working  platform,  gangway 
runs,  etc,  shall  exist  within  3  m  from  any  uninsulated 
electric  wire. 

15.4  Fire  Hazards 

Gangways  and  the  ground  below  the  scaffolding  shall 
be  kept  free  from  readily  combustible  materials 
including  waste  and  dry  vegetation  at  all  times. 

15.4.1  Where  extensive  use  of  blow  torch  or  other 
flame  is  anticipated  scaffoldings,  gangways,  etc,  shall 
be  constructed  with  fire  resistant  materials.  A  portable 
dry  powder  extinguisher  of  3  kg  capacity  shall  be  kept 
handy. 

15.5  Mechanical  Hazards 

Care  shall  be  taken  to  see  that  no  part  of  scaffolding  or 
walls  is  struck  by  truck  or  heavy  moving  equipment 
and  no  materials  shall  be  dumped  against  them  to 
prevent  any  damage.  When  such  scaffoldings  are  in  or 
near  a  public  thoroughfare,  sufficient  warning  lights 
and  boards  shall  be  provided  on  the  scaffoldings  to 
make  them  clearly  visible  to  the  public. 

15.6  Fragile  Materials 

During  glazing  operations,  adequate  precautions  shall 
be  taken  to  ensure  that  the  fragments  of  fragile 
materials  do  not  cause  any  injury  to  workmen  or 
general  public  in  that  area  by  way  of  providing 
covering  to  such  material,  side  protection  at  work  site, 
etc. 

16  ROOFING 

16.1  Prevention  of  accidental  falling  of  workmen 
during  the  construction  of  roofs  shall  be  ensured  by 
providing  platforms,  catch  ropes,  etc.  If  the  materials 
are  to  be  hoisted  from  the  ground  level  to  the  roof  level, 
adequate  precautions  shall  be  taken  by  way  of  correct 
technique  of  handling,  hoists  of  sufficient  strength  to 


cater  for  the  quantity  of  stores  to  be  hoisted  and 
prevention  of  overloading  such  hoists  or  buckets, 
prevention  of  overturning  of  hoists  or  buckets.  Where 
in  a  multi-storeyed  building,  the  floor  of  one  storey  is 
to  be  used  for  storage  of  materials  for  the  construction 
of  roofs,  it  shall  be  ensured  that  the  quantum  of  stores 
kept  on  the  floor  along  with  the  load  due  to  personnel 
engaged  in  the  construction  work  shall  not  exceed  the 
rated  capacity  of  the  floors. 

16.2  While  roofing  work  is  being  done  with  corrugated 
galvanized  iron  or  asbestos  cement  sheets,  it  shall  be 
ensured  that  joints  are  kept  secured  in  position  and  do 
not  slip,  thus  causing  injury  to  workmen.  Workers 
should  not  be  allowed  to  walk  on  asbestos  cement 
sheets  but  should  be  provided  with  walking  boards. 
While  working  with  tiles,  it  shall  be  ensured  that  they 
are  not  kept  loose  on  the  roof  site  resulting  in  falling 
of  tiles  on  workmen  in  lower  area.  In  slopes  of  more 
than  30°  to  the  horizontal,  the  workmen  shall  use 
ladders  or  other  safety  devices  to  work  on  the  roof. 

16.3  If  any  glass  work  is  to  be  carried  out  in  the  roof, 
it  shall  be  ensured  that  injury  to  passerby  due  to 
breaking  of  glass  is  prevented.  During  wet  conditions, 
the  workmen  shall  be  allowed  to  proceed  to  work  on  a 
sloping  roof,  only  if  the  engineer-in-charge  has 
satisfied  himself  that  the  workmen  are  not  likely  to 
slip  due  to  wet  conditions. 

16.4  Flat  Roof 

In  any  type  of  flat  roof  construction,  any  formwork 
provided  shall  be  properly  designed  and  executed  to 
ensure  that  it  does  not  collapse  during  construction. 
During  actual  construction  of  roof,  frequent  inspection 
of  the  formwork  shall  be  carried  out  to  ensure  that  no 
damage  has  occurred  to  it. 

16.5  While  using  reinforcement  in  roofs,  it  shall  be 
ensured  that  enough  walking  platforms  are  provided 
in  the  reinforcement  area  to  ensure  safe  walking  to  the 
concreting  area.  Loose  wires  and  unprotected  rod  ends 
shall  be  avoided. 

16.6  Guarding  of  Floor  Openings  and  Floor  Holes 

16.6.1  Every  temporary  floor  opening  shall  have 
railings,  or  shall  be  constantly  attended  by  someone. 
Every  floor  hole  into  which  persons  can  accidentally 
fall  shall  be  guarded  by  either: 

a)  a  railing  with  toe  board  on  all  exposed  sides, 
or 

b)  a  floor  hole  cover  the  adequate  strength  and 
it  should  be  hinged  in  place.  When  the  cover 
is  not  in  place,  the  floor  hole  shall  be 
constantly  attended  by  some  one  or  shall  be 
protected  by  a  removable  railing. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


29 


16.6.2  Every  stairway  floor  opening  shall  be  guarded 
by  a  railing  on  all  exposed  sides,  except  at  entrance  to 
stairway.  Every  ladder  way  floor  opening  or  platform 
shall  be  guarded  by  a  guard  railing  with  toe  board  on 
all  exposed  sides  (except  at  entrance  to  opening),  with 
the  passage  through  the  railing  either  provided  with  a 
swinging  gate  or  so  offset  that  a  person  can  not  walk 
directly  into  the  opening. 

16.6.3  Guarding  of  Open-Side  Floors  and  Platform 

Every  open-sided  floor  or  platform  1  200  mm  or  more 
above  adjacent  floor  or  ground  level  shall  be  guarded 
by  a  railing  (or  the  equivalent)  or  all  open  sides,  except 
where  there  is  entrance  to  ramp,  stair-way,  or  fixed 
ladder.  The  railing  shall  be  provided  with  a  toe  board 
beneath  the  open  sides  wherever: 

a)  persons  may  pass; 

b)  there  is  moving  machinery;  or 

c)  there  is  equipment  with  which  falling 
materials  could  create  a  hazard. 

For  detailed  information,  reference  may  be  made  to 
good  practice  [7(13)]. 

17  ADDITIONAL  SAFETY  REQUIREMENTS 
FOR  ERECTION  OF  CONCRETE  FRAMED 
STRUCTURES  (HIGH-RISE  BUILDINGS) 

17.1  Handling  of  Plant 

17.1.1  Mixers 

17.1.1.1  All  gears,  chains  and  rollers  of  mixers  shall 
be  properly  guarded.  If  the  mixer  has  a  charging  skip 
the  operator  shall  ensure  that  the  workmen  are  out  of 
danger  before  the  skip  is  lowered.  Railings  shall  be 
provided  on  the  ground  to  prevent  anyone  walking 
under  the  skip  while  it  is  being  lowered. 

17.1.1.2  All  cables,  clamps,  hooks,  wire  ropes,  gears 
and  clutches,  etc,  of  the  mixer,  shall  be  checked  and 
cleaned,  oiled  and  greased,  and  serviced  once  a  week. 
A  trial  run  of  the  mixer  shall  be  made  and  defects  shall 
be  removed  before  operating  a  mixer. 

17.1.1.3  When  workmen  are  cleaning  the  inside  of  the 
drums,  and  operating  power  of  the  mixer  shall  be 
locked  in  the  off  position  and  all  fuses  shall  be  removed 
and  a  suitable  notice  hung  at  the  place. 

17.1.2  Cranes 

17.1.2.1  Crane  rails  where  used  shall  be  installed  on 
firm  ground  and  shall  be  properly  secured.  In  case  of 
tower  cranes,  it  shall  be  ensured  that  the  level  difference 
between  the  two  rails  remains  within  the  limits 
prescribed  by  the  manufacturer  to  safeguard  against 
toppling  of  the  crane. 

17.1.2.2  Electrical  wiring  which  can  possibly  touch 


the  crane  or  any  member  being  lifted  shall  be  removed, 
or  made  dead  by  removing  the  controlling  fuses  and 
in  their  absence  controlling  switches. 

17.1.2.3  All  practical  steps  shall  be  taken  to  prevent 
the  cranes  being  operated  in  dangerous  proximity  to  a 
live  overhead  power  line.  In  particular,  no  member  of 
the  crane  shall  be  permitted  to  approach  within  the 
minimum  safety  distances  as  laid  down  in  4.23(a). 

If  it  becomes  necessary  to  operate  the  cranes  with 
clearances  less  than  those  specified  above,  it  shall  be 
ensured  that  the  overhead  power  lines  shall  invariably 
be  shut  off  during  the  period  of  operation  of  cranes. 
Location  of  any  underground  power  cables  in  the  area 
of  operation  shall  also  be  ascertained  and  necessary 
safety  precautions  shall  be  taken. 

17.1.2.4  Cranes  shall  not  be  used  at  a  speed  which 
causes  the  boom  to  swing. 

17.1.2.5  A  crane  shall  be  thoroughly  examined  at  least 
once  in  a  period  of  6  months  by  a  competent  person 
who  shall  record  a  certificate  of  the  check. 

17.1.2.6  The  operator  of  the  crane  shall  follow  the  safe 
reach  of  the  crane  as  shown  by  the  manufacturer. 

17.1.2.7  No  person  shall  be  lifted  or  transported  by 
the  crane  on  its  hook  or  boom. 

17.1.2.8  Toe  boards  and  limit  stops  should  be  provided 
for  wheel  barrows  on  the  loading/unloading  platforms. 
Material  should  be  loaded  securely  with  no  projections. 

17.1.2.9  Concrete  buckets  handled  by  crane  or 
overhead  cableway  shall  be  suspended  from  deep 
throated  hooks,  preferably  equipped  with  swivel  and 
safety  latch.  In  the  concrete  buckets,  both  bottom  drop 
type  and  side  drop  type,  closing  and  locking  of  the 
exit  door  of  the  bucket  shall  always  be  checked  by  the 
man-in-charge  of  loading  concrete  in  the  bucket  to 
avoid  accidental  opening  of  the  exit  door  and 
consequent  falling  of  concrete. 

17.1.2.10  Interlocking  or  other  safety  devices  should 
be  installed  at  all  stopping  points  of  the  hoists.  The 
hoists  shaft  way  should  be  fenced  properly. 

17.1.2.11  When  the  bucket  or  other  members  being 
lifted  are  out  of  sight  of  the  crane  operator,  a  signalman 
shall  be  posted  in  clear  view  of  the  receiving  area  and 
the  crane  operator. 

17.1.2.12  A  standard  code  of  hand  signals  shall  be 
adopted  in  controlling  the  movements  of  the  crane,  and 
both  the  driver  and  the  signaler  shall  be  thoroughly 
familiar  with  the  signals. 

The  driver  of  the  crane  shall  respond  to  signals  only 
from  the  appointed  signaler  but  shall  obey  stop  signal 
at  any  time  no  matter  who  gives  it. 


30 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


17.1.2.13  If  a  traveling  gantry  crane  is  operating  over 
casting  beds,  a  warning  signal  which  sounds 
automatically  during  travel  should  be  provided  to  avoid 
accidents  to  workmen  crossing  or  standing  in  the  path 
of  the  moving  loads. 

17.1.3  Trucks 

When  trucks  are  being  used  on  the  site,  traffic  problems 
shall  be  taken  care  of.  A  reasonably  smooth  traffic 
surface  shall  be  provided.  If  practicable,  a  loop  road 
shall  be  provided  to  permit  continuous  operation  of 
vehicles  and  to  eliminate  their  backing.  If  a  continuous 
loop  is  not  possible,  a  turnout  shall  be  provided. 
Backing  operations  shall  be  controlled  by  a  signalman 
positioned  so  as  to  have  a  clear  view  of  the  area  behind 
the  truck  and  to  be  clearly  visible  to  the  truck  driver. 
Movement  of  workmen  and  plant  shall  be  routed  to 
avoid  crossing,  as  much  as  possible,  the  truck  lanes. 

17.1.4  Concrete  Pumps  (Air  Compressor  Operated) 

Safety  requirements  in  accordance  with  good  practice 
[7(14)]  shall  be  followed. 

17.2  Formwork 

17.2.1  Formwork  shall  be  designed  after  taking  into 
consideration  spans,  setting  temperature  of  concrete, 
dead  load  and  working  load  to  be  supported  and  safety 
factor  for  the  materials  used  for  formwork  { see  also 
good  practice  [7(6)] }. 

17.2.2  All  timber  formwork  shall  be  carefully 
inspected  before  use  and  members  having  cracks  and 
excessive  knots  shall  be  discarded. 

17.2.3  As  timber  centering  usually  takes  an  initial  set 
when  vertical  load  is  applied,  the  design  of  this 
centering  shall  make  allowance  for  this  factor. 

17.2.4  The  vertical  supports  shall  be  adequately  braced 
or  otherwise  secured  in  position  that  these  do  not  fall 
when  the  load  gets  released  or  the  supports  are 
accidently  hit. 

17.2.5  Tubular  steel  centering  shall  be  used  in 
accordance  with  the  manufacturer's  instructions.  When 
tubular  steel  and  timber  centering  is  to  be  used  in 
combination  necessary  precautions  shall  be  taken  to 
avoid  any  unequal  settlement  under  load. 

17.2.6  A  thorough  inspection  of  tubular  steel  centering 
is  necessary  before  its  erection  and  members  showing 
evidence  of  excessive  resting,  kinks,  dents  or  damaged 
welds  shall  be  discarded.  Buckled  or  broken  members 
shall  be  replaced.  Care  shall  also  be  taken  that  locking 
devices  are  in  good  working  order  and  that  coupling 
pins  are  effectively  aligned  to  frames. 

17.2.7  After  assembling  the  basic  unit,  adjustment 
screws  shall  be  set  to  their  approximate  final  adjustment 


and  the  unit  shall  be  level  and  plumb  so  that  when 
additional  frames  are  installed  the  tower  shall  be  in 
level  and  plumb.  The  centering  frames  shall  be  tied 
together  with  sufficient  braces  to  make  a  rigid  and  solid 
unit.  It  shall  be  ensured  that  struts  and  diagonals  braces 
are  in  proper  position  and  are  secured  so  that  frames 
develop  full  load  carrying  capacity.  As  erection 
progresses,  all  connecting  devices  shall  be  in  place  and 
shall  be  fastened  for  full  stability  of  joints  and  units. 

17.2.8  In  case  of  timber  posts,  vertical  joints  shall  be 
properly  designed.  The  connections  shall  normally  be 
with  bolts  and  nuts.  Use  of  rusted  or  spoiled  threaded 
bolts  and  nuts  shall  be  avoided. 

17.2.9  Unless  the  timber  centering  is  supported  by  a 
manufacturer's  certificate  about  the  loads  it  can  stand, 
centering  shall  be  designed  by  a  competent  engineer. 

17.2.10  Centering  layout  shall  be  made  by  a  qualified 
engineer  and  shall  be  strictly  followed.  The  bearing 
capacity  of  the  soil  shall  be  kept  in  view  for  every 
centering  job.  The  effect  of  weather  conditions  as  dry 
clay  may  become  very  plastic  after  a  rainfall  and  show 
marked  decrease  in  its  bearing  capacity. 

17.2.11  Sills  under  the  supports  shall  be  set  on  firm 
soil  or  other  suitable  material  in  a  pattern  which  assures 
adequate  stability  for  all  props.  Care  shall  be  taken  not 
to  disturb  the  soil  under  the  supports.  Adequate 
drainage  shall  be  provided  to  drain  away  water  coming 
due  to  rains,  washing  of  forms  or  during  the  curing  of 
the  concrete  to  avoid  softening  of  the  supporting  soil 
starta. 

17.2.12  All  centering  shall  be  finally,  inspected  to 
ensure  that; 

a)  footings  or  sills  under  every  post  of  the 
centering  are  sound. 

b)  all  lower  adjustment  screws  or  wedges  are 
sung  against  the  legs  of  the  panels. 

c)  all  upper  adjustment  screws  or  heads  of  jacks 
are  in  full  contact  with  the  formwork. 

d)  panels  are  plumb  in  both  directions. 

e)  all  cross  braces  are  in  place  and  locking 
devices  are  in  closed  and  secure  position. 

f)  In  case  of  CHHAJAS  and  balconies,  the  props 
shall  be  adequate  to  transfer  the  load  to  the 
supporting  point. 

17.2.13  During  pouring  of  the  concrete,  the  centering 
shall  be  constantly  inspected  and  strengthened,  if 
required,  wedges  below  the  vertical  supports  tightened 
and  adjustment  screws  properly  adjusted  as  necessary. 
Adequate  protection  of  centering  shall  be  secured  from 
moving  vehicles  or  swinging  loads. 

17.2.14  Forms  shall  not  be  removed  earlier  than  as 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


31 


laid  down  in  the  specifications  and  until  it  is  certain 
that  the  concrete  has  developed  sufficient  strength  to 
support  itself  and  all  loads  that  will  be  imposed  on  it. 
Only  workmen  actually  engaged  in  removing  the 
formwork  shall  be  allowed  in  the  area  during  these 
operations.  Those  engaged  in  removing  the  formwork 
shall  wear  helmets,  gloves  and  heavy  soled  shoes  and 
approved  safety  belts  if  adequate  footing  is  not 
provided  above  2  m  level.  While  cutting  any  tying 
wires  in  tension,  care  shall  be  taken  to  prevent  backlash 
which  might  hit  a  workman. 

17.2.14.1  The  particular  order  in  which  the  supports 
are  to  be  dismantled  should  be  followed  according  to 
the  instructions  of  the  site  engineer. 

17.3  Ramps  and  Gangways 

17.3.1  Ramps  and  gangways  shall  be  of  adequate 
strength  and  evenly  supported.  They  shall  either  have 
a  sufficiently  flat  slope  or  shall  have  cleats  fixed  to  the 
surface  to  prevent  slipping  of  workmen.  Ramps  and 
gangways  shall  be  kept  free  from  grease,  mud,  snow 
or  other  slipping  hazards  or  other  obstructions  leading 
to  tripping  and  accidental  fall  of  a  workman. 

17.3.1.1  Ramps  and  gangways  meant  for  transporting 
materials  shall  have  even  surface  and  be  of  sufficient 
width  and  provided  with  skirt  boards  on  open  sides. 

17.4  Materials  Hoists 

17.4.1  The  hoist  should  be  erected  on  a  firm  base, 
adequately  supported  and  secured.  All  materials 
supporting  the  hoist  shall  be  appropriately  designed 
and  strong  enough  for  the  work  intended  and  free  from 
defects. 

17.4.2  The  size  of  the  drum  shall  match  the  size  of 
the  rope.  Not  less  than  two  full  turns  of  rope  shall 
remain  on  the  drum  at  all  times.  Ropes  shall  be  securely 
attached  to  the  drum. 

17.4.3  All  ropes,  chains  and  other  lifting  gear  shall  be 
properly  made  of  sound  materials,  free  from  defects 
and  strong  enough  for  the  work  intended.  They  shall 
be  examined  by  a  competent  person  who  shall  clearly 
certify  the  safe  working  load  on  each  item  and  the 
system. 

17.4.4  Hoistways  shall  be  protected  by  a  substantial 
enclosure  at  ground  level,  at  all  access  points 
and  wherever  persons  may  be  struck  by  any  moving 
part. 

17.4.5  Gates  at  access  points  should  be  at  least  2  m 
high  wherever  possible.  Gates  shall  be  kept  closed  at 
all  times  except  when  required  open  for  immediate 
movement  of  materials  at  that  landing  place. 

17.4.6  All  gates  shall  be  fitted  with  electronic  or 


mechanical  interlocks  to  prevent  movement  of  the  hoist 
in  the  event  of  a  gate  being  opened. 

17.4.7  Winches  used  for  hoists  shall  be  so  constructed 
that  a  brake  is  applied  when  the  control  lever  or  switch 
is  not  held  in  the  operating  position  (dead-man's 
handle). 

17.4.8  The  hoist  tower  shall  be  tied  to  a  building  or 
structure  at  every  floor  level  or  at  least  every  3  m.  The 
height  of  the  tower  shall  not  exceed  6  m  after  the  last 
tie  or  a  lesser  height  as  recommended  by  the 
manufacturer.  All  ties  on  a  hoist  tower  shall  be  secured 
using  right  angled  couples. 

17.4.9  The  hoist  shall  be  capable  of  being  operated 
only  from  one  position  at  a  time.  It  shall  not  be  operated 
from  the  cage.  The  operator  shall  have  a  clear  view  of 
all  levels  or,  if  he  has  not,  a  clear  and  distinct  system 
of  signalling  shall  be  employed. 

17.4.10  All  hoist  platform  shall  be  fitted  with  guards 
and  gates  to  a  height  of  at  least  1  m,  to  prevent  materials 
rolling/falling  from  the  platform. 

17.4.1 1  Where  materials  extend  over  the  height  of  the 
platform  guards,  a  frame  shall  be  fitted  and  the 
materials  secured  to  it  during  hoisting/lowering.  (Care 
should  be  taken  to  ensure  that  neither  the  frame  nor 
materials  interfere  or  touch  any  part  of  the  hoisting 
mechanism.) 

17.4.12  The  platform  of  a  goods  hoist  shall  carry  a 
notice  stating: 

a)  the  safe  working  load;  and 

b)  that  passengers  shall  not  ride  on  the  hoist. 

17.4.13  All  hoist  operators  shall  be  adequately  trained 
and  competent,  and  shall  be  responsible  for  ensuring 
that  the  hoist  is  not  overloaded  or  otherwise  misued. 

17.4.14  All  hoists  shall  be  tested  and  thoroughly 
examined  by  a  competent  person  before  use  on  a  site, 
after  substantial  alteration,  modification  or  repair  of 
hoists,  and  at  least  every  6  months. 

17.4.15  Every  hoist  shall  be  inspected  at  least  once 
each  week  by  a  competent  person  and  a  record  of  these 
inspections  kept. 

17.5  Prestressed  Concrete 

17.5.1  In  pre-stressing  operations,  operating, 
maintenance  and  replacement  instructions  of  the 
supplier  of  the  equipment  shall  be  strictly  adhered  to. 

17.5.2  Extreme  caution  shall  be  exercised  in  all 
operations  involving  the  use  of  stressing  equipment  as 
wires/strands  under  high  tensile  stresses  become  a 
lethal  weapon. 

17.5.3  During  the  jacking  operation  of  any  tensioning 


32 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


element(s)  the  anchor  shall  be  kept  turned  up  close  to 
anchor  plate,  wherever  possible,  to  avoid  serious 
damage  if  a  hydraulic  line  fails. 

17.5.4  Pulling-headers,  bolts  and  hydraulic  jacks/rams 
shall  be  inspected  for  signs  of  deformation  and  failure. 
Threads  on  bolts  and  nuts  should  be  frequently 
inspected  for  diminishing  cross  section.  Choked  units 
shall  be  carefully  cleaned. 

17.5.5  Care  shall  be  taken  that  no  one  stands  in  line 
with  the  tensioning  elements  and  jacking  equipment 
during  the  tensioning  operations  and  that  no  one  is 
directly  over  the  jacking  equipment  when  deflection 
is  being  done.  Signs  and  barriers  shall  be  provided  to 
prevent  workmen  from  working  behind  the  jacks  when 
the  stressing  operation  is  in  progress. 

17.5.6  Necessary  shields  should  be  put  up  immediately 
behind  the  prestressing  jacks  during  stressing 
operations. 

17.5.7  Wedges  and  other  temporary  anchoring  devices 
shall  be  inspected  before  use. 

17.5.8  The  prestressing  jacks  shall  be  periodically 
examined  for  wear  and  tear. 

17.6  Erection  of  Prefabricated  Members 

17.6.1  A  spreader  beam  shall  be  used  wherever 
possible  so  that  the  cable  can  be  as  perpendicular  to 
the  members  being  lifted  as  practical.  The  angle 
between  the  cable  and  the  members  to  be  lifted  shall 
not  be  less  than  60°. 

17.6.2  The  lifting  wires  shall  be  tested  for  double  the 
load  to  be  handled  at  least  once  in  six  months.  The 
guy  line  shall  be  of  adequate  strength  to  perform  its 
function  of  controlling  the  movement  of  members 
being  lifted. 

17.6.3  Temporary  scaffolding  of  adequate  strength 
shall  be  used  to  support  precast  members  at 
predetermined  supporting  points  while  lifting  and 
placing  them  in  position  and  connecting  them  to  other 
members. 

17.6.4  After  erection  of  the  member,  it  shall  be  guyed 
and  braced  to  prevent  it  from  being  tipped  or  dislodged 
by  accidental  impact  when  setting  the  next  member. 

17.6.5  Precast  concrete  units  shall  be  handled  at 
specific  picking  points  and  with  specific  devices. 
Girders  and  beams  shall  be  braced  during  transportation 
and  handled.  In  such  a  way  as  to  keep  the  members 
upright. 

17.6.6  Methods  of  assembly  and  erection  specified  by 
the  designer,  shall  be  strictly  adhered  to  at  site. 
Immediately  on  erecting  any  unit  in  position,  temporary 
connections  or  supports  as  specified  shall  be  provided 


before  releasing  the  lifting  equipment.  The  permanent 
structural  connections  shall  be  established  at  the  earliest 
opportunity. 

17.7  Heated  Concrete 

When  heaters  are  being  used  to  heat  aggregates  and 
other  materials  and  to  maintain  proper  curing 
temperatures,  the  heaters  shall  be  frequently  checked 
for  functioning  and  precautions  shall  be  taken  to  avoid 
hazards  in  using  coal,  liquid,  gas  or  any  other  fuel. 

17.8  Structural  Connections 

17.8.1  When  reliance  is  placed  on  bond  between 
precast  and  in-situ  concrete  the  contact  surface  of  the 
precast  units  shall  be  suitably  prepared  in  accordance 
with  the  specifications. 

17.8.2  The  packing  of  joints  shall  be  carried  out  in 
accordance  with  the  assembly  instructions. 

17.8.3  Levelling  devices,  such  as  wedges  and  nuts 
which  have  no  load  bearing  function  in  the  completed 
structure  shall  be  released  or  removed  as  necessary 
prior  to  integrating  the  joints. 

17.8.4  If  it  becomes  necessary  to  use  electric  power 
for  in-situ  work,  the  same  should  be  stepped  down  to 
a  safe  level  as  far  as  possible. 

17.9  General 

Workmen  working  in  any  position  where  there  is  a 
falling  hazard  shall  wear  safety  belts  or  other  adequate 
protection  shall  be  provided. 

18  ADDITIONAL  SAFETY  REQUIREMENTS 
FOR  ERECTION  OF  STRUCTURAL  STEEL 
WORK 

18.1  Safety  Organization 

The  agency  responsible  for  erecting  the  steel  work 
should  analyze  the  proposed  erection  scheme  for 
safety;  the  erection  scheme  should  cover  safety  aspects 
right  from  the  planning  stage  up  to  the  actual  execution 
of  the  work. 

18.2  Safety  of  Workpersons 

18.2.1  General 

While  engaging  persons  for  the  job  the  supervisor 
should  check  up  and  make  sure  that  they  are  skilled  in 
the  particular  job  they  have  to  perform. 

18.2.1.1  The  helmets  shall  be  worn  properly  and  at 
all  times  during  the  work  and  shall  conform  to  the 
accepted  standards  [7(9)]. 

18.2.1.2  The  safety  goggles  shall  be  used  while 
performing  duties  which  are  hazardous  to  eye  like 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


33 


drilling,  cutting  and  welding.  The  goggles  used  shall 
conform  to  the  accepted  standards  [7(15)]  and  should 
suit  individual  workers. 

18.2.1.3  The  welders  and  gas  cutters  shall  be  equipped 
with  proper  protective  equipment  like  gloves,  safety 
boots,  aprons  and  hand  shields  [see  accepted  standard 
7(15)].  The  filter  glass  of  the  hand  shield  shall  conform 
to  the  accepted  standards  [7(16)]  and  should  be  suitable 
to  the  eyes  of  the  particular  worker. 

18.2.1.4  When  the  work  is  in  progress,  the  area  shall 
be  cordoned  off  by  barricades  to  prevent  persons  from 
hitting  against  structural  components,  or  falling  into 
excavated  trenches  or  getting  injured  by  falling  objects. 

18.2.1.5  Warning  signs  shall  be  displayed  where 
necessary  to  indicate  hazards,  for  example  (a)  '440 
VOLTS',  (b)  'DO  NOT  SMOKE',  (c)  'MEN  WORKING 
AHEAD',  etc.  Hand  lamps  shall  be  of  low  voltage 
preferably  24  V  to  prevent  electrical  hazards. 

18.2.1.6  All  electrically  operated  hand  tools  shall  be 
provided  with  double  earthing. 

18.2.2  Anchors  for  guys  or  ties  shall  be  checked  for 
proper  placement.  The  weight  of  concrete  in  which 
the  anchors  are  embedded  shall  be  checked  for  uplift 
and  sliding. 

18.2.2.1  Split-end  eye  anchors  shall  only  be  used  in 
good,  solid  rock. 

18.2.2.2  The  first  load  lifted  by  a  guy  derrick  shall  be 
kept  at  a  small  height  for  about  10  min  and  the  anchors 
immediately  inspected  for  any  signs  or  indications  of 
failure. 

18.2.3  When  a  number  of  trusses  or  deep  girders  is 
loaded  in  one  car  or  on  one  truck,  all  but  one  being 
lifted  shall  be  tied  back  unless  they  have  been  tied  or 
braced  to  prevent  their  falling  over  and  endangering 
men  unloading. 

18.2.4  The  erection  gang  shall  have  adequate  supply 
of  bolts,  washers,  rivets,  pins,  etc,  of  the  correct  size. 
Enough  number  of  bolts  shall  be  used  in  connecting 
each  piece  using  a  minimum  of  two  bolts  in  a  pattern 
to  ensure  that  the  joint  will  not  fail  due  to  dead  load 
and  erection  loads.  All  splice  connections  in  columns, 
crane  girders,  etc,  shall  be  completely  bolted  or  riveted 
or  welded  as  specified  in  the  drawing  before  erection. 

18.2.5  Girders  and  other  heavy  complicated  structural 
members  may  require  special  erection  devices  like 
cleats  and  hooks,  which  can  be  shop  assembled  and 
bolted  or  riveted  or  welded  to  the  piece  and  may  be 
left  permanently  in  the  place  after  the  work. 

18.2.6  If  a  piece  is  laterally  unstable  when  picked  at 
its  centre,  use  of  a  balance  beam  is  advisable,  unless  a 


pair  of  bridles  slings  can  be  placed  far  enough  apart 
for  them  to  be  safe  lifting  points.  The  top  flange  of  a 
truss,  girder  or  long  beam  may  be  temporarily 
reinforced  with  a  structural  member  laid  flat  on  top  of 
the  member  and  secured  temporarily. 

18.2.7  On  deep  girders,  and  even  on  some  trusses,  a 
safety  'bar'  running  their  full  length  will  aid  the  riggers, 
fitters  and  others  employed  on  the  bottom  flange  or 
bottom  chord  to  work  with  greater  safety.  This  can  be 
a  single  16  mm  diameter  wire  rope  through  vertical 
stiffeners  of  such  members  about  one  metre  above  the 
bottom  flange  and  clamped  at  the  ends  with  wire  rope 
clamps.  If  the  holes  cannot  be  provided,  short  eye  bolts 
can  be  welded  to  the  webs  of  the  girder  at  intervals  to 
be  removed  and  the  surface  chipped  or  ground  to  leave 
it  smooth  after  all  work  on  the  piece  has  been 
completed. 

18.2.8  Safety  belts  shall  always  be  available  at  work 
spot  to  be  used  whenever  necessary.  The  rope  shall  be 
chemically  treated  to  resist  dew  and  rotting.  These  shall 
not  be  tied  on  sharp  edges  of  steel  structures.  They 
shall  be  tied  generally  not  more  than  2  m  to  3  m  away 
from  the  belt. 

18.2.9  On  a  guy  derrick  or  climbing  crane  job,  the 
tool  boxes  used  by  the  erection  staff  shall  be  moved  to 
the  new  working  floor  each  time  the  rig  is  changed. 
On  a  mobile  crane  job,  the  boxes  shall  be  moved  as 
soon  as  the  crane  starts  operating  in  a  new  area  too  far 
away  for  the  men  to  reach  the  boxes  conveniently. 
While  working  a  tall  and  heavy  guy  derrick,  it  is 
advisable  to  control  tension  in  guys  by  hand  winches 
to  avoid  jerks,  which  may  cause  an  accident. 

18.2.10  The  proper  size,  number  and  spacing  of  wire 
rope  clamps  shall  be  used,  depending  on  the  diameter 
of  the  wire  rope.  They  shall  be  properly  fixed  in 
accordance  with  good  practice  [7(17)].  They  shall  be 
checked  as  soon  as  the  rope  has  been  stretched,  as  the 
rope,  especially  if  new,  tends  to  stretch  under  the 
applied  load,  which  in  turn  may  cause  it  to  shrink 
slightly  in  diameter.  The  clamps  shall  then  be  promptly 
tightened  to  take  care  of  this  new  condition.  In  addition, 
the  clamps  shall  be  inspected  frequently  to  be  sure  that 
they  have  not  slipped  and  are  tight  enough. 

18.2.11  When  the  men  can  work  safely  from  the  steel 
structure  itself,  this  is  preferable  to  hanging  platforms 
or  scaffolds,  as  it  eliminates  additional  operations, 
which  in  turn,  reduces  the  hazard  of  an  accident. 

18.2.11.1  To  aid  men  working  on  floats  or  scaffolds, 
as  well  as  men  in  erection  gangs,  or  other  gangs  using 
small  material,  such  as  bolts  and  drift  pins,  adequate 
bolt  baskets  or  similar  containers  with  handles  of 
sufficient  strength  and  attachment  to  carry  the  loaded 
containers,  shall  be  provided. 


34 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


18.2.11.2  The  men  should  be  trained  to  use  such 
containers,  and  to  keep  small  tools  gathered  up  and 
put  away  in  tool  boxes  when  not  in  use.  Material 
shall  not  be  dumped  overboard  when  a  scaffold  is 
to  be  moved.  Rivet  heaters  shall  have  safe  containers 
or  buckets  for  hot  rivets  left  over  at  the  end  of  the 
day. 

18.2.12  During  the  erection  of  tall  buildings,  it  is 
desirable  to  use  nylon  nets  at  a  height  of  3  m  to  4  m  to 
provide  safety  to  men.  The  safety  net  should  be  made 
from  man  or  machine-made  fibre  ropes  which  are  UV 
stablized  and  conforming  to  the  acceptable  standard 
[7(18)]. 

18.2.13  Safety  Against  Fire 

A  fire  protection  procedure  is  to  be  set  up  if  there  is  to 
be  any  flame  cutting,  burning,  heating,  rivetting  or  any 
operation  that  could  start  a  fire.  For  precautions  to  be 
observed  during  welding  and  cutting  operations, 
reference  may  be  made  to  good  practice  [7(19)]. 

18.2.13.1  The  workers  should  be  instructed  not  to 
throw  objects  like  hot  rivets,  cigarette  stubs,  etc, 
around. 

18.2.13.2  Sufficient  fire  extinguishers  shall  be  placed 
at  strategic  points.  Extinguishers  shall  always  be  placed 
in  cranes,  hoists,  compressors  and  similar  places. 
Where  electrical  equipments  are  involved,  CO^  or  dry 
powder  extinguishers  shall  be  provided  {see  also  good 
practice  [7(4)]}. 

18.2.14  Riding  on  a  load,  tackle  or  runner  shall  be 
prohibited. 

18.2.15  The  load  shall  never  be  allowed  to  rest  on  wire 
ropes.  Ropes  in  operation  should  not  be  touched.  Wire 
rope  with  broken  strand  shall  not  be  used  for  erection 
work.  Wire  ropes/manila  ropes  conforming  to 
acceptable  standards  [7(20)]  shall  be  used  for  guying. 

18.2.16  Lifting  Appliances 

Precautions  as  laid  down  in  17.1.2  shall  be  followed. 

18.2.17  Slinging 

18.2.17.1  Chains  shall  not  be  joined  by  bolting  or 
wiring  links  together.  They  shall  not  be  shortened  by 
tying  knots.  A  chain  in  which  the  links  are  locked, 
stretched  or  do  not  move  freely  shall  not  be  used.  The 
chain  shall  be  free  of  kinks  and  twists.  Proper  eye 
splices  shall  be  used  to  attach  the  chain  hooks. 

18.2.17.2  Pulley  blocks  of  the  proper  size  shall  be  used 
to  allow  the  rope  free  play  in  the  sheave  grooves  and 
to  protect  the  wire  rope  from  sharp  bends  under  load. 
Idle  sling  should  not  be  carried  on  the  crane  hook 
alongwith  a  loaded  sling.  When  idle  slings  are  carried 
they  shall  be  hooked. 


18.2.17.3  While  using  multilegged  slings,  each  sling 
or  leg  shall  be  loaded  evenly  and  the  slings  shall  be  of 
sufficient  length  to  avoid  a  wide  angle  between  the 

legs. 

18.2.18  Rivetting  Operations 

18.2.18.1  Handling  rivets 

Care  shall  be  taken  while  handling  rivets  so  that  they 
do  not  fall,  strike  or  cause  injury  to  men  and  material 
below.  Rivet  catchers  shall  have  false  wooden  bottoms 
to  prevent  rivets  from  rebounding. 

18.2.18.2  Rivetting  dollies 

Canvas,  leather  or  rope  slings  shall  be  used  for  riveting 
dollies.  Chain  shall  not  be  used  for  the  purpose. 

18.2.18.3  Rivetting  hammers 

Snaps  and  plungers  of  pneumatic  riveting  hammers 
shall  be  secured  to  prevent  the  snap  from  dropping  out 
of  place.  The  nozzle  of  the  hammer  shall  be  inspected 
periodically  and  the  wire  attachment  renewed  when 
born. 

18.2.18.4  Fire  protection 

The  rivet  heating  equipment  should  be  as  near  as 
possible  to  the  place  of  work.  A  pail  of  water  shall 
always  be  kept  already  for  quenching  the  fire  during 
rivetting  operations  and  to  prevent  fires  when  working 
near  inflammable  materials. 

18.2.19  Welding  and  Gas  Cutting 

18.2.19.1  For  safety  and  health  requirements  in  electric 
gas  welding  and  cutting  operations,  reference  may  be 
made  to  good  practice  [7(21)].  The  recommendations 
given  in  18.2.19.2  to  18.2.19.4  are  also  applicable. 

18.2.19.2  All  gas  cylinders  shall  be  used  and  stored 
in  the  upright  position  only  and  shall  be  conveyed  in 
trolleys.  While  handling  by  cranes  they  shall  be  carried 
in  cages.  The  cylinders  shall  be  marked  'full'  or 
'empty'  as  the  case  may  be.  Gas  cylinders  shall  be 
stored  away  from  open  flames  and  other  sources  of 
heat.  Oxygen  cylinders  shall  not  be  stored  near 
combustible  gas,  oil,  grease  and  similar  combustible 
materials.  When  the  cylinders  are  in  use,  cylinder  valve 
key  or  wrench  shall  be  placed  in  position.  Before  a 
cylinder  is  moved,  cylinder  valve  shall  be  closed.  All 
cylinder  valves  shall  be  closed  when  the  torches  are 
being  replaced  or  welding  is  stopped  for  some  reason. 
The  cylinder  valve  and  connections  shall  not  be 
lubricated. 

18.2.19.3  Gas  cutting  and  welding  torches  shall  be 
lighted  by  means  of  special  lighters  and  not  with 
matches.  The  cables  from  welding  equipment  should 
be  placed  in  such  a  way  that  they  are  not  run  over  by 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


35 


traffic.  Double  earthing  siiall  be  provided.  Before 
undertaking  welding  operations  near  combustible 
materials,  suitable  blanketing  shall  be  provided  and 
fire  extinguishers  kept  nearby.  Welding  shall  not  be 
undertaken  in  areas  where  inflammable  liquids  and 
gases  are  stored. 

18.2.19.4  Gas  lines  and  compressed  air  lines  shall 
be  identified  by  suitable  colour  codes  for  easy 
identification,  to  avoid  confusion  and  to  prevent  fire 
and  explosion  hazards. 

18.3  Safety  of  Structure 

18.3.1  General 

The  structure  itself  should  be  safeguarded  during  its 
erection.  The  first  truss  of  the  roof  system  shall  be 
guyed  on  each  side  before  the  hoisting  rope  is  detached 
from  it.  After  the  subsequent  trusses  and  roof  purlins 
are  erected,  protective  guides  shall  be  firmly 
established  and  the  required  wind  bracings  shall  be 
erected  to  prevent  the  whole  structure  being  blown  over 
by  a  sudden  gale  at  night.  Bracing  and  guying 
precautions  shall  be  taken  on  every  structure  until  it  is 
complete.  Guying  shall  be  specifically  done  for  trusses 
and  structural  components  which  after  their  erection 
form  an  erection  device.  On  structures  used  for 
temporary  material  storage  overloading  shall  be 
avoided. 

18.3.1.1  Erection  of  columns  shall  be  immediately 
followed  by  vertical  bracing  between  columns  before 
the  roof  structure  is  erected. 

19  MISCELLANEOUS  ITEMS 

19.1  Staircase  Construction 

While  staircase  is  under  construction,  depending  on 
the  type  of  construction,  namely,  concrete  or 
brickwork,  etc,  suitable  precautions  shall  be  taken  by 
way  of  support,  formworks,  etc,  to  prevent  any 
collapse.  Workmen  or  any  other  person  shall  not  be 
allowed  to  use  such  staircases  till  they  are  tested  and 
found  fit  for  usage  by  the  Authority/engineer-in- 
charge.  Till  the  permanent  handrails  are  provided, 
temporary  provisions  like  ropes,  etc,  shall  be  provided 
on  staircases  prior  to  commencement  of  use  of  such 
staircases. 

19.2  Lift  Wells 

Till  the  installation  of  the  lift  is  completed,  lift  wells 
shall  be  protected  with  check  boards  or  railings  together 
with  notice  boards,  danger  lights,  etc,  to  precent 
persons  accidentally  falling  into  the  wells.  The 
handrails  provided  shall  be  capable  of  withstanding 
pressure  exerted  due  to  normal  bumping  of  an 
individual  against  the  same. 


19.3  Construction  Involving  the  Use  of  Hot 
Bituminous  Tar  Materials 

19.3.1  Safety  Programme 

19.3.1.1  General 

On  all  major  works,  an  experienced  and  competent 
foreman  or  supervisor  shall  be  placed  in-charge  of  the 
work,  and  shall  be  made  responsible  for  the  strict 
observance  of  the  safety  rules.  He  shall  stock  the 
necessary  protective  equipment,  fire  extinguishing 
equipment,  first-aid  kit,  etc.  He  shall  also  keep  a  record 
of  the  accidents  taking  place  on  any  particular  job,  with 
reasons  thereof,  and  shall  suggest  suitable  remedial 
measures  to  the  management  for  prevention  thereof. 

19.3.1.2  Protective  covering 

Workers  engaged  on  jobs  involving  handling  of  hot 
bitumen,  tar,  and  bituminous  mixtures  shall  use 
protective  wears,  such  as  boots  and  gloves,  preferably 
of  asbestos  or  otherwise  of  rubber;  goggles  and  helmet. 
No  workers  shall  be  permitted  to  handle  such  materials 
without  wearing  the  needed  protective  covering. 

19.3.1.3  Fire  fighting  arrangements 

When  heating  and  handling  of  hot  bituminous  materials 
is  to  be  done  in  the  open,  sufficient  stocks  of  clean  dry 
sand  or  loose  earth  shall  be  made  available  at  the  work 
site  to  cope  with  any  resultant  fires.  When  such 
materials  are  not  available,  nor  are  any  suitable  type 
of  fire  extinguishers  provided  at  the  work  site  in  the 
open,  and  reliance  has  to  be  on  using  water  for  fighting 
any  fire,  the  water  supply  available  should  be  in 
abundance  and  the  water  shall  be  applied  to  the  fire  in 
the  form  of  spray.  When  heating  of  bituminous 
materials  is  carried  out  in  enclosed  spaces,  sufficient 
number  of  properly  maintained  dry  powder  fire 
extinguisher  or  form  extinguisher  conforming  to 
accepted  standards  [7(21)]  shall  be  kept  in  readiness 
on  the  work  site. 

19.3.2  Sprayer,  Spreader/Paver 

19.3.2.1  Sprayer 

The  sprayer  shall  be  provided  with  a  fire  resisting 
screen.  The  screen  shall  have  an  observation  window. 
Piping  for  hot  tar  and  bitumen  shall  be  adequately 
insulated  to  protect  workers  from  injury  by  burns. 
Flexible  piping  work  under  positive  pressure  shall  be 
of  metal  which  shall  be  adequately  insulated.  Workers 
shall  not  stand  facing  the  wind  directions  while 
spraying  hot  binder,  lest  it  may  fall  on  them  causing 
burns. 

19.3.2.2  Spreader/Paver 

Spreaders  in  operation  shall  be  protected  by  signals, 
signs  or  other  effective  means.  People  should  be 


36 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


warned  against  walking  over  hot  mixture  laid.  Gravel 
spreaders  shall  always  keep  a  safe  distance  from 
sprayer.  Elevated  platforms  on  spreaders  shall  be 
protected  by  suitable  railing  and  be  provided  with  an 
access  ladder. 

19.3.3  Equipment  for  Heating  of  Bitumen  and  Tars 

19.3.3.1  Tanks,  vats,  kettles,  pots,  drums  and  other 
vessels  for  heating  tar,  bitumen  and  other  bituminous 
materials  shall  be: 

a)  adequately  resistant  to  damage  by  heat, 
transportation,  etc; 

b)  capable  of  holding  a  full  load  without  danger 
of  collapse,  bursting  or  distortion; 

c)  provided  with  a  close  fitting  cover  suitable 
for  smothering  a  fire  in  the  vessel  or 
protection  from  rain;  and 

d)  leak  proof,  and  provided  with  suitable  outlets 
which  can  be  controlled  for  taking  out  the  hot 
material. 

19.3.3.2  Suitable  indicator  gauges  shall  be  used  to 
ascertain  level  and  temperature  of  the  material  in  the 
boiler.  On  no  account  shall  workers  be  allowed  to  peep 
into  the  boiler  for  this  purpose.  For  ascertaining  levels, 
in  small  plants,  dipstick  may  also  be  used. 

19.3.3.3  Gas  and  oil-fired  bitumen  and  tar  kettles  or 
pots  shall  be  equipped  with  burners,  regulators  and 
safety  devices  of  types  approved  by  the  Authority. 
Heating  appliances  for  vessels  shall  distribute  the  heat 
uniformly  over  the  heating  surface  so  as  to  avoid 
overheating.  In  case  of  bituminous  mixtures  using 
mineral  aggregates  filler  together  with  bitumen,  it  is 
preferable  to  have  some  means  for  stirring  as  well.  Only 
vessels  heated  by  electricity  shall  be  used  inside 
buildings.  Tar  boilers  shall  never  be  used  on 
combustible  roof. 

19.3.3.4  Buckets  for  hot  bitumen,  bituminous 
materials  of  tar  shall  have; 

a)  the  bail  or  handle  firmly  secured,  and 

b)  a  second  handle  near  the  bottom  for  tipping. 

19.3.3.5  Bitumen  or  tar  boilers  mounted  on  wheels 
for  easy  transport  or  towing  shall  preferably  be 
provided  with  hand  pumps  for  spraying  purposes. 

19.3.3.6  Vessels  in  operation  shall  be  kept  at  a  safe 
distance  from  combustible  materials.  When  vessels  are 
used  in  confined  spaces,  the  gases,  fumes  and  smoke 
generated  shall  be  removed  by  exhaust  ventilation  or 
by  forced  ventilations.  Vessels  that  are  being  heated 
shall  not  be  left  unattended.  Pieces  of  bituminous 
material  shall  not  be  thrown  into  the  hot  vessels  so  as 
to  cause  splashing.  Covers  shall  be  kept  closed  when 
vessels  are  not  in  use.  Containers  shall  not  be  filled 


with  hot  bitumen  or  tar  to  a  level  that  might  cause 
danger  when  they  are  carried  or  hoisted.  Enough  space 
shall  be  left  in  vessels  for  expansion  of  binder  when 
heated. 

19.3.3.7  Bitumen/Tar  shall  be  kept  dry  and  to  avoid 
fire  due  to  foaming,  boiler  shall  have  a  device  that 
prevents  foam  from  reaching  the  burners  or  anti- 
foaming  agents  shall  be  used  to  control  the  same. 
Alternatively  to  avoid  fire  due  to  foaming,  the  heating 
shall  be  at  low  temperature  till  the  water  entrapped,  if 
any,  is  completely  evaporated.  Any  water  present  in 
the  boiler  shall  also  be  drained  before  using  it  for 
heating  binders.  No  open  light  shall  be  used  for 
ascertaining  the  level  of  binder  in  boilers.  If  a  burner 
goes  out,  the  fuel  supply  shall  be  cut  off  and  the  heating 
tube  shall  be  thoroughly  blown  out  by  the  fan  so  as  to 
prevent  a  back  fire. 

19.3.3.8  Cutbacks  shall  not  be  heated  over  an  open 
flame  unless  a  water  jacket  is  used.  While  they  are 
being  heated  the  vessel  shall  be  kept  open. 

19.3.3.9  Piping  shall  not  be  warmed  with  burning  rags 
and  instead  blow-lamps  or  similar  devices  shall  be  used. 

19.3.3.10  Spilled  bitumen  or  tar  shall  be  promptly 
cleaned  up  around  boilers. 

19.3.3.11  Inspection  openings  shall  not  be  opened 
while  there  is  any  pressure  in  the  boiler. 

19.3.3.12  When  tanks  are  cleaned  by  steam,  adequate 
precautions  shall  be  taken  to  prevent  any  built  up  of 
pressure. 

19.3.4  Handling  Bitumen/Tar 

Bitumen/tar  shall  not  be  heated  beyond  the  temperature 
recommended  by  the  manufacturer  of  the  product. 
While  discharging  heated  binder  from  the  boiler, 
workers  shall  not  stand  opposite  to  the  jet  so  as  to  avoid 
the  possibility  of  hot  binder  falling  on  them.  The 
container  shall  be  handled  only  after  closing  the  control 
valve.  While  handling  hot  bitumen/tar,  workers  shall 
exercise  scrupulous  care  to  prevent  accidental  spillage 
thereof.  The  buckets  and  cans  in  which  the  hot  material 
is  carried  from  boiler  shall  be  checked  before  use  to 
ensure  that  they  are  intact  and  safe.  Mops  and  other 
applicators  contaminated  with  bituminous  materials 
shall  not  be  stored  inside  buildings. 

19.3.5  Bitumen  Plants 

Safety  requirements  shall  be  in  accordance  with  good 
practice  [7(22)]. 

19.4  Timber  Structure 

Preventive  measures  against  hazards  in  work  places 
involving  construction  of  timber  structures  shall  be 
taken  in  accordance  with  good  practice  [7(23)]. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


37 


20  FINISHES 

20.1  Painting,  Polishing  and  Other  Finishes 

Only  the  quantity  of  paint,  thinner  and  pohsh  required 
for  the  day's  work  should  be  kept  at  the  work  spot. 

20.1.1  All  containers  of  paint,  thinner  and  polish  which 
are  not  in  actual  use  should  be  closed  with  tight  fitting 
lids  and  kept  at  a  safe  place  away  from  the  actual  work 
site. 

20.1.2  A  5  kg  dry  powder  fire  extinguisher  conforming 
to  acceptable  standards  [7(23)]  shall  be  kept  handy. 

20.1.3  Metal  receptacles  with  pedal  operated  metal  lids 
shall  be  kept  handy  at  the  work  site  for  depositing  used 
cotton  rags/waste.  The  contents  of  such  receptacles 
shall  be  disposed  off  before  the  end  of  each  day's  work 
at  a  safe  place,  preferably  by  burning  under  proper 
supervision. 

20.1.4  All  containers  of  paint  shall  be  removed  from 
the  work  site  and  deposited  in  the  paint  store  before  the 
close  of  day '  s  work.  Used  paint  brushes  shall  be  cleaned 
and  deposited  in  the  store  alongwith  the  containers. 

20.1.5  Some  paints/polishing  and  finishing  materials 
are  injurious  to  the  health  of  workmen.  Adequate 
protective  clothing,  respiratory  equipment,  etc,  shall 
be  provided  for  the  use  of  workmen  during  such 
operations  where  necessary. 

21  FRAGILE  FIXTURES 

21.1  It  shall  be  ensured  that  sufficient  number  of 
workmen  and  equipment  are  provided  to  carry  the 
fragile  fixtures  like  sanitary  fittings,  glass  panes,  etc, 
to  prevent  injury  to  workmen  due  to  accidental 
dropping  of  such  fixtures. 

22  SAFETY  IN  SPECIAL  OPERATIONS 

22.1  Safety  in  compressed  airwork,  drilling,  blasting 
and  welding  operations  shall  be  in  accordance  with 
good  practice  [7(25)]. 

23  ELECTRICAL  INSTALLATIONS  AND  LIFTS 

23.1  Temporary  Electrical  Wiring 

23.1.1  Frayed  and/or  bare  wires  shall  not  be  used  for 
temporary  electrical  connections  during  construction. 
All  temporary  wiring  shall  be  installed  and  supervised 
by  a  competent  electrician.  Adequate  protection  shall 
be  provided  for  all  electrical  wiring  laid  on  floor  which 
may  have  to  be  crossed  over  by  construction  machinery 
or  by  the  workmen.  All  flexible  wiring  connecting  the 
electrical  appliances  shall  have  adequate  mechanical 
strength  and  shall  preferably  be  enclosed  in  a  flexible 
metal  sheath.  Overhead  wires/cables  shall  be  so  laid 
that  they  leave  adequate  head  room. 


23.1.2  All  electrical  circuits,  other  than  those  required 
for  illumination  of  the  site  at  night,  shall  be  switched 
off  at  the  close  of  day's  work.  The  main  switch  board 
from  which  connections  are  taken  for  lighting,  power 
operated  machinery,  etc,  shall  be  located  in  an  easily 
accessible  and  prominent  place.  No  articles  of  clothing 
nor  stores  shall  be  kept  at  the  back  of  or  over  the  board 
or  anywhere  near  it.  One  3  kg/4.5  kg  COj  extinguisher 
or  one  5  kg  dry  powder  extinguisher  shall  be  provided 
near  the  switch  board. 

23.2  Permanent  Electrical  Installations 

Besides  the  fire  safety  measures  for  electrical 
installations  covered  under  23.1,  safety  in  electric 
installations  in  buildings  and  installations  of  lifts  shall 
be  in  accordance  with  Part  8  'Building  Services, 
Section  2  Electrical  and  Allied  Installations  and 
Section  5  Installation  of  Lifts  and  Escalators'. 

24  GENERAL  REQUIREMENTS 

24.1  Sanitation 

a)  Adequate  toilet  facilities  shall  be  provided  for 
the  workmen  within  easy  access  of  their  place 
of  work.  The  total  number  to  be  provided  shall 
be  not  less  than  one  per  30  employees  in  any 
one  shift. 

b)  Toilet  facilities  shall  be  provided  from  the 
start  of  building  operations,  and  connection 
to  a  sewer  shall  be  made  as  soon  as  practicable. 

c)  Every  toilet  shall  be  so  constructed  that  the 
occupant  is  sheltered  from  view  and  protected 
from  the  weather  and  falling  objects. 

d)  Toilet  facilities  shall  be  maintained  in  a 
sanitary  condition.  A  sufficient  quantity  of 
disinfectant  shall  be  provided. 

e)  An  adequate  supply  of  drinking  water  shall 
be  provided,  and  unless  connected  to  a 
municipal  water  supply,  samples  of  the  water 
shall  be  tested  at  frequent  intervals  by  the 
Authority. 

f)  Washing  facilities  shall  be  installed,  and  when 
practicable  shall  be  installed,  and  when 
practicable  shall  be  connected  to  municipal 
water  supply  and  shall  discharge  to  a  sewer. 

g)  Natural  or  artificial  illumination  shall  be 
provided. 

24.2  Fire  Protection 

24.2.1  In  addition  to  the  provision  of  fire  extinguishers, 
as  specified  in  this  Part  of  the  Code,  other  fire 
extinguishing  equipment  shall  also  be  provided  and 
conveniently  located  within  the  building  under 
construction  or  on  the  building  site,  as  required  by  the 
Authority. 


38 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


24.2.1.1  All  fire  extinguishers  shall  be  maintained  in 
a  serviceable  condition  at  all  times  in  accordance  with 
good  practice  [7(4)]  and  all  necessary  guidelines 
regarding  fire  protection  at  workplaces  followed  in 
accordance  with  good  practice  [7(2)]. 

24.2.1.2  It  shall  be  ensured  that  all  workmen  and 
supervisory  staff  are  fully  conversant  with  the  correct 
operation  and  use  of  fire  extinguishers  provided  at  the 
construction  site. 

24.2.1.3  Telephone  number  of  local  fire  brigade 
should  be  prominently  displayed  near  each  telephone 
provided  at  construction  site. 

24.2.1.4  Watch  and  ward  services  should  be  provided 
at  construction  sites  during  holidays  and  nights. 

24.2.2  Access  shall  be  provided  and  maintained  at  all 
times  to  all  fire  fighting  equipment,  including  fire  hose, 
extinguishers,  sprinkler  valves  and  hydrants. 

24.2.2.1  Approach  roads  for  fire  fighting  should  be 
planned,  properly  maintained  and  kept  free  from 
blockage.  Width  of  approach  road  should  be  not  less 
than  5  m  to  facilitate  fire  fighting  operations. 

24.2.2.2  Emergency  plan  and  fire  order  specifying  the 
individual  responsibility  in  the  event  of  fire  should  be 
formulated  and  mock  drills  should  be  practised 
periodically  in  case  of  large  and  important  construction 
sites  to  ensure  upkeep  and  efficiency  of  fire  fighting 
appliances. 

24.2.2.3  Periodical  inspection  should  be  carried  out 
to  identify  any  hazard  and  proper  records  maintained 
and  follow  up  action  taken. 

24.2.2.4  Evaluation  facilities  and  fire  exits  should  be 
provided  at  all  locations  susceptible  to  fire  hazards. 

24.2.3  Where  the  building  plans  require  the  installation 
of  fixed  fire  fighting  equipment,  such  as  hydrants,  stand 
pipes,  sprinklers  and  underground  water  mains  or  other 
suitable  arrangements  for  provision  of  water  shall  be 
installed,  completed  and  made  available  for  permanent 
use  as  soon  as  possible,  but  in  any  case  not  later  than 
the  stage  at  which  the  hydrants,  etc,  are  required  for 
use  as  specified  in  24.2.3.1  to  24.2.3.4. 

24.2.3.1  A  stand  pipe  system  (landing  valves), 
permanent  in  nature  shall  be  installed  and  made 
available  before  the  building  has  reached  the  height 
of  15  m  above  the  grade,  and  carried  up  with  each 
floor. 

24.2.3.2  The  standpipe  (landing  valve/internal  fire 
hydrant)  and  its  installation  shall  conform  to  the 
accepted  standards  [7(26)]. 

24.2.3.3  The  standpipe  shall  be  carried  up  with  each 
floor  and  securely  capped  at  the  top.  Top  hose  outlets. 


should  at  all  times,  be  not  more  than  one  floor  below 
the  floor  under  construction. 

24.2.3.4  A  substantial  box,  preferably  of  metal,  should 
be  provided  and  maintained  near  each  hose  outlet.  The 
box  should  contain  adequate  lengths  of  hose  to  reach 
all  parts  of  the  floor  as  well  as  a  short  branch  fitted 
with  12  mm  or  20  mm  nozzle. 

24.2.4  Close  liaison  shall  be  maintained  with  the  local 
fire  brigade,  during  construction  of  all  buildings 
above  15  m  in  height  and  special  occupancies,  like 
educational,  assembly,  institutional,  industrial,  storage, 
hazardous  and  mixed  occupancies  with  any  of  the 
aforesaid  occupancies  having  area  more  than  500  m^ 
on  each  floor. 

24.2.5  It  is  desirable  that  telephone  system  or  other 
means  of  inter-communication  system  be  provided 
during  the  construction  of  all  buildings  over  15  m  in 
height  or  buildings  having  a  plinth  area  in  excess 
of  1  000  m-. 

24.2.6  All  work  waste,  such  as  scrap  timber,  wood 
shavings,  sawdust,  paper,  packing  materials  and  oily 
waste  shall  be  collected  and  disposed  of  safely  at  the 
end  of  each  day's  work.  Particular  care  shall  be  taken 
to  remove  all  waste  accumulation  in  or  near  vertical 
shaft  openings  like  stairways,  lift-shaft,  etc. 

24.2.7  An  independent  water  storage  facility  shall  be 
provided  before  the  commencement  of  construction 
operations  for  fire-fighting  purposes.  It  shall  be 
maintained  and  be  available  for  use  at  all  times. 

24.2.8  Fire  Cut-offs 

Fire  walls  and  exit  stairways  required  for  a  building 
should  be  given  construction  priority.  Where  fire  doors, 
with  or  without  automatic  closing  devices,  are 
stipulated  in  the  building  plans  they  should  be  hung  as 
soon  as  practicable  and  before  any  significant  quantity 
of  combustible  material  is  introduced  in  the  building. 

24.2.8.1  As  the  work  progresses,  the  provision  of 
permanent  stairways,  stairway  enclosures,  fire  walls 
and  other  features  of  the  completed  structure  which 
will  prevent  the  horizontal  and  vertical  spread  of  fire 
should  be  ensured. 

24.3  Clothing 

24.3.1  It  shall  be  ensured  that  the  clothes  worn  by  the 
workmen  be  not  of  such  nature  as  to  increase  the 
chances  of  their  getting  involved  in  accident  to 
themselves  or  to  others.  As  a  rule,  wearing  of 
CHADDARS  or  loose  garments  shall  be  prohibited. 

24.3.2  Workmen  engaged  in  processes  which  splash 
liquid  or  other  materials  which  will  injure  the  skin  shall 
have  enough  protective  clothing  to  cover  the  body. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


39 


24.3.3  Individuals  engaged  in  work  involving  use  of 
naked  flames  (such  as  welding)  shall  not  wear  synthetic 
fibre  or  similar  clothing  which  increases  the  risk  of 
fire  hazards. 

24.4  Safety  Measures  Against  Fall  Prevention 

Persons  working  at  heights  may  use  safety  belts  and 
harnesses.  Provision  of  cat-walks,  wire  mesh,  railings 
reduces  chances  of  fall-ladder  and  scaffoldings, 
stagings  etc,  should  be  anchored  on  firm  footing  and 
should  be  secured  and  railing  should  be  provided  as 
far  as  possible.  All  accesses  should  be  barricaded  to 
prevent  accidental  fall.  For  details  as  fall  prevention 
reference  may  be  made  to  good  practice  [7(27)]. 

24.5  Falling  Materials  Hazard  Prevention 

Preventive  measures  against  falling  materials  hazards 
in  work  places  shall  be  taken  in  accordance  with  good 
practice  [7(28)]. 

24.6  Disposal  of  Debris 

Preventive  measures  against  hazards  relating  to 
disposal  of  debris  shall  be  taken  in  accordance  with 
[7(29)]. 

25  CONSTRUCTION  MACHINERY 

25.1  Specification  and  requirements  of  construction 
machinery  used  in  construction  or  demolition  work 
shall  conform  to  accepted  standards  [7(30)]. 

25.2  For  safety  requirements  for  working  with 
construction  machinery,  reference  may  be  made  to 
good  practice  [7(31)]. 

25.3  Petroleum  powered  air  compressors,  hoists, 
derricks,  pumps,  etc,  shall  be  so  located  that  the 
exhausts  are  well  away  from  combustible  materials. 
Where  the  exhausts  are  pipes  to  outside  the  building 
under  construction,  a  clearance  of  at  least  150  mm  shall 
be  maintained  between  such  piping  and  combustible 
material. 

SECTION  4  MAINTENANCE 

MANAGEMENT,  REPAIRS,  RETROFITTING 

AND  STRENGTHENING  OF  BUILDINGS 

26  MAINTENANCE  MANAGEMENT 

26.1  Maintenance  management  of  building  is  the  art 
of  preserving  over  a  long  period  what  has  been 
constructed.  Whereas  construction  stage  lasts  for  a 
short  period,  maintenance  continues  for  comparatively 
very  large  period  during  the  useful  life  of  building. 
Inadequate  or  improper  maintenance  adversely  affects 
the  environment  in  which  people  work,  thus  affecting 
the  overall  output.  In  the  post  construction  stage  the 
day  to  day  maintenance  or  upkeep  of  the  building  shall 


certainly  delay  the  decay  of  the  building  structure. 
Though  the  building  may  be  designed  to  be  very 
durable  it  needs  maintenance  to  keep  it  in  good 
condition. 

26.2  Terminology 

For  the  purpose  of  this  Section,  the  following 
definitions  shall  apply. 

26.2.1  Maintenance  —  The  combination  of  all 
technical  and  associated  administrative  actions 
intended  to  retain  an  item  in  or  restore  it  to  a  state  in 
which  it  can  perform  its  required  function. 

26.2.2  Maintenance  Management  —  The  organization 
of  maintenance  within  an  agreed  policy.  Maintenance 
can  be  seen  as  a  form  of  'steady  state'  activity. 

26.2.3  Building  Fabric  —  Elements  and  components 
of  a  building  other  than  furniture  and  services. 

26.2.4  Building  Maintenance  —  Work  undertaken  to 
maintain  or  restore  the  performance  of  the  building 
fabric  and  its  services  to  provide  an  efficient  and 
acceptable  operating  environment  to  its  users. 

26.2.5  House  Keeping  —  The  routine  recurring  work 
which  is  required  to  keep  a  structure  in  good  condition 
so  that  it  can  be  utilized  at  its  original  capacity  and 
efficiency  along  with  proper  protection  of  capital 
investment,  throughout  its  economic  life. 

26.2.6  Owner  —  Person  or  body  having  a  legal  interest 
in  a  building.  This  includes  freeholders,  leaseholders 
or  those  holding  a  sub-lease  which  both  bestows  a  legal 
right  to  occupation  and  gives  rise  to  liabilities  in  respect 
of  safety  or  building  condition. 

In  case  of  lease  or  sub-lease  holders,  as  far  as  ownership 
with  respect  to  the  structure  is  concerned,  the  structure 
of  a  flat  or  structure  on  a  plot  belongs  to  the  allottee/ 
lessee  till  the  allotment/lease  subsists. 

26.2.7  Confined  Space  —  Space  which  may  be 
inadequately  ventilated  for  any  reason  and  may  result 
in  a  deficiency  of  oxygen,  or  a  build-up  of  toxic  gases, 
e.g.  closed  tanks,  sewers,  ducts,  closed  and  unventilated 
rooms,  and  open  topped  tanks  particularly  where 
heavier  than  air  gases  or  vapours  may  be  present. 

26.3  Building  Maintenance 

26.3.1  General 

Any  building  (including  its  services)  when  built  has 
certain  objectives  and  during  its  total  economic  life,  it 
has  to  be  maintained.  Maintenance  is  a  continuous 
process  requiring  a  close  watch  and  taking  immediate 
remedial  action.  It  is  interwoven  with  good  quality  of 
house  keeping.  It  is  largely  governed  by  the  quality  of 
original  construction.  The  owners,  engineers. 


40 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


constructors,  occupants  and  the  maintenance  agency 
are  all  deeply  involved  in  this  process  and  share  a 
responsibility.  Situation  in  which  all  these  agencies 
merge  into  one  is  ideal  and  most  satisfactory. 

There  are  two  processes  envisaged,  that  is,  the  work 
carried  out  in  anticipation  of  failure  and  the  work 
carried  out  after  failure.  The  former  is  usually  referred 
to  as  preventive  maintenance  and  the  latter  as  corrective 
maintenance.  The  prime  objective  of  maintenance  is 
to  maintain  the  performance  of  the  building  fabric  and 
its  services  to  provide  an  efficient  and  acceptable 
operating  environment  to  its  users. 

26.3.1.1  Maintenance  in  general  term  can  be  identified 
in  the  following  broad  categories. 

a)  Cleaning  and  servicing  —  This  is  largely  of 
preventive  type,  such  as  checking  the  efficacy 
of  rain  water  gutters  and  servicing  the 
mechanical  and  electrical  installations.  This 
covers  the  house  keeping  also. 

b)  Rectification  and  repairs  —  This  is  also  called 
periodical  maintenance  work  undertaken  by, 
say,  annual  contracts  and  including  external 
replastering,  internal  finishing  etc. 

c)  Replacements  —  This  covers  major  repair  or 
restoration  such  as  re-roofing  or  re-building 
defective  building  parts. 

26.3.2  Factors  Affecting  Maintenance 

26.3.2.1  Maintenance  of  the  buildings  is  influenced 
by  the  following  factors: 

a)  Technical  factors  —  These  include  age 
of  building,  nature  of  design,  material 
specifications,  past  standard  of  maintenance 
and  cost  of  postponing  maintenance. 

b)  Policy  —  A  maintenance  policy  ensures  that 
value  for  money  expended  is  obtained  in 
addition  to  protecting  both  the  asset  value  and 
the  resource  value  of  the  buildings  concerned 
and  owners. 

c)  Financial  and  economics  factors  —  {see 
26.9). 

d)  Environmental  —  All  buildings  are  subject  to 
the  effects  of  a  variety  of  external  factors  such 
as  air,  wind  precipitation,  temperature  etc. 
which  influence  the  frequency  and  scope  of 
maintenance. 

The  fabric  of  building  can  be  adversely 
affected  as  much  by  the  internal  environment 
as  by  the  elements  externally.  Similar  factors 
of  humidity,  temperature  and  pollution  should 
be  considered.  Industrial  buildings  can  be 
subject  to  many  different  factors  subject  to 
processes  carried  out  within.  Swimming  pool 


structures  are  vulnerable  to  the  effects  of 
chlorine  used  in  water. 
e)  User  —  The  maintenance  requirements  of 
buildings  and  their  various  parts  are  directly 
related  to  the  type  and  intensity  of  use  they 
receive. 

26.3.2.2  Influence  of  design 

The  physical  characteristics,  the  life  span  and  the 
aesthetic  qualities  of  any  building  depend  on  the 
considerations  given  at  the  design  stage.  All  buildings, 
however  well  designed  and  conscientiously  built,  will 
require  repair  and  renewal  as  they  get  older. 

However,  for  better  performance  of  the  building 
envelop,  the  following  are  the  ways  to  minimize 
troubles  at  the  later  stage. 

a)  Minimize  defects  during  construction  and 
design. 

b)  Detail  and  choose  materials  during  construction 
so  that  the  job  of  maintenance  is  less  onerous. 

26.3.2.2.1  In  addition  to  designing  a  building  for 
structural  adequacy,  consideration  should  also  be  given 
to  environmental  factors  such  as  moisture,  natural 
weathering,  corrosion  and  chemical  action,  user  wear 
and  tear,  pollution,  flooding,  subsidence,  earthquake, 
cyclones  etc. 

26.3.2.2.2  A  list  of  common  causes  for  maintenance 
problems  is  given  in  Annex  C  for  guidance.  However, 
no  such  list  is  likely  to  be  entirely  comprehensive. 

26.3.3  Maintenance  Policy 

The  policy  should  cover  such  items  as  the  owner's 
anticipated  future  requirement  for  the  building  taking 
account  of  the  building's  physical  performance  and 
its  functional  suitability.  This  may  lead  to  decisions 
regarding: 

a)  the  present  use  of  the  building  anticipating 
any  likely  upgradings  and  their  effect  on 
the  life  cycles  of  existing  components  or 
engineering  services;  and 

b)  a  change  of  use  for  the  building  and  the  effect 
of  any  conversion  work  on  the  life  cycles  of 
existing  components  or  engineering  services. 

26.3.4  Maintenance  Work  Programmes 

The  programming  of  maintenance  work  can  affect  an 
owner  or  his  activities  in  the  following  ways: 

a)  maintenance  work  should  be  carried  out  at 
such  times  as  are  likely  to  minimize  any 
adverse  effect  on  output  or  function. 

b)  programme  should  be  planned  to  obviate  as 
far  as  possible  any  abortive  work. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


41 


This  may  arise  if  upgrading  or  conversion 
work  is  carried  out  after  maintenance  work 
has  been  completed  or  if  work  such  as 
rewiring  is  carried  out  after  redecorations. 

c)  any  delay  in  rectifying  a  defect  should  be  kept 
to  a  minimum  only  if  such  delay  is  likely  to 
affect  output  or  function.  The  cost  of 
maintenance  increases  with  shortening 
response  times. 

d)  maintenance  work,  completed  or  being 
carried  out  should  comply  with  all  statutory 
and  other  legal  requirements. 

26.3.5  Maintenance  Guides 

An  owner  responsible  for  a  large  number  of  buildings 
may  have  established  procedures  for  maintenance. 
When  an  owner  is  responsible  for  the  maintenance  of 
only  one  building  or  a  small  number  of  buildings,  the 
preparation  of  a  guide  tailored  to  suit  each  particular 
building,  can  offer  significant  advantages.  Such  a  guide 
should  take  into  account  the  following: 

a)  type  of  construction  and  residual  life  of  the 
building,  and 

b)  environment  and  intensity  of  use  (see  26.3.2). 

The  guide  may  form  part  of  a  wider  manual  covering 
operational  matters. 

26.3.6  Planning  of  Maintenance  Work 

Work  should  take  account  of  the  likely  maintenance 
cycle  of  each  building  element  and  be  planned 
logically,  with  inspections  being  made  at  regular 
intervals.  Annual  plans  should  take  into  account 
subsequent  years'  programmes  to  incorporate  items 
and  to  prevent  additional  costs.  It  should  be  stressed 
that  the  design  of  some  buildings  can  lead  to  high 
indirect  costs  in  maintenance  contracts  and  therefore, 
careful  planning  can  bring  financial  benefits.  Decisions 
to  repair  or  replace  should  be  taken  after  due 
consideration. 

26.3.7  Feed  Back 

26.3.7.1  Feed  back  is  normally  regarded  as  an 
important  procedure  of  providing  information  about 
the  behaviour  of  materials  and  detailing  for  the  benefit 
of  the  architect/engineer  designing  new  buildings, 
which  will  result  in  lessening  maintenance  costs.  It  is 
an  equally  valuable  source  of  information  for 
the  persons  responsible  for  maintenance.  Every 
maintenance  organization  should  develop  a  sample 
way  of  communicating  its  know  how,  firstly  for  benefit 
of  others  in  the  organization  and  secondly  for  the 
benefit  of  the  building  industry  as  a  whole.  There 
should  be  frank  and  recorded  dialogue  on  an  on-going 
basis  between  those  who  occupy  and  care  for  buildings 
and  those  who  design  and  construct  them. 


26.3.7.2  Feed  back  should  aim  at  the  following: 

a)  User  satisfaction, 

b)  Continuous  improvement,  and 

c)  Participation  by  all. 

26.3.7.3  Source  of  information 

The  information  on  feed  back  can  be  obtained  from 
the  following: 

a)  Occupants, 

b)  Inspections, 

c)  Records,  and 

d)  Discussions. 

26.3.8  Means  of  Effecting  Maintenance 

26.3.8.1  Responsibility 

Some  maintenance  work  will  be  carried  out  by 
the  occupier  of  a  building  or  by  the  occupier's 
representative.  In  the  case  of  leasehold  or  similar 
occupation  not  all  maintenance  may  be  the 
responsibility  of  occupier.  Responsibility  of  common 
areas  may  be  clearly  defined. 

26.3.8.2  Maintenance  work  sub-divided  into  major 
repair,  restoration,  periodical  and  routine  or  day-to-day 
operations  will  be  undertaken  by  one  of  the  following: 

a)  Directly  employed  labour, 

b)  Contractors,  and 

c)  Specialist  contractors  under  service  agreement 
or  otherwise. 

26.3.8.3  The  merits  of  each  category  for  typical 
maintenance  work  must  be  considered  because 
optimum  use  of  resources  appropriate  to  tasks  in  a 
given  situation  is  an  important  element  of  policy. 

26.3.8.4  The  success  of  contracting  out  depends  on 
the  nature  of  the  services,  conditions  in  which 
contracting  is  undertaken  (the  tendering  process),  how 
the  contract  is  formulated  and  subsequent  monitoring 
of  service  quality.  The  important  consideration  in  the 
decision  to  contract  out  is  whether  a  contractor  can 
ensure  a  socially  desirable  quantity  and  quality  of 
service  provision  at  a  reasonable  cost  to  the 
consumers. 

26.4  Access 

26.4.1  General 

All  maintenance  activities  including  any  preliminary 
survey  and  inspection  work  require  safe  access  and  in 
some  situations  this  will  have  to  be  specially  designed. 
Maintenance  policy,  and  maintenance  costs,  will  be 
much  influenced  by  ready  or  difficult  access  to  the 
fabric  and  to  building  services.  Special  precautions  and 
access  provisions  may  also  need  to  be  taken  for  roof 


42 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


work  or  for  entry  into  confined  spaces  such  as  ducts  or 
voids. 

26.4.2  Access  Facilities 

26.4.2.1  Permanent  accessibility  measures  should  be 
provided  at  the  design  stage  only  for  all  the  areas  for 
safe  and  proper  maintenance.  It  is  a  matter  on  which 
those  experienced  in  the  case  of  the  building  can  make 
an  important  contribution  at  design  stage  in  the  interest 
of  acceptable  maintenance  costs. 

26.4.2.2  A  wide  variety  of  temporary  access  equipment 
may  appropriately  be  provided  for  maintenance  work, 
ranging  from  ladders  to  scaffoldings  or  powered  lift 
platforms. 

26.4.2.3  Wherever  possible  it  is  better  to  provide 
permanent  access  facilities  such  as  fixed  barriers, 
ladders,  and  stairways.  When  such  permanent  access 
facilities  are  provided  necessary  arrangement  may  be 
included  in  maintenance  plans  for  their  regular 
inspection,  maintenance  and  testing. 

26.4.2.4  All  personnel  employed  for  carrying  out 
maintenance  should  be  provided  with  the  necessary 
protective  clothing  and  equipment  and  instructed  in 
its  use. 

26.4.2.5  When  physical  access  is  not  possible  in 
situations  such  as  wall  cavities,  drains  etc,  inspections 
may  be  made  with  the  aid  of  closed  circuit  television 
or  optical  devices  such  as  endoscopes. 

26.4.3  Access  to  Confined  Spaces 

26.4.3.1  Ventilation 

Special  precautions  need  to  be  taken  when  entering  a 
confined  space.  Such  confined  spaces  should  be 
adequately  ventilated,  particularly  before  being 
entered,  to  ensure  that  they  are  free  from  harmful 
concentrations  of  gases,  vapours  other  airborne 
substances  and  that  the  air  is  not  deficient  in  oxygen. 

26.4.3.2  Lighting 

Good  lighting  is  necessary  in  order  that  maintenance 
work  can  be  carried  out  satisfactorily.  This  is 
particularly  important  in  confined  spaces.  When 
the  normal  lighting  is  inadequate  it  should  be 
supplemented  by  temporary  installations.  These 
should  provide  general  and  spot  illumination  as 
appropriate. 

26.5  Records 

26.5.1  General 

Good  records  can  save  owners  and  users/occupiers 
much  unnecessary  expense  and  reduce  potential 
hazards  in  exploration  work  when  faults  arise. 


26.5.2  Use  of  Building  Records 

26.5.2.1  All  personnel  involved  in  the  maintenance 
of  the  building  should  be  made  aware  of  the  existence 
of  the  building  records. 

26.5.2.2  Known  hazardous  areas  should  be  explicitly 
marked  on  the  records  as  well  as  being  marked  on 
site  and  should  be  pointed  out  to  such  personnel 
together  with  any  system  of  work  adopted  for  use  in 
such  areas. 

26.5.2.3  Records  are  of  value  only  if  they  are  kept  up 
to  date  and  arrangements  for  this  should  be  included 
in  any  provision  that  may  be  made  for  records. 

26.5.2.4  Records  should  be  readily  accessible  for  use 
and  the  place  of  storage  should  take  into  account  the 
form  of  the  records  and  the  conditions  needed  to  keep 
them  from  damage  of  any  kind.  It  is  recommended 
that  a  duplicate  set  of  records  is  kept  in  a  secure  place 
other  than  building  itself  and  is  kept  up  to  date. 

26.5.3  Following  should  be  typical  contents  of  the 
maintenance  records; 

a)  A  brief  history  of  property,  names  and 
addresses  of  consultants  and  contractors. 

b)  Short  specifications,  constructional  processes, 
components,  material  finishes,  hidden 
features,  special  features  etc. 

c)  "As  built"  plans  and  as  subsequently  altered 
with  sections,  elevations  and  other  detailed 
drawings. 

d)  Foundation  and  structural  plans/sections  such 
as  concrete  reinforcement  drawings. 

e)  Detail  specification  of  all  materials  incorporated, 
for  example,  concrete  mix,  species  and  grades 
of  timber  etc.  Potentially  hazardous  materials 
and  types  or  methods  of  construction  that 
under  some  circumstances  may  become 
hazardous  may  be  identified. 

f)  Information  on  house  keeping  and  routine 
maintenance  with  details  of  internal  and 
external  surfaces  and  decorations,  schedule 
of  cleaning,  inspection  and  maintenance. 

g)  Means  of  operating  mechanical,  electrical  and 
plumbing  installations. 

h)  Description  of  renovations,  extensions, 
adaptations  and  repair  to  each  elements. 

j)  All  plant,  machinery  and  propriety  articles 
including  manufacturers  trade  literature 
and  instructions  for  installation,  use  and 
maintenance. 

k)  Methods  of  work  used  in  construction  such 
as  assembly  of  prefabricated  units. 

m)    All  information  related  to  fire  such  as: 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


43 


1 )  Location  and  service  arrangements  of  all 
fire  alarm  and  call  points; 

2)  Location  and  service  arrangements  of  all 
extinguishers,  hose  reels  and  other  fire 
fighting  installations; 

3)  Location  of  all  fire  compartment  walls, 
doors,  floors  and  screens; 

4)  Location  of  all  areas  of  exceptional  fire 
hazard; 

5)  Fire  escape  routes; 

6)  Details  of  application  of  any  fire  protection 
treatment;  and 

7)  Location  details  and  description  of  any 
installation  for  smoke  control  or  protection 
of  escape  routes. 

n)  There  should  be  a  wall  chart  showing  at  a 
glance  the  various  operations  which  have  to 
be  undertaken.  Line  drawings  of  buildings  are 
always  useful. 

p)  Records  of  security  measures  should  be 
known  to  authorized  personnel  only. 

q)  Where  no  records  exist,  information  should 
be  slowly  built  up  as  it  becomes  available 
during  the  course  of  maintenance  work. 

r)  Use  of  computers  for  storing  information  may 
be  preferred. 

26.5.4  Mechanical  Records 

26.5.4.1  Documentation 

Documentation  should  record  the  following  as 
installed: 

a)  the  location,  including  level  if  buried,  of  all 
public  service  connections  (for  example,  fuel 
gas  and  cold  water  supplies)  together  with  the 
points  of  origin  and  termination,  size  and 
materials  of  pipes,  line  pressure  and  other 
relevant  information; 

b)  the  layout,  location  and  extent  of  all  piped 
services  showing  pipe  sizes,  together  with  all 
valves  for  regulation,  isolation  and  other 
purposes  as  well  as  the  results  of  all  balancing, 
testing  and  commissioning  data; 

c)  the  location,  identity,  size  and  details  of  all 
apparatus  and  all  control  equipment  served 
by,  or  associated  with,  each  of  the  various 
services  together  with  copies  of  any  test 
certificates  for  such  apparatus  where 
appropriate.  The  information  with  respect  to 
size  and  details  may  be  presented  in  schedule 
form; 

d)  the  layout,  location  and  extent  of  all  air  ducts 
showing  dampers  and  other  equipment, 
acoustic  silencers,  grilles,  diffusers  or  other 


terminal  components.  Each  duct  and  each 
terminal  component  should  be  marked  with 
its  size,  the  air  quantity  flowing  and  other 
relevant  balancing  data;  and 
e)  the  location  and  identity  of  each  room  or  space 
housing  plant,  machinery  or  apparatus. 

26.5.4.2  Drawings 

Drawings  should  record  the  following  as  installed: 

a)  detailed  general  arrangements  of  boiler 
houses,  machinery  spaces,  air  handling  plants, 
tank  rooms  and  other  plant  or  apparatus, 
including  the  location,  identity,  size  and  rating 
of  each  apparatus.  The  information  with 
respect  to  the  size  and  rating  can  be  presented 
in  schedule  form; 

b)  isometric  or  diagrammatic  views  of  boiler 
houses,  plant  rooms,  tank  rooms  and  similar 
machinery,  including  valve  identification 
charts.  It  is  useful  to  frame  and  mount  a 
copy  of  such  drawings  on  the  wall  of  the 
appropriate  room;  and 

c)  comprehensive  diagrams  that  show  power 
wiring  and  control  wiring  and/or  pneumatic 
or  other  control  piping  including  size,  type 
or  conductor  or  piping  used  and  identifying 
the  terminal  points  of  each. 

26.5.5  Electrical  Records 

Documentation  should  record  the  following  including 
locations,  as  installed: 

a)  main  and  submain  cables,  showing  origin, 
route,  termination,  size  and  type  of  each  cable; 
cables  providing  supplies  to  specialist 
equipment,  for  example,  computers,  should 
be  identified  separately;  and 

b)  lighting  conduits  and  final  subcircuit  cables, 
showing  origin,  route,  termination  and  size 
of  each,  together  with  the  number  and  size  of 
cables  within  each  conduit.  The  drawings 
should  indicate  for  each  conduit  or  cable, 
whether  it  is  run  on  the  surface  or  concealed, 
for  example,  in  a  wall  chase,  in  a  floor  screed, 
cast  in-situ,  above  a  false  ceiling  etc. 

These  drawings  should  also  indicate  the  locations  of 
lighting  fittings,  distribution  boards,  switches,  draw- 
in-boxes  and  point  boxes,  and  should  indicate  circuitry: 

a)  location  and  purpose  of  each  emergency 
lighting  fitting  including  an  indication  of  the 
circuit  to  which  it  is  connected; 

b)  single  and  three  phase  power  conduits  and 
final  subcircuit  cables  showing  locations  of 
power  distribution  boards,  motors,  isolators. 


44 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


starters,  remote  control  units,  socket  outlets 
and  other  associated  equipment; 

c)  other  miscellaneous  equipment,  conduits  and 
cables; 

d)  lightening  conductor,  air  terminals,  conductors, 
earth  electrodes  and  test  clamps; 

e)  location  of  earth  tapes,  earth  electrodes  and 
test  points  other  than  those  in  (f);  and 

f)  cables  providing  earth  circuits  for  specialist 
equipment,  for  example  computers,  should  be 
identified  separately. 

Documentation  should  also  include,  when  applicable. 

a)  distribution  diagrams  or  schedules  to  show 
size,  type  and  length  (to  within  1  m)  of  each 
main  and  submain  cable,  together  with  the 
measured  earth  continuity  resistance  of  each; 

b)  schedule  of  lighting  fittings  installed  stating 
location,  manufacturer  and  type  or  catalogue 
number  together  with  the  type  or 
manufacturer's  reference,  voltage  and  wattage 
of  the  lamp  installed; 

c)  schedule  of  escape  and  emergency  lighting 
fittings  installed  stating  location, 
manufacturer,  type  or  catalogue  number 
together  with  the  type  or  manufacturer's 
reference,  voltage  and  wattage  of  the  lamp 
installed.  For  battery  systems  the  position  of 
the  battery,  its  ampere  hour  rating  and  battery 
system  rated  endurance  in  hours  should  be 
stated; 

d)  records  of  smoke  detectors,  sprinklers,  fire 
precautions; 

e)  incoming  supply  details;  the  type  of  system, 
voltage,  phases,  frequency,  rated  current  and 
short  circuit  level,  with  the  details  of  the 
supply  protection  and  time  of  operation  as 
appropriate; 

g)  main  switchgear  details;  for  purpose  made 
equipment  this  should  include  a  set  of 
manufacturers'  drawings  and  the  site  layout; 

h)  transformer,  capacitor  and  power  plant 
details;  the  leading  details  should  be  given, 
for  example,  for  transformers  the  V.A  rating, 
voltages  and  type  of  cooling;  and 

j)  Completion  certificate,  according  to  the 
Indian  Electricity  Act. 

26.6  Inspections 

26.6.1  General 

Regular  inspections  are  actual  part  of  the  procedures 
for  the  maintenance  of  buildings.  They  are  needed  for 
a  variety  of  purposes  and  each  purpose  requires  a 


different  approach  if  it  is  to  be  handled  with  maximum 
economy  and  efficiency.  A  more  detailed  inspection 
covering  all  parts  of  a  building  is  needed  to  determine 
what  work  should  be  included  in  cyclic  and  planned 
maintenance  programme. 

26.6.2  Frequency  of  Inspection 

Inspection  should  be  carried  out  at  the  following 
frequencies: 

a)  Routine  —  Continuous  regular  observations 
should  be  undertaken  by  the  building  user  as 
part  of  the  occupancy  of  building.  Feed  back 
resulting  from  this  type  of  observation  should 
be  encouraged. 

b)  General  —  Visual  inspections  of  main 
elements  should  be  made  annually  under  the 
supervision  of  suitably  qualified  personnel  at 
appropriate  times. 

c)  Detailed  —  The  frequency  of  full  inspection 
of  the  building  fabric  by  suitably  qualified 
personnel  should  not  normally  exceed  a  5  year 
period. 

26.6.2.1  Inspection  schedule 

The  preparation  of  a  specific  schedule  should  be 
encouraged.  Once  prepared,  it  can  be  used  for 
subsequent  inspections. 

26.6.3  Inspection  of  Engineering  Services 

Engineering  services  generally  have  a  shorter  life 
expectancy  than  building  fabric  and  because  of  their 
dynamic  function  should  be  subjected  to  more  frequent 
inspections  and  maintenance. 

26.6.3.1  Inspection  of  services  should  be  carried  out 
for  three  purposes  as  follows: 

a)  to  check  if  maintenance  work  is  required, 

b)  to  check  if  maintenance  work  is  being 
adequately  carried  out,  and 

c)  for  safety  reasons  to  comply  with 
statutory  requirements  and  if  required, 
with  recommendations  of  other  relevant 
organizations. 

26.6.3.2  The  frequency  of  inspections  for  purpose 
(a)  will  depend  upon  types  of  plant  and  system 
manufacturer's  recommendations  and  subjective 
judgement.  Frequencies  for  purpose  (b)  should  be 
carried  out  on  an  annual  basis. 

26.6.3.3  Method  of  inspection 

The  limited  life  of  building  services  means  it  is 
important  to  record  their  residual  life  so  that  their 
replacement  can  be  budgeted  for,  and  inspection 
methods  should  be  arranged  accordingly. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


45 


A  check  list  of  items  of  plant  to  be  inspected  siiould  be 
considered.  Detailed  specifications  of  how  inspections 
should  be  carried  out  are  necessary  because  a  simple 
visual  inspection  is  unlikely  to  show  whether  plant  is 
operating  correctly  and  efficiently. 

Inspections  frequently  necessitate  the  use  of 
appropriate  instruments  by  competent  persons.  An 
example  of  this  is  the  inspections  carried  out  to  check 
compliance  with  statutory  requirements. 

When  instruments  are  used  it  is  important  that  adequate 
training  is  provided  in  the  use  of  the  instruments  and 
the  interpretation  of  the  results. 

26.6.4  Records  of  all  inspections  should  be  kept. 

26.6.5  Inspection  Report 

Inspection  report  may  be  prepared  in  the  format  as 
given  in  Annex  D. 

26.7  Maintenance  of  Electrical  Appliances 

26.7.1  Planning  of  Maintenance  Work 

26.7.1.1  If  the  authorized  person  has  complete 
knowledge  of  the  electrical  appliances  to  be  worked 
upon,  then  safety  will  be  more  assured.  If  the  person 
attending  to  the  job  is  not  technically  competent  to 
handle  the  job  then  more  careful  planning  is  required 
before  hand. 

26.7.1.2  Repetitive  nature  of  jobs  involve  little  or  no 
pre-planning  whereas  infrequent  nature  of  jobs  may 
need  careful  planning  even  if  the  person  attending  the 
job  is  technically  competent. 

26.7.1.3  Planned  routine  maintenance  will  facilitate 
continued  safe  and  acceptable  operation  of  an  electrical 
system  with  a  minimum  risk  of  breakdown  and 
consequent  interruption  of  supply. 

26.7.1.4  As  far  as  the  electrical  equipments/ 
installations  are  concerned,  it  is  not  possible  to  laydown 
precise  recommendations  for  the  interval  between  the 
maintenance  required.  The  recommendation  for 
frequency  of  maintenance  in  this  regard  from  the 
manufacturer  is  more  relevant.  The  manufacturer 
should  be  requested  to  specify  minimum  maintenance 
frequency  under  specified  conditions.  These  intervals 
depend  greatly  upon  the  design  of  the  equipment,  the 
duty  that  it  is  called  on  to  perform  and  the  environment 
in  which  it  is  situated. 

26.7.2  Following  two  types  of  maintenance  are 
envisaged. 

26.7.2.1  Routine  maintenance 

Routine  maintenance  of  the  electrical  equipments  goes 
alongwith  the  regular  inspections  of  the  equipments. 
Inspections  shall  reveal  the  undue  damage  and  excessive 


wear  to  the  various  components.  Examination  of  the 
equipment  shall  reveal  any  need  for  conditioning  of 
the  contact  system,  lubrication  and  adjustment  of  the 
mechanisms. 

26.7.2.2  Post  fault  maintenance 

When  there  is  a  breakdown  in  the  system  and  certain 
parts  are  identified  for  the  replacement  and  then  the 
maintenance/repair  of  the  defective  part  away  from  the 
operating  environment  is  covered  under  post  fault 
maintenance. 

26.7.3  Guidelines  for  the  Maintenance  of  Electrical 
Appliances 

26.7.3.1  Uninterrupted  and  hazard  free  functioning  of 
the  electrical  installations  are  the  basic  parameters  of 
maintenance.  The  equipment  should  be  restored  to 
correct  working  conditions.  Special  attention  should 
be  paid  to  the  items  and  settings  that  might  have  been 
disturbed  during  the  operational  phase.  Loose  and 
extraneous  equipment  or  wiring  give  rise  to  potential 
safety  hazards.  All  covers  and  locking  arrangements 
should  be  properly  checked  and  secured  to  achieve 
original  degree  of  protection. 

26.7.3.2  Guidelines  to  be  followed  for  the  maintenance 
of  electrical  equipments  to  ensure  their  smooth 
functioning  are  given  in  Annex  E. 

26.8  Operating  and  Maintenance  Manuals 

The  engineering  services  within  buildings  frequently 
are  dynamic,  involving  complex  systems  of  integrated 
plant  items.  Operation  of  such  plant  can  require  detailed 
knowledge  and  direction.  Maintenance  can  also  require 
extensive  information  to  be  available.  It  is,  therefore, 
important  to  have  suitable  operating  and  maintenance 
manuals  to  provide  the  necessary  guidance.  These 
should  be  included  as  part  of  the  contractual 
requirements  for  new  installations  and  should  ideally 
be  prepared  as  reference  documents  for  existing 
installations  where  no  such  information  exists. 

26.9  For  details  on  labour  management  concerning 
building  maintenance,  reference  shall  be  made  to  good 
practice  [7(32)]. 

26.10  For  details  on  financial  management  concerning 
building  maintenance,  reference  shall  be  made  to  good 
practice  [7(33)]. 

27  PREVENTION  OF  CRACKS 

27.1  Cracks  in  buildings  are  of  common  occurrence. 
A  building  component  develops  cracks  whenever  stress 
in  the  component  exceeds  its  strength.  Stress  in  a 
building  component  could  be  caused  by  externally 
applied  forces,  such  as  dead,  imposed,  wind  or  seismic 
loads,  or  foundation  settlement  or  it  could  be  induced 


46 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


internally  due  to  thermal  movements,  moisture 
changes,  chemical  action,  etc. 

27.2  Cracks  could  be  broadly  classified  as  structural 
or  non- structural.  Structural  cracks  are  those  which  are 
due  to  incorrect  design,  faulty  construction  or 
overloading  and  these  may  endanger  the  safety  of  a 
building.  Extensive  cracking  of  an  RCC  beam  is  an 
instance  of  structural  cracking.  Non- structural  cracks 
are  mostly  due  to  internally  induced  stresses  in  building 
materials  and  these  generally  do  not  directly  result  in 
structural  weakening.  In  course  of  time,  however, 
sometime  non-structural  cracks  may,  because  of 
penetration  of  moisture  through  cracks  or  weathering 
action,  result  in  corrosion  of  reinforcement  and  thus 
may  render  the  structure  unsafe.  Vertical  cracks  in  a 
long  compound  wall  due  to  shrinkage  or  thermal 
movement  is  an  instance  of  non-structural  cracking. 
Non-structural  cracks,  normally  do  not  endanger  the 
safety  of  a  building,  but  may  look  unsightly,  or  may 
create  an  impression  of  faulty  work  or  may  give  a 
feeling  of  instability.  In  some  situations,  cracks  may, 
because  of  penetration  of  moisture  through  them,  spoil 
the  internal  finish,  thus  adding  to  cost  of  maintenance. 
It  is,  therefore,  necessary  to  adopt  measures  of 
prevention  or  minimization  of  these  cracks. 

27.3  For  complete  details  on  causes  and  prevention 
of  non- structural  cracks,  reference  shall  be  made  to 
good  practice  SP  25  :  1984  'Handbook  on  causes  and 
prevention  of  cracks  in  buildings'. 

28  REPAIRS  AND  SEISMIC  STRENGTHENING 
OF  BUILDINGS 

28.1  General  Principles  and  Concepts 

28.1.1  Non-Structural/Architectural  Repairs 

28.1.1.1  The  buildings  affected  by  earthquake  may 
suffer  both  non-structural  and  structural  damages.  Non- 
structural repairs  may  cover  the  damages  to  civil  and 
electrical  items  including  the  services  in  the  building. 
Repairs  to  non-structural  components  need  to  be  taken 
up  after  the  structural  repairs  are  carried  out.  Care 
should  be  taken  about  the  connection  details  of 
architectural  components  to  the  main  structural 
components  to  ensure  their  stability. 

28.1.1.2  Non- structural  and  architectural  components 
get  easily  affected/dislocated  during  the  earthquake. 
These  repairs  involve  one  or  more  of  the  following: 

a)  Patching  up  of  defects  such  as  cracks  and  fall 
of  plaster; 

b)  Repairing  doors,  windows,  replacement  of 
glass  panes; 

c)  Checking  and  repairing  electric  conduits/ 
wiring; 


d)  Checking  and  repairing  gas  pipes,  water  pipes 
and  plumbing  services; 

e)  Re-building  non-structural  walls,  smoke 
chimneys,  parapet  walls,  etc; 

f)  Re-plastering  of  walls  as  required; 

g)  Rearranging  disturbed  roofing  tiles; 

h)     Relaying  cracked  flooring  at  ground  level; 

and 
j)      Redecoration  —  white  washing,  painting,  etc. 

The  architectural  repairs  as  stated  above  do  not  restore 
the  original  structural  strength  of  structural  components 
in  the  building  and  any  attempt  to  carry  out  only  repairs 
to  architectural/non-structural  elements  neglecting 
the  required  structural  repairs  may  have  serious 
implications  on  the  safety  of  the  building.  The  damage 
would  be  more  severe  in  the  event  of  the  building  being 
shaken  by  the  similar  shock  because  original  energy 
absorption  capacity  of  the  building  would  have  been 
reduced. 

28.1.2  Structural  Repairs 

28.1.2.1  Prior  to  taking  up  of  the  structural  repairs  and 
strengthening  measures,  it  is  necessary  to  conduct 
detailed  damage  assessment  to  determine: 

a)  the  structural  condition  of  the  building  to 
decide  whether  a  structure  is  amendable  for 
repair;  whether  continued  occupation  is 
permitted;  to  decide  the  structure  as  a  whole 
or  a  part  require  demolition,  if  considered 
dangerous; 

b)  if  the  structure  is  considered  amendable  for 
repair  then  detailed  damage  assessment  of  the 
individual  structural  components  (mapping  of 
the  crack  pattern,  distress  location;  crushed 
concrete,  reinforcement  bending/yielding, 
etc).  Non-destructive  testing  techniques  could 
be  employed  to  determine  the  residual 
strength  of  the  members;  and 

c)  to  work  out  the  details  of  temporary  supporting 
arrangement  of  the  distressed  members  so  that 
they  do  not  undergo  further  distress  due  to 
gravity  loads. 

28.1.2.2  After  the  assessment  of  the  damage  of 
individual  structural  elements,  appropriate  repair 
methods  are  to  be  carried  out  componentwise 
depending  upon  the  extent  of  damage.  The  repair  may 
consist  of  the  following: 

a)  Removal  of  portions  of  cracked  masonry 
walls  and  piers  and  rebuilding  them  in  richer 
mortar.  Use  of  non- shrinking  mortar  will  be 
preferable. 

b)  Addition  of  reinforcing  mesh  on  both  faces 
of  the  cracked  wall,  holding  it  to  the  wall 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


47 


through  spikes  or  bohs  and  then  covering  it, 
suitably,  with  cement  mortar  or  micro- 
concrete. 

c)  Injecting  cement  or  epoxy  Uke  material  which 
is  strong  in  tension,  into  he  cracks  in  walls. 

d)  The  cracked  reinforced  cement  elements  may 
be  repaired  by  epoxy  grouting  and  could  be 
strengthened  by  epoxy  or  polymer  mortar 
application  like  shotcreting,  jecketting,  etc. 

28.1.3  Seismic  Strengthening 

The  main  purpose  of  the  seismic  strengthening  is  to 
upgrade  the  seismic  resistance  of  a  damaged  building 
while  repairing  so  that  it  becomes  safer  under  future 
earthquake  occurrences.  This  work  may  involve  some 
of  the  following  actions: 

a)  Increasing  the  lateral  strength  in  one  or  both 
directions  by  increasing  column  and  wall 
areas  or  the  number  of  walls  and  columns. 

b)  Giving  unity  to  the  structure,  by  providing  a 
proper  connection  between  its  resisting 
elements,  in  such  a  way  that  inertia  forces 
generated  by  the  vibration  of  the  building  can 
be  transmitted  to  the  members  that  have  the 
ability  to  resist  them.  Typical  important 
aspects  are  the  connections  between  roofs  or 
floors  and  walls,  between  intersecting  walls 
and  between  walls  and  foundations. 

c)  Eliminating  features  that  are  sources  of 
weakness  or  that  produce  concentration  of 
stresses  in  some  members.  Asymmetrical  plan 
distribution  of  resisting  members,  abrupt 
changes  of  stiffness  from  one  floor  to  the 
other,  concentration  of  large  masses  and  large 
openings  in  walls  without  a  proper  peripheral 
reinforcement  are  examples  of  defects  of  this 
kind. 

d)  Avoiding  the  possibility  of  brittle  modes 
of  failure  by  proper  reinforcement  and 
connection  of  resisting  members. 

28.1.4  Seismic  Retrofitting 

Many  existing  buildings  do  not  meet  the  seismic 
strength  requirements  of  present  earthquake  codes  due 
to  original  structural  inadequacies  and  material 
degradation  due  to  time  or  alterations  carried  out  during 
use  over  the  years.  Their  earthquake  resistance  can  be 
upgraded  to  the  level  of  the  present  day  codes  by 
appropriate  seismic  retrofitting  techniques,  such  as 
mentioned  in  28.1.3. 

28.1.5  Strengthening  or  Retrofitting  Versus 
Reconstruction 

28.1.5.1  Replacement  of  damaged  buildings  or 
existing  unsafe  buildings  by  reconstruction  is, 


generally,  avoided  due  to  a  number  of  reasons,  the  main 
ones  among  them  being; 

a)  higher  cost  than  that  of  strengthening  or 
retrofitting, 

b)  preservation  of  historical  architecture,  and 

c)  maintaining  functional  social  and  cultural 
environment. 

In  most  instances,  however,  the  relative  cost  of 
retrofitting  to  reconstruction  cost  determines  the 
decision.  As  a  thumb  rule,  if  the  cost  of  repair  and 
seismic  strengthening  is  less  than  about  50  percent  of 
the  reconstruction  cost,  the  retrofitting  is  adopted.  This 
may  also  require  less  working  time  and  much  less 
dislocation  in  the  living  style  of  the  population.  On 
the  other  hand  reconstruction  may  offer  the  possibility 
of  modernization  of  the  habitat  and  may  be  preferred 
by  well-to-do  communities. 

28.1.5.2  Cost- wise  the  building  construction  including 
the  seismic  code  provisions  in  the  first  instance,  works 
out  the  cheaper  in  terms  of  its  own  safety  and  that  of 
the  occupants.  Retrofitting  an  existing  inadequate 
building  may  involve  as  much  as  4  to  5  times  the  initial 
extra  expenditure  required  on  seismic  resisting  features. 
Repair  and  seismic  strengthening  of  a  damaged 
building  may  even  be  5  to  10  times  as  expensive.  It  is, 
therefore,  very  much  safe  as  well  as  cost-effective  to 
construct  earthquake  resistant  buildings  at  the  initial 
stage  itself  according  to  the  relevant  seismic  IS  codes. 

28.2  For  detailed  guidelines  for  repairs  and  seismic 
strengthening  of  buildings,  reference  shall  be  made  to 
good  practice  [7(34)]. 

28.3  For  detailed  guidelines  for  improving  earthquake 
resistance  of  low  strength  masonry  buildings,  reference 
shall  be  made  to  good  practice  [7(35)]. 

28.4  For  detailed  guidelines  for  improving  earthquake 
resistance  of  earthen  buildings,  reference  shall  be  made 
to  good  practice  [7(36)]. 

SECTION  5  SAFETY  IN  DEMOLITION  OF 
BUILDINGS 

29  GENERAL 

29.1  This  Section  lays  down  the  safety  requirements 
for  carrying  out  demolition/dismantling  work. 

29.2  Planning 

Before  beginning  the  actual  work  of  demolition  a 
careful  study  shall  be  made  of  the  structure  which  is  to 
be  pulled  down  and  also  of  all  its  surroundings.  This 
shall,  in  particular,  include  study  of  the  manner  in 
which  the  various  parts  of  the  building  to  be  demolished 
are  supported  and  how  far  the  stage  by  stage  demolition 


48 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


will  affect  the  safety  of  the  adjoining  structure.  A 
definite  plan  of  procedure  for  the  demolition  work, 
depending  upon  the  manner  in  which  the  loads  of  the 
various  structural  parts  are  supported,  shall  be  prepared 
and  approved  by  the  engineer-in-charge  and  this  shall 
be  followed  as  closely  as  possible,  in  actual  execution 
of  the  demolition  work.  Before  the  commencement  of 
each  stage  of  demolition,  the  foreman  shall  brief  the 
workmen  in  detail  regarding  the  safety  aspects  to  be 
kept  in  view. 

It  should  be  ensured  that  the  demolition  operations  do 
not,  act  any  stage,  endanger  the  safety  of  the  adjoining 
buildings.  Moreover,  the  nuisance  effect  of  the 
demolishing  work  on  the  use  of  the  adjacent  buildings 
should  be  kept  to  the  minimum. 

No  structure  or  part  of  the  structure  or  any  floor  or 
temporary  support  or  scaffold,  side  wall  or  any  device 
for  equipment  shall  be  loaded  in  excess  of  the  safe 
carrying  capacity,  in  its  then  existing  condition. 

30  PRECAUTIONS  PRIOR  TO  DEMOLITION 

30.1  On  every  demolition  job,  danger  signs  shall  be 
conspicuously  posted  all  around  the  structure  and  all 
doors  and  openings  giving  access  to  the  structure  shall 
be  kept  barricaded  or  manned  except  during  the  actual 
passage  of  workmen  or  equipment.  However, 
provisions  shall  be  made  for  at  least  two  independent 
exits  for  escape  of  workmen  during  any  emergency. 

30.2  During  nights,  red  lights  shall  be  placed  on  or 
about  all  the  barricades. 


30.3  Where  in  any  work  of  demolition  it  is  imperative, 
because  of  danger  existing,  to  ensure  that  no 
unauthorized  person  shall  enter  the  site  of  demolition 
outside  hours;  a  watchman  should  be  employed.  In 
addition  to  watching  the  site  he  shall  also  be  responsible 
for  maintaining  all  notices,  lights  and  barricades. 

30.4  All  the  necessary  safety  appliances  shall  be  issued 
to  the  workers  and  their  use  explained.  It  shall  be 
ensured  that  the  workers  are  using  all  the  safety 
appliances  while  at  work. 

30.5  The  power  on  all  electrical  service  lines  shall  be 
shut  off  and  all  such  lines  cut  or  disconnected  at  or 
outside  the  property  line,  before  the  demolition  work 
is  started.  Prior  to  cutting  of  such  lines,  the  necessary 
approval  shall  be  obtained  from  the  electrical 
authorities  concerned.  The  only  exception  will  be  any 
power  lines  required  for  demolition  work  itself. 

30.6  All  gas,  water  steam  and  other  service  lines  shall  be 
shut  off  and  capped  or  otherwise  controlled  at  or  outside 
the  building  line,  before  demolition  work  is  started. 

30.7  All  the  mains  and  meters  of  the  building  shall  be 
removed  or  protected  from  damage. 


30.8  If  a  structure  to  be  demolished  has  been  partially 
wrecked  by  fire,  explosion  or  other  catastrophe,  the 
walls  and  damaged  roofs  shall  be  shored  or  braced 
suitably. 

30.9  Protection  of  the  Public 

30.9.1  Safety  distances  to  ensure  safety  of  the  public 
shall  be  clearly  marked  and  prominently  sign  posted. 
Every  sidewalk  or  road  adjacent  to  the  work  shall  be 
closed  or  protected.  All  main  roads,  which  are  open  to 
the  shall  be  kept  open  to  the  public  clear  and 
unobstructed  at  all  times.  Diversions  for  pedestrians 
shall  be  constructed,  where  necessary  for  safety. 

30.9.2  If  the  structure  to  be  demolished  is  more  than 
two  storeyed  or  7.5  m  high,  measured  from  the  side 
walk  or  street  which  can  not  be  closed  or  safely 
diverted,  and  the  horizontal  distance  from  the  inside 
of  the  sidewalk  to  the  structure  is  4.5  m  or  less,  a 
substantial  sidewalk  shed  shall  be  constructed  over  the 
entire  length  of  the  sidewalk  adjacent  to  the  structure, 
of  sufficient  width  with  a  view  to  accommodating  the 
pedestrian  traffic  without  causing  congestion.  The  side 
walk  shed  shall  be  lighted  sufficiently  to  ensure  safety 
at  all  times.  For  detailed  information  reference  may  be 
made  to  good  practice  [7(37)]. 

A  toe  board  of  at  least  1  m  high  above  the  roof  of  the 
shed  shall  be  provided  on  the  outside  edge  and  ends  of 
the  sidewalk  shed.  Such  boards  may  be  vertical  or 
inclined  outward  at  not  more  than  45°. 

Except  where  the  roof  of  a  sidewalk  shed  solidly  abuts 
the  structure,  the  face  of  the  sidewalk  shed  towards 
the  building  shall  be  completely  closed  by  providing 
sheating/planking  to  prevent  falling  material  from 
penetrating  into  the  shed. 

The  roof  of  sidewalk  sheds  shall  be  capable  of  sustaining 
a  load  of  73  N/mm^.  Only  in  exceptional  cases,  say  due 
to  lack  of  other  space,  the  storing  of  material  on  a 
sidewalk  shed  may  be  permitted  in  which  case  the  shed 
shall  be  designed  for  a  load  of  146  N/mm^.  Roof  of 
sidewalk  shed  shall  be  designed  taking  into  account  the 
impact  of  the  falling  debris.  By  frequent  removal  of  loads 
it  shall  be  ensured  that  the  maximum  load,  at  any  time, 
on  the  roof  of  work  shed  is  not  more  than  6  000  N/mm-^. 
The  height  of  sidewalk  shed  shall  be  such  as  to  give  a 
minimum  clearance  of  2.4  m. 

Sidewalk  shed  opening,  for  loading  purposes,  shall  be 
kept  closed  at  all  time  except  during  actual  loading 
operations. 

The  deck  flooring  of  the  sidewalk  shed  shall  consist 
of  plank  of  not  less  than  50  mm  in  thickness  closely 
laid  and  deck  made  watertight.  All  members  of  the  shed 
shall  be  adequately  bracked  and  connected  to  resist 
displacement  of  members  or  distortion  of  framework. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


49 


30.9.3  When  the  horizontal  distance  from  the  inside 
of  the  sidewalk  to  the  structure  is  more  than  4.5  m 
and  less  than  7.5  m,  a  sidewalk  shed  or  fence  a 
substantial  railing  shall  be  constructed  on  the  inside 
of  the  sidewalk  or  roadway  along  the  entire  length  of 
the  demolition  side  of  the  property  with  movable  bars 
as  may  be  necessary  for  the  proper  prosecution  of 
the  work. 

31  PRECAUTIONS  DURING  DEMOLITION 

31.1  Prior  to  commencement  of  work,  all  material  of 
fragile  nature  like  glass  shall  be  removed. 

31.2  All  openings  shall  be  boarded  up. 

31.3  Dust  shall  be  controlled  by  suitable  means  to 
prevent  harm  to  workmen. 

31.4  Stacking  of  materials  or  debris  shall  be  within 
safe  limits  of  the  structural  member.  Additional 
supports,  where  necessary,  shall  be  given. 

31.5  Adequate  natural  or  artificial  lighting  and 
ventilation  shall  be  provided  for  the  workmen. 

32  SEQUENCE  OF  DEMOLITION  OPERATIONS 

32.1  The  demolition  work  shall  be  proceeded  with  in 
such  a  way  that: 

a)  it  causes  the  least  damage  and  nuisance  to  the 
adjoining  building  and  the  members  of  the 
public,  and 

b)  it  satisfies  all  safety  requirements  to  avoid  any 
accidents. 

32.2  All  existing  fixtures  required  during  demolition 
operations  shall  be  well  protected  with  substantial 
covering  to  the  entire  satisfaction  of  the  rules  and 
regulations  of  the  undertakings  or  they  shall  be 
temporarily  relocated. 

32.3  Before  demolition  work  is  started,  glazed  sash, 
glazed  doors  and  windows,  etc,  shall  be  removed.  All 
fragile  and  loose  fixtures  shall  be  removed.  The  lath 
and  all  loose  plaster  shall  be  stripped  off  throughout 
the  entire  building.  This  is  advantageous  because  it 
reduces  glass  breakage  and  also  eliminates  a  large 
amount  of  dust  producing  material  before  more 
substantial  parts  of  the  buildings  are  removed. 

32.4  All  well  openings  which  extend  down  to  floor 
level  shall  be  barricaded  to  a  height  of  not  less  than 
1  m  above  the  floor  level.  This  provision  shall  not  apply 
to  the  ground  level  floor. 

32.5  All  floor  openings  and  shafts  not  used  for  material 
chutes  shall  be  floored  over  and  be  enclosed  with  guard 
rails  and  toe  boards. 


systematically  storey  by  storey.  In  the  descending 
order.  All  work  in  the  upper  floor  shall  be  completed 
and  approved  by  the  engineer-in-charge  prior  to 
disturbance  to  any  supporting  member  on  the  lower 
floor.  Demolition  of  the  structure  in  sections  may  be 
permitted  in  exceptional  cases  if  proper  precautions 
are  ensured  to  prevent  injuries  to  persons  and  damage 
to  property. 

33  WALLS 

33.1  While  walls  of  sections  of  masonry  are  being 
demolished,  it  shall  be  ensured  that  they  are  not  allowed 
to  fall  as  single  mass  upon  the  floors  of  the  building 
that  are  being  demolished  so  as  to  exceed  the  safe 
carrying  capacity  of  the  floors.  Overloading  of  floors 
shall  be  prevented  by  removing  the  accumulating 
debris  through  chutes  or  by  other  means  immediately. 
The  floor  shall  be  inspected  by  the  engineer-in-charge 
before  undertaking  demolition  work  and  if  the  same  is 
found  to  be  incapable  to  carry  the  load  of  the  debris, 
necessary  additional  precautions  shall  be  taken  so  as 
to  prevent  any  possible  unexpected  collapse  of  the 
floor. 

33.2  Walls  shall  be  removed  part  by  part.  Stages  shall 
be  provided  for  the  men  to  work  on  if  the  walls  are 
less  than  one  and  a  half  brick  thick  and  dangerous  to 
work  by  standing  over  them. 

33.3  Adequate  lateral  bracing  shall  be  provided  for 
walls  which  are  unsound.  For  detailed  information 
reference  may  be  made  to  good  practice  [7(37)]. 

34  FLOORING 

34.1  Prior  to  removal  of  masonry  or  concrete  floor 
adequate  support  centering  shall  be  provided. 

34.2  When  floors  are  being  removed,  no  workmen 
shall  be  allowed  to  work  in  the  area,  directly  underneath 
and  such  area  shall  be  barricaded  to  prevent  access  to 
it. 

34.3  Planks  of  sufficient  strength  shall  be  provided  to 
give  workmen  firm  support  to  guard  against  any 
unexpected  floor  collapse. 

34.4  When  floors  are  being  removed  no  person  shall 
be  allowed  to  work  in  an  area  directly  underneath  and 
access  to  such  area  shall  be  barricaded. 

35  DEMOLITION  OF  STEEL  STRUCTURES 

35.1  When  a  derrick  is  used,  care  shall  be  taken  to  see 
that  the  floor  on  which  it  is  supported  is  amply  strong 
for  the  loading  so  imposed.  If  necessary  heavy  planking 
shall  be  used  to  distribute  the  load  to  floor  beam  and 

girders. 


32.6  The    demolition    shall    always    proceed        35.2  Overloading  of  equipment  shall  not  be  allowed. 


50 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


35.3  Tag  lines  shall  be  used  on  all  materials  being 
lowered  or  hoisted  up  and  a  standard  signal  system 
shall  be  used  and  the  workmen  instructed  on  the 
signals. 

35.4  No  person  shall  be  permitted  to  ride  the  load  line. 

35.5  No  beams  shall  be  cut  until  precautions  have  been 
taken  to  prevent  it  from  swinging  freely  and  possibly 
striking  any  worker  or  equipment  to  any  part  of  the 
structure  being  demolished. 

35.6  All  structural  steel  members  shall  be  lowered 
from  the  building  and  shall  not  be  allowed  to  drop. 

36  CATCH  PLATFORM 

36.1  In  demolition  of  exterior  walls  of  multistorey 
structures,  catch  platform  of  sufficient  strength  to 
prevent  injuries  to  workers  below  and  public  shall  be 
provided,  when  the  external  walls  are  more  than  20  m 
in  height. 

36.2  Such  catch  platform  shall  be  constructed  and 
maintained  not  more  than  3  storeys  below  the  storey 
from  which  exterior  wall  is  being  demolished. 
When  demolition  has  progressed  to  within  3  storeys 
of  ground  level,  catch  platform  will  not  be  considered 
necessary. 

36.3  Catch  platform  shall  be  capable  of  sustaining  a 
live  load  of  not  less  than  6  100  N/m^. 

36.4  Materials  shall  not  be  dumped  on  the  catch 
platform  nor  shall  they  be  used  for  storage  of  materials. 

37  STAIRS,  PASSAGEWAYS  AND  LADDERS 

37.1  Stairs  with  railings,  passageways  and  ladders 
shall  be  left  in  place  as  long  as  possible  and  maintained 
in  a  safe  condition. 

37.2  All  ladders  shall  be  secured  against,  slipping  out 
at  the  bottom  and  against  movement  in  any  direction 
at  the  top. 

38  MECHANICAL  DEMOLITION 

When  demolition  is  to  be  performed  by  mechanical 
devices,  such  as  weight  ball  and  power  shovels,  the 
following  additional  precautions  may  be  observed: 

a)  The  area  shall  be  barricaded  for  a  minimum 
distance  of  IV2  times  the  height  of  the  wall, 

b)  While  the  mechanical  device  is  in  operation, 
no  workmen  shall  be  allowed  to  enter  the 
building  being  demolished, 

c)  The  device  shall  be  so  located  as  to  avoid 
falling  debris,  and 

d)  The  mechanical  device  when  being  used  shall 
not  cause  any  damage  to  adjacent  structure, 
power  line,  etc. 


39  DEMOLITION  OF  CERTAIN  SPECIAL 
TYPES  AND  ELEMENTS  OF  STRUCTURES 

39.1  Roof  Trusses 

If  a  building  has  a  pitched  roof,  the  structure  should 
be  removed  to  wall  plate  level  by  hand  methods. 
Sufficient  purlins  and  bracing  should  be  retained  to 
ensure  stability  of  the  remaining  roof  trusses  while  each 
individual  truss  is  removed  progressively. 

39.1.1  Temporary  bracking  should  be  added,  where 
necessary,  to  maintain  stability.  The  end  frame  opposite 
to  the  end  where  dismantling  is  commenced,  or 
a  convenient  intermediate  frame  should  be 
independently  and  securely  guyed  in  both  directions 
before  work  starts. 

39.1.2  On  no  account  should  the  bottom  tie  of  roof 
trusses  be  cut  until  the  principal  rafters  are  prevented 
from  making  out  ward  movement. 

39.1.3  Adequate  hoisting  gears  suitable  for  the  loads 
shall  be  provided.  If  during  demolition  any  thing  is  to 
be  put  on  the  floor  below  the  level  of  the  truss,  it  shall 
be  ensured  that  the  floor  is  capable  of  taking  the  load. 

39.2  Heavy  Floor  Beams 

Heavy  baulks  of  timber  and  steel  beams  should  be 
supported  before  cutting  at  the  extremities  and  should 
then  be  lowered  gently  to  a  safe  working  place. 

39.3  Jack  Arches 

Where  tie  rods  are  present  between  main  supporting 
beams,  these  should  not  be  cut  until  after  the  arch  or 
series  of  arches  in  the  floor  have  been  removed.  The 
floor  should  be  demolished  in  strips  parallel  to  the  span 
of  the  arch  rings  (at  right  angles  to  the  main  floor 
beams). 

39.4  Brick  Arches 

Expert  advice  should  be  obtained  and,  at  all  stages  of 
the  demolition,  the  closet  supervision  should  be  given 
by  persons  fully  experienced  and  conversant  in  the  type 
of  work  to  ensure  that  the  structure  is  stable  at  all  times. 

However,  the  following  points  may  be  kept  in  view. 

39.4.1  On  no  account  should  the  restraining  influence 
of  the  abutments  be  removed  before  the  dead  load  of 
the  spandrel  fill  and  the  arch  rings  are  removed. 

39.4.2  A  single  span  arch  can  be  demolished  by  hand 
by  cutting  narrow  segments  progressively  from  each 
springing  parallel  to  the  span  of  the  arch,  until  the  width 
of  the  arch  has  been  reduced  to  a  minimum  which  can 
then  be  collapsed. 

39.4.3  Where  deliberate  collapse  is  feasible,  the  crown 
may  be  broken  by  the  demolition  ball  method  working 
progressively  from  edges  to  the  centre. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


51 


39.4.4  Collapse  of  the  structure  can  be  effected  in  one 
action  by  the  use  of  explosives.  Charges  should  be 
inserted  into  bore  holes  drilled  in  both  arch  and 
abutments. 

39.4.5  In  multi-span  arches,  before  individual  arches 
are  removed,  lateral  restraint  should  be  provided  at  the 
springing  level.  Demolition  may  then  proceed  as  for 
single  span;  where  explosives  are  used  it  is  preferable 
to  ensure  the  collapse  of  the  whole  structure  in  one 
operation  to  obviate  the  chance  of  leaving  unstable 
portion  standing. 

39.5  Cantilever  (Not  Part  of  a  Framed  Structure) 

Canopies,  cornices,  staircases  and  balconies  should  be 
demolished  or  supported  before  tailing  down  load  is 
removed. 

39.6  In-situ  Reinforced  Concrete 

Before  commencing  demolition,  the  nature  and 
condition  of  the  concrete,  the  condition  and  position 
of  reinforcement,  and  the  possibility  of  lack  of 
continuity  of  reinforcement  should  be  ascertained. 

Demolition  should  be  commenced  by  removing 
partitions  and  external  non-load  bearing  cladding. 

39.6.1  Reinforced  Concrete  Beams 

A  supporting  rope  should  be  attached  to  the  beam. 
Then  the  concrete  should  be  removed  from  both  ends 
by  pneumatic  drill  and  the  reinforcement  exposed. 
The  reinforcement  should  then  be  cut  in  such  a  way 
as  to  allow  the  beam  to  be  lowered  under  control  to 
the  floor. 

39.6.2  Reinforced  Concrete  Columns 

The  reinforcement  should  be  exposed  at  the  base  after 
restraining  wire  guy  ropes  have  been  placed  round  the 
member  at  the  top.  The  reinforcement  should  then  be 
out  in  such  a  way  as  to  allow  it  to  be  pulled  down  to 
the  floor  under  control. 

39.6.3  Reinforced  Concrete  Walls 

These  should  be  cut  into  strips  and  demolished  as  for 
columns. 

39.6.4  Suspended  Floors  and  Roofs 

The  slab  should  be  cut  into  strips  parallel  to  the  main 
reinforcement  and  demolished  strip  by  strip.  Where 
ribbed  construction  has  been  used,  the  principle  of 
design  and  method  of  construction  should  be 
determined  before  demolition  is  commenced.  Care 
should  be  taken  not  to  cut  the  ribs  inadvertently. 

39.7  Precast  Reinforced  Concrete 

Due  precautions  shall  be  taken  to  avoid  toppling  over 
of  prefabricated  units  or  any  other  part  of  the  structure 


and  whenever  necessary  temporary  supports  shall  be 
provided. 

39.8  Prestressed  Reinforced  Concrete 

Before  commencing  of  the  demolition  work,  advice 
of  an  engineering  expert  in  such  demolition  shall  be 
obtained  and  followed. 

40  LOWERING,  REMOVAL  AND  DISPOSAL 
OF  MATERIALS 

40.1  Dismantled  materials  may  be  thrown  to  the 
ground  only  after  taking  adequate  precautions.  The 
material  shall  preferably  be  dumped  inside  the  building. 
Normally  such  materials  shall  be  lowered  to  the  ground 
or  to  the  top  of  the  sidewalk  shed  where  provided  by 
means  of  ropes  or  suitable  tackles. 

40.2  Through  Chutes 

40.2.1  Wooden  or  metal  chutes  may  be  provided  from 
removal  of  materials.  The  chutes  shall  preferably  be 
provided  at  the  centre  of  the  building  for  efficient 
disposal  of  debris. 

40.2.2  Chutes,  if  provided  at  an  angle  of  more  than 
45°  from  the  horizontal,  shall  be  entirely  enclosed  on 
all  the  four  sides,  except  for  opening  at  or  about  the 
floor  level  for  receiving  the  materials. 

40.2.3  To  prevent  the  descending  material  attaining  a 
dangerous  speed,  chute  shall  not  extend  in  an  unbroken 
line  for  more  than  two  storeys.  A  gate  or  stop  shall  be 
provided  with  suitable  means  for  closing  at  the  bottom 
of  each  chute  to  stop  the  flow  of  materials. 

40.2.4  Any  opening  into  which  workmen  dump  debris 
at  the  top  of  chute  shall  be  guarded  by  a  substantial 
guard  rail  extending  at  least  1  m  above  the  level  of  the 
floor  or  other  surface  on  which  men  stand  to  dump  the 
materials  into  the  chute. 

40.2.5  A  toe  board  or  bumper,  not  less  than  50  mm 
thick  and  150  mm  high  shall  be  provided  at  each  chute 
openings,  if  the  material  is  dumped  from  the  wheel 
barrows.  Any  space  between  the  chute  and  the  edge  of 
the  opening  in  the  floor  through  which  it  passes  shall 
be  solidly  planked  over. 

40.3  Through  Holes  in  the  Floors 

40.3.1  Debris  may  also  be  dropped  through  holes  in 
the  floor  without  the  use  of  chutes.  In  such  a  case  the 
total  area  of  the  hole  cut  in  any  intermediate  floor,  one 
which  lies  between  floor  that  is  being  demolished  and 
the  storage  floor  shall  not  exceed  25  percent  of  such 
floor  area.  It  shall  be  ensured  that  the  storage  floor  is 
of  adequate  strength  to  withstand  the  impact  of  the 
falling  material. 

40.3.2  All  intermediate  floor  openings  for  passage  of 


52 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


materials  shall  be  completely  enclosed  with  barricades 
or  guard  rails  not  less  than  1  m  high  and  at  a  distance 
of  not  less  than  1  m  from  the  edge  of  general  opening. 
No  barricades  or  guard  rails  shall  be  removed  until 
the  storey  immediately  above  has  been  demolished 
down  to  the  floor  line  and  all  debris  cleared  from  the 
floor. 

40.3.3  When  the  cutting  of  a  hole  in  an  intermediate 
floor  between  the  storage  floor  and  the  floor  which  is 
being  demolished  makes  the  intermediate  floor  or  any 
portion  of  it  unsafe,  then  such  intermediate  floor  shall 
be  properly  shored.  It  shall  also  be  ensured  that  the 
supporting  walls  are  not  kept  without  adequate  lateral 
restraints. 

40.4  Removal  of  Materials 

40.4.1  As  demolition  work  proceeds,  the  released 
serviceable  materials  of  different  types  shall  be 
separated  from  the  unserviceable  lot  (hereinafter  called 
'MALBA')  at  suitable  time  intervals  and  properly 
stocked  clear  of  the  spots  where  demolition  work  is 
being  done. 

40.4.2  The  MALBA  obtained  during  demolition  shall 
be  collected  in  well-formed  heaps  at  properly  selected 
places,  keeping  in  view  safe  conditions  for  workmen 
in  the  area.  The  height  of  each  MALBA  heap  shall  be 
limited  to  ensure  its  toppling  over  or  otherwise 
endangering  the  safety  of  workmen  or  passersby. 

40.4.3  The  MALBA  shall  be  removed  from  the 
demolition  site  to  a  location  as  required  by  the  local 
civil  authority.  Depending  on  the  space  available  at  the 
demolition  site,  this  operation  of  conveying  MALBA  to 
its  final  disposal  location  may  have  to  be  carried  out  a 
number  of  times  during  the  demolition  work.  In  any 
case,  the  demolition  work  shall  not  be  considered  as 
completed  and  the  area  declared  fit  for  further  occupation 
till  all  the  MALBA  has  been  carried  to  its  final  disposal 
location  and  the  demolition  areas  tidied  up. 

40.4.4  Materials  which  are  likely  to  cause  dust 
nuisance  or  undue  environmental  pollution  in  any  other 
way,  shall  be  removed  from  the  site  at  the  earliest  and 
till  then  they  shall  be  suitable  covered.  Such  materials 
shall  be  covered  during  transportation  also. 

40.4.5  a)     Glass  and  steel  should  be  dumped  or 

buried  separately  to  prevent  injury. 

b)  Workman  should  be  provided  with 
suitable  protective  gears  for  personal 
safety  during  works,  lie  safety  helmets, 
boots,  hand  gloves,  goggles,  special 
attire,  etc. 

c)  The  work  of  removal  of  debris  should  be 
carried  out  during  day.  In  case  of  poor 
visibility  artificial  light  may  be  provided. 


d)  The  debris  should  first  be  removed  from 
top.  Early  removal  from  bottom  or  sides 
of  dump  may  cause  collapse  of  debris, 
causing  injuries. 

41  MISCELLANEOUS 

41.1  No  demolition  work  should  be  carried  out  during 
night  as  far  as  possible,  especially  when  the  structure 
to  be  demolished  is  in  an  inhabited  area.  If  such  night 
work  has  to  be  done,  additional  precautions  by  way  of 
additional  red  warning  signals,  working  lights  and 
watchmen,  shall  be  provided  to  avoid  any  injury  to 
workmen  and  public.  Demolition  work  shall  not  be 
carried  out  during  storm  and  heavy  rain. 

41.2  Warning  devices  shall  be  installed  in  the  area  to 
warn  the  workers  in  case  of  any  danger. 

41.3  Safety  devices  like  industrial  safety  helmets 
conforming  to  the  accepted  standards  [7(9)]  and 
goggles  made  of  celluloid  lens,  shall  be  issued  to  the 
workmen.  Foreman-in-charge  of  the  work  areas  shall 
ensure  that  all  the  workmen  are  wearing  the  safety 
devices  before  commencing  any  work. 

41.4  Construction  sheds  and  tool  boxes  shall  be  so 
located  as  to  protect  workers  from  injuries  from  the 
falling  debris. 

41.5  Where  there  is  a  likelihood  of  injuries  to  hands 
of  workmen  when  demolishing  RCC,  steel  structures, 
etc,  gloves  of  suitable  materials  shall  be  worn  by 
workmen. 

41.6  Sufficient  protection  by  way  of  both  overhead 
cover  and  screens  shall  be  provided  to  prevent  injuries 
to  the  workmen  and  the  public. 

41.7  Safety  belts  or  ropes  shall  be  used  by  workmen 
when  working  at  higher  levels. 

41.8  Grading  of  Plot 

When  a  building  has  been  demolished  and  no  building 
operation  has  been  projected  or  approved,  the  vacant 
plot  shall  be  filled,  graded  and  maintained  in 
conformity  to  the  established  street  grades  at  curb  level. 
The  plot  shall  be  maintained  free  from  the 
accumulation  of  rubbish  and  all  other  unsafe  and 
hazardous  conditions  which  endangers  the  life  or  health 
of  the  public;  and  provisions  shall  be  made  to 
prevent  the  accumulation  of  water  or  damage  to  any 
foundations  on  the  premises  or  the  adjoining  property. 

42  FIRST-AID 

42.1  A  copy  of  all  pertinent  regulations  and  notices 
concerning  accidents,  injury  and  first-aid  shall  be 
prominently  exhibited  at  the  work  site. 

42.2  Depending  on  the  scope  and  nature  of  the  work. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


53 


a  person,  qualified  in  first-aid  shall  be  available  at  work        telephone  may  be  provided  to  first-aid  assistant  with 


site  to  render  and  direct  first-aid  to  casualties.  He  shall 
maintain  a  list  of  individuals  qualified  to  serve  in  first- 
aid  work.  Enough  first-aid  kit,  including  a  stretcher 
and  cot  with  accessories  shall  be  provided  at  site.  A 


telephone  numbers  of  the  hospitals  prominently 
displayed. 

Complete  reports  of  all  accidents  and  action  taken 
thereon  shall  be  forwarded  to  the  competent  authorities. 


ANNEX  A 
(Clause  2.1.2) 

PROGRAMME  EVALUATION  AND  REVIEW  TECHNIQUE,  AND 
CRITICAL  PATH  METHOD 


A-0  INTRODUCTION 

A-0.1  Programme  Evaluation  and  Review  Technique 
(PERT)  and  Critical  Path  Method  (CPM)  are  modern 
management  tools  or  devices,  which  have  made  it 
possible  to  achieve  considerable  savings  in  cost  and 
time  of  construction.  They  can  be  used  with  advantage 
for  demolition,  constructional  safety  and  fire  protection 
measures,  by  including  them  in  the  list  of  activities 
(also  called  events)  along-side  with  other  'events'  of 
the  project. 

A-0.2  Advance  Planning 

A-0.2.1  PERT  and  CPM  enable  us  to  achieve  judicious 
employment  and  utilization  of  resources,  such  as 
labour,  materials,  and  equipment  by  pre-determining 
the  various  stages,  listing  out  the  various  activities  and 
drawing  out  'Arrow  Network  Diagram' . 

A-0.3  Synchronization  of  Sub-Projects 

A-0.3.1  Another  extremely  important  advantage  of 
CPM  is  that  various  factors  influencing  completion  of 
a  project  can  be  scientifically  planned  to  be  coordinated 
such  that  the  completion  of  various  sub-projects  and 
services,  such  as  furniture,  sewage,  electricity  and 
water  supply  synchronises. 

A-1  PREPARATION  OF  CPM  CHART  (LISTING 
OUT  THE  ACTIVITIES) 

A-1.1  The  most  important  step  in  preparation  of  CPM 
network  is  to  list  out  the  activities  involved  to  the 
minutest  details.  For  example,  a  few  activities  in  case 
of  a  building  project  are  given  below: 


a) 


b) 

c) 
d) 


Planning  and  designing  of  building  by 

architect,  engineer  and  approval  of  plans  by 

the  Authority. 

Making  the  land  available. 

Outlining  detailed  specifications. 

Procurement  of  materials,  such  as  sand. 


cement,  stone  and  timber;  and  plants,  such  as 
concrete  mixer,  vibrators,  water  pump  for 
curing. 

e)  Soil  explorations  and  trial  pits. 

f)  Excavation  in    foundations,    including 
demolition,  if  needed. 

g)"  Construction  safety  aspects  specially  in  case 

of  pile  foundations. 
h)"  Blasting  if  required  (for  deep  foundations). 
j)"    Fire  protection  measures. 

A-1.2  Time  Needed  for  Each  Activity 

An  assessment  is  to  be  made  to  find  out  the  time  needed 
for  each  activity  and  then  to  list  out  those  activities, 
which  can  be  executed  concurrently  (or  simultaneously) 
with  each  other.  For  example,  while  designing  of  the 
building  is  in  hand,  correspondence  for  land  purchase 
can  also  go  on  side  by  side;  or  while  work  in 
foundations  is  in  progress,  order  for  'joinery'  can  be 
placed. 

A-1.3  Critical  Activity 

It  should  then  be  seen  as  to  which  of  the  activities  are 
critical,  that  is  which  items  are  such  that  a  single  day's 
delay  will  mean  overall  delay  on  the  project.  Contrary 
to  this,  it  will  be  seen  from  CPM  Network  that  certain 
activities  can  be  delayed  to  a  certain  extent  without 
delaying  the  completion  of  the  project.  This  is  a  very 
useful  and  valuable  information  for  the  'Project 
Manager' .  That  is  where  resources  scheduling  becomes 
easier  and  economical  and  a  time  saver.  It  eliminates 
chances  of  idle  labour  and  higher  expenses  which  are 
results  of  haphazard  planning. 

A-2  UPDATING 

A-2.1  In  implementing  the  CPM,  there  could  be  gaps 
between  the  planned  CPM  and  actual  progress 


"  These  can  be  further  sub-divided  and  number  of  activities 
increased. 


54 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


or  position  on  ground.  Tiiis  should  be  cliecked 
periodically-weekly,  fortnightly  or  monthly  depending 
on  nature  and  size  of  project. 

A-3  GENERAL 

A-3.1  In  case  of  projects  being  executed  by  contractors 


for  the  owners,  or  departments,  it  is  recommended  that 
it  should  be  an  essential  condition  of  the  contract  to 
submit  a  CPM  Chart  along  with  the  quoted  tenders. 
This  will  ensure  that  the  construction  work  will  be 
according  to  a  systematic,  engineer-like  and  well-knit 
plan  of  execution. 


ANNEX  B 

(Clause  4.1) 

CHECK  LIST  FOR  STACKING  AND  STORAGE  OF  MATERIALS 


SI 
No. 


(1) 


Material/Component 


(2) 


Base 


Stack 


Type  of  Cover 


Firm  Hard  Off-  Heaps  Tiers  Flat  Vertical    Open      Open  Under 

Level  pioor  Floor  but  shed 

Ground  covered 

(3)         (4)       (5)  (6)       (7)     (8)        (9)        (10)       (11)  (12) 


1. 

Cement 

2. 

Lime 

a)  Quick  lime 

b)  Hydratedlime 

3. 

Stones  and  Aggregates 

a)  Stones,  aggregates,  fly  ash 

^ 

and  cinder 

b)  Veneering  stones 

• 

4. 

Bricks  and  Blocks 

• 

5. 

Tiles 

a)  Clay   and   concrete  floor. 

^ 

wall  and  roof  tiles 

b)  Ceramic  tiles 

Partially  Pre-fabricated  Wall 
and  Roof  Components 

a)  RC  planks,  prefabricated 
brick  panels  and  ferro- 
cement  panels 

b)  Channel  units,  cored  units 
and  L-Panels 

c)  Waffle  units,  RC  joists, 
single  tee  and  double  tee 

Timber 

Steel 


^ 


y 


^ 


• 


•/ 


^ 


V 


9.    Aluminium  Sections 

^ 

10.   Doors,         Windows         and 

v^ 

Ventilators 

11.   Roofing  Sheets 

a)  AC 

v" 

b)  GI  and  Aluminium  sheets 

v^ 

c)  Plastic  sheets 

• 


^  y 

y  V 

^ 


• 


^ 


y^ 


y 


y 


y 


• 


^ 


V 


y 


y 


• 

V 

•/ 

y 

• 

• 

y 

-/ 
y 


y 


y 


y 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


55 


ANNEX  B  —  Continued 


(1) 


(2) 


(3)         (4)       (5)        (6)       (7)     (8)        (9)        (10)       (11)        (12) 


12. 

Boards       like       Plywood, 
Particle       Boards,       Fibre 
Boards,    Blockboards     and 
Gypsum  Board 

13. 

Plastic  and  Rubber  Flooring 

a)  Sheets  in  rolls 

,/ 

b)  Tiles 

• 

14. 

Glass  Sheets 

^ 

15. 

Glass  Bricks/Blocks 

^ 

16. 

CI,  GI  and  AC  Pipes  and 
Fittings 

a)  Pipes 

-/ 

b)  CI  and  GI  Fittings 

• 

c)  AC  Fittings 

V 

17. 

Polyethylene  Pipes 

18. 

Unplasticized  PVC  Pipes 

V 

19. 

Bitumen,         Road         Tar, 
Asphalt,  etc  in  Drums 

V 

20. 

Oil  Paints 

-/ 

21. 

Sanitary  Appliances 

^ 


• 


• 


•/      ^ 


^      ^ 


•/ 


^ 


^ 


^ 


-/ 

V 

•/ 

■/ 

•/ 

^ 

V 

■/ 

•/ 

■/ 

■/ 

•/ 

V 

• 

V 

• 

v< 

^ 

■/ 

ANNEX  C 

(Clause  26.3.2.2.2) 

COMMON  CAUSES  FOR  MAINTENANCE  PROBLEMS 


C-0  MAJOR  CAUSES  FOR  MAINTENANCE 
PROBLEMS 

C-1  FLOORS 

a)  Poor  quality  of  construction  which  includes 
quality  of  construction  material  and 
workmanship. 

Improper  slopes,  mainly  in  kitchen,  bathrooms/ 
toilets  etc. 


b) 

c) 
d) 
e) 


Lack  of  rounding  at  junctions  of  walls  with 

floors. 

Lack  of  dampproof  course  treatment  in  walls 

and  particularly  in  sunken  floors. 

Poor  design  of  building. 


C-2  ROOFS 

a)  Inadequate  roof  slopes. 

b)  Inferior  quality  of  construction. 

c)  Cracks  on  roof  surfaces. 

d)  Inadequate  provision  of  rain  water  spouts. 

e)  Blockages  in  gratings/rain  water  pipes. 


f)  Worn  out  felts. 

g)  Bubbling  up  of  tarfelt  and  separation  of 
joints. 

h)     Leakage  from  the  openings  provided  on  the 
roof. 

C-3  PLUMBING 

a)  Inadequate  slopes  in  soil/waste  pipes. 

b)  Improper  lead  joints. 

c)  Joints  in  walls. 

d)  Improper  junctions  of  stacks. 

e)  Inadequate  cleaning  eyes  at  junctions. 

f)  Inadequate  slopes  in  sewage  pipes. 

g)  Throwing  of  solid  wastes  in  WC's. 

h)     Lack  of  periodical  checking  and  cleaning, 
j)      Lack  of  motivation/education  to  users  for 

proper  use. 
k)     Overflow  from  service  tanks, 
m)    Inferior  quality  of  fittings  and  fixtures, 
n)     Inadequate  design. 


56 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


C-4  DRAINAGE 

a)  Improper  surface  dressing  around  buildings 
and  improper  upkeep  of  surroundings. 

b)  Growth  of  wild  grass  and  vegetation. 

c)  Inadequate  drainage  system  around  the 
building. 

d)  Inadequate  slope  of  the  drains  or  drainage 
pipes. 

e)  Inadequate  number  of  inspection  chambers. 

f)  Theft  of  manhole  covers  etc. 


g)     Throwing  of  solid  waste  in  the  open  surface 
drains. 

C-5  ELECTRICAL 

a)  Loose  connections. 

b)  Improper  earthing  and  earth  connections. 

c)  Damages    to    wires,    cables    and    other 
installations. 

d)  Under    rated    cables/wires    and    other 
installations. 


ANNEX  D 

{Clause  26.6.5) 

FORMAT  FOR  INSPECTION  REPORT 

Date  :   

Building/Block  :   


Condition 


Sound 


Suspect 


Defective 


FLOORS  &  STAIRCASES 

Ground  Floor 

Finish 

Skirting 

Structure 

Damp-proofing 

Ceiling 

Under  floors,  spaces,  (Suspended  floors) 

Termites/insects 

Upper  Floors 

Finish 
Structure 
Ceiling 
Suspended  ceihng 

Stair  cases 

Structure 

Treads 

Finishes 

Balustrade 

Soffits 

Finish 

ROOFING 

Flat/Pitched 

Finish 

Insulation 

Structure 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


57 


ANNEX  D  —  Continued 


Condition 


Sound 


Suspect 


Defective 


Roof  lights/glazing 

Parapets 

Cutters 

Rain  Water  Pipes 

Mud  Phuska 

Roof  interiors  (Pitched) 

Growth  of  vegetation 

SANITARY  INSTALLATIONS 

Plumbing 

Fittings/Pipings,  WC's 

Taps 

Sinks 

Basins 

Urinals 

Cisterns 

Geysers 

Sewage  Disposal 

Soil  pipes 
Manholes 
Sewerlines 

Drainage 

Gully  chambers 

Sewers 

Surface  drains 

Inspection  chambers 

Structural  movement 

Failure  of  material 

Design  or  construction  defects 

Overhead  Tanks/Underground 

Sumps/Terrace  Tanks 

Septic  Tanks 

Remarks 


ANNEX  E 

{Clause  26.7.3.2) 

GUIDELINES  FOR  MAINTENANCE  OF  ELECTRICAL  EQUIPMENTS 


E-I  In  case  of  electrical  appliances,  manufacturer's 
instructions  for  the  usage  and  maintenance  of  the 
equipment  should  be  strictly  followed. 

E-2  The  detailed/working  drawings  of  all  the 
components  of  electrical  installations  should  always 


be  available  with  the  maintenance  unit.  Following 
records  should  be  available. 

a)  Manufacturer's  name 

b)  Nameplate  of  the  equipment  and  its  salient 
features  such  as  capacity,  rating  etc. 


58 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


c)  Manufacturer's  recommendations  regarding 
availability/usage  of  spare  parts. 

d)  Manufacturer's  recommendations  for 
periodical  maintenance  and  post  fault 
maintenance. 

e)  Details  of  the  maintenance  operations 
performed  in  the  past. 

E-3  Care  should  be  taken  while  selecting  replacement 
parts.  The  spare  parts  should  be  correct  and  suitable, 
preferably  as  recommended  by  the  manufacturer  of  the 
installation.  During  the  placement  of  order  for  the 
supply  of  spare  parts,  nameplate  particulars  and  serial 
number  should  be  quoted. 

E-4  The  space  where  the  equipment  is  kept  should  be 
clean  and  properly  ventilated.  Equipment  should  not 
be  disturbed  needlessly.  Before  cleaning,  the 
equipment  should  be  made  dead.  For  internal  cleaning 
a  section  cleaner  should  be  used. 

E-5  Covers  and  doors  should  not  be  left  open 
unnecessarily  during  maintenance.  Afterwards  they 
should  be  promptly  and  correctly  closed  and  locked. 

E-6  Before  removing  the  covers  and  connections,  all 
covers  and  cable  terminations  should  be  marked  to 
ensure  correct  replacements.  Disturbed  connections 
and  temporary  connections  should  be  marked  to 
facilitate  re-connection.  Temporary  connections  and 
markings  should  be  removed  before  the  installation  is 
put  to  use. 

E-7  Those  connections  which  have  not  been  disturbed 
should  also  be  checked  for  soundness  and  overheating. 

E-8  All  insulations  should  be  regularly  checked.  Solid 
insulations  should  be  checked  for  cracks  and  other 
defects.  Fibrous  and  organic  insulations  should  be 
checked  for  sign  of  blistering,  delamination  and 
mechanical  damage.  For  insulating  oils  the  interval 
between  tests  should  be  carried  out  as  per  the 
recommendations  of  the  manufacturer  and  keeping  the 
adverse  environmental  conditions  in  mind. 

E-9  It  should  be  ensured  that  the  earthing  connections 
are  sound  and  all  contact  screws  are  tight. 

E-10  During  the  examination  of  interlocks  it  is 
necessary  to  take  precautions  to  prevent  danger  to  plant 
or  persons  in  the  event  of  malfunction  or  inadvertent 
operation.  A  person  responsible  for  checking  and 
maintaining  any  interlock  system  should  have  thorough 
knowledge  of  the  extent,  nature  and  function  of  the 
interlock. 

E-11  If  the  equipment  is  ventilated  then  it  should  be 
ensured  that  the  airflow  is  smooth  and  not  restricted. 
If  filters  are  provided,  they  should  be  cleaned  or 
replaced  as  necessary. 


E-12  The  standby  system  for  tripping  and  closing 
supplies  should  always  be  kept  in  good  order. 
Indicators  and  alarms  should  be  maintained  in  time 
with  the  manufacturer's  instructions. 

E-13  Tools,  spares  and  instruments  should  be  stored 
near  to  the  installation.  These  should  be  regularly 
checked  against  an  inventory. 

E-14  Before  the  start  of  maintenance  of  the  circuit 
switches  it  should  be  ensured  that  all  incoming  and 
outgoing  main  auxiliary  circuits  are  dead  and  remain 
so  during  the  maintenance.  Over  heating  of  the  circuit 
switches  is  the  root  cause  for  faults.  Overheating  may 
be  caused  by  inadequate  ventilation,  overloading, 
loose  connection,  insufficient  contact  force  and 
malalignment. 

E-15  Some  circuit  breakers  are  not  intended  to  be 
maintained,  such  as  miniature  circuit  breakers  (MCBs). 
Such  items  should  not  be  dismantled  for  maintenance. 
These  should  be  renewed  periodically. 

E-16  For  the  maintenance  of  fuses  periodical 
inspection  should  be  done  for  correct  rating,  security, 
overheating  and  correct  location/orientation.  Element 
of  renewable  fuses  should  be  renewed  when  the 
deterioration  is  apparent.  The  availability  and  correct 
replacement  of  fuse  links  should  be  ensured. 

E-17  If  a  fuse  link  of  certain  rating  has  failed  and  is 
replaced,  then  all  fuse-links  of  same  rating  apparently 
subjected  to  the  fault  should  be  destroyed  and  replaced 
by  new  fuse  links. 

E-18  In  order  to  be  reasonably  sure  that  circuit  breaker 
is  capable  of  operation  when  required,  these  should  be 
tripped  and  reclosed  at  regular  intervals.  Tripping 
should  be  proved  manually  and  where  possible 
electrically  via  the  protective  relay  contacts.  The 
leakage  of  oil,  sign  of  corrosion,  and  any  unusual  smell 
which  may  indicate  over-heating  should  be  detected 
through  inspections. 

E-19  Timing  devices  are  mostly  designed  for  specialist 
maintenance.  These  should  not  be  dismantled  for 
maintenance  or  overhaul  purposes  unless  specifically 
recommended  by  the  manufacturers'.  Actual  timing 
periods  should  be  verified  with  set  values  and 
application  requirements. 

E-20  In  case  of  cable  boxes  and  terminations,  security 
of  mounting  and  earthing  should  be  examined.  Exposed 
tails  should  be  inspected  for  good  conditions  of 
insulation  and  freedom  from  moisture. 

E-21  Battery  cells  should  be  inspected  for  shedding 
of  active  material,  sedimentation  and  buckling  of 
plates.  Level  of  electrolyte  should  be  regularly  checked 
and  the  level  should  be  corrected  with  distilled  water. 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


59 


LIST  OF  STANDARDS 


The  following  list  records  those  standards  which  are 
acceptable  as  'good  practice'  and  'accepted  standards' 
in  the  fulfillment  of  the  requirements  of  the  Code.  The 
latest  version  of  a  standard  shall  be  adopted  at  the  time 
of  enforcement  of  the  Code.  The  standards  listed  may 
be  used  by  the  Authority  as  a  guide  in  conformance 
with  the  requirements  of  the  referred  clauses  in  the 
Code. 


IS  No. 
(1)     a)  Foundations 
1080  :  1985 


1904  :  1986 


2911 

(Part  1/Sec  1) :  1979 

(Part  1/Sec  2) :  1979 

(Part  1/Sec  3) :  1979 

(Part  1/Sec  4) :  1984 

(Part  2):  1980 
(Part  3) :  1980 

(Part  4):  1985 

2974 

(Part  1)  :  1982 

(Part  2):  1980 


Title 

Code  of  practice  for  design 
and  construction  of  shallow 
foundations  on  soils  (other 
than  raft,  ring  and  shell) 
{second  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  design 
and  construction  of 
foundations  in  soils: 
General      requirements 

{third  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  design 
and  construction  of  pile 
foundations 

Concrete  piles,  Section  1 
Driven  cast  in-situ  concrete 
piles  {first  revision) 

Concrete  piles.  Section  2 
Board  cast  in-situ  piles 
{first  revision) 

Concrete  piles.  Section  3 
Driven  precast  concrete 
piles  {first  revision) 

Concrete  piles,  Section  4 
Bored  precast  concrete 
piles  {first  revision) 

Timber  piles  {first  revision) 

Under-reamed  piles  {first 
revision) 

Load  test  on  piles  {first 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  design 
and  construction  of  machine 
foundations 

Foundations  for  recipro- 
cating type  machines 
{second  revision) 

Foundations  for  impact 
type  machines  (hammer 
foundations)  {first  revision) 


IS  No. 
(Part  3)  :  1992 


(Part  4):  1979 


(Part  5):  1987 


9456  :  1980 


9556  :  1980 


13094  :  1992 


15284 
(Part  1)  :  2003 

b)  Masonry 
1597 


(Part  1)  :  1992 
(Part  2):  1992 
2110:  1980 

2212:  1991 
2250  :  1981 

2572  :  1963 


Title 

Foundations  for  rotary  type 
machines  (medium  and 
high  frequency)  {second 
revision) 

Foundations  for  rotary  type 
machines  of  low  frequency 
{first  revision) 

Foundations  for  impact 
machines  other  than 
hammers  forging  and 
stamping  press  pig  breakers 
(drop  crusher  and  jolter) 
{first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  design 
and  construction  of  conical 
and  hyperbolic  paraboidal 
types  of  shell  foundations 

Code  of  practice  for  design 
and  construction  of 
diaphragm  walls 

Guidelines  for  selection  of 
ground  improvement 
techniques  for  foundation 
in  weak  soils 

Design  and  construction 
for  ground  improvement: 
Part  1  Stone  columns 


Code  of  practice  for 
construction  of  stone 
masonry 

Rubble  stone  masonry  {first 
revision) 

Ashlar  masonry  {first 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  in-situ 
construction  of  walls  in 
buildings  with  soil-cement 
{first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
brickwork  {first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
preparation  and  use  of 
masonry  mortars  {first 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
construction  of  hollow 
concrete  block  masonry 


60 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


IS  No.  Title 

3630  :  1992  Code    of    practice    for 

construction  of  non-load 
bearing  gypsum  block 
partitions  (first  revision) 

4407  :  1967  Code  of  practice  for  reed 

walling 

4441  :  1980  Code  of  practice  for  use  of 

silicate  type  chemical 
resistant  mortars  {first 
revision) 

4442  :  1980  Code  of  practice  for  use  of 

sulphur  type  chemical 
resistant  mortars  (first 
revision) 

4443  :  1980  Code  of  practice  for  use  of 

resin  type  chemical 
resistant  mortars  (first 
revision) 

6041  :  1985  Code    of    practice    for 

construction  of  autoclaved 
cellular  concrete  block 
masonry  (first  revision) 

6042  :  1969  Code    of    practice    for 

construction  of  light  weight 
concrete  block  masonry 
(first  revision) 

c)  Timber  and  Bamboo 

1634:  1992  Code  of  practice  for  design 

and  constructions  of  wood 
stair  for  houses  (second 
revision) 

2366  :  1983  Code  of  practice  for  nail- 

jointed  timber  construction 
(first  revision) 

3670  :  1989  Code    of    practice    for 

construction  of  timber 
floors  (first  revision) 

4913  :  1968  Code    of    practice    for 

selection,  installation  and 
maintenance  of  timber 
doors  and  windows 

4983  :  1984  Code  of  practice  for  design 

and  construction  of  nail 
laminated  timber  beams 

5390  :  1984  Code    of    practice    for 

construction  of  timber 
ceilings  (first  revision) 

11096:  1984  Code  of  practice  for  design 

and  construction  of  bolt- 
jointed  timber  construction 


IS  No. 
12506  :  1988 


d)  Concrete 

456  :  2000 

457  :  1957 


2502  :  1963 

2541  :  1991 

3370 

(Part  1)  :  1965 
(Part  2):  1965 

(Part  3)  :  1967 

3558  :  1983 

5817  :  1992 


7246  :  1974 

7861 
(Part  1)  :  1975 
(Part  2):  1981 
10262  :  1982 
10359  :  1982 


Title 

Code  of  practice  for 
improved  thatching  of  roof 
with  wrought  and  fire 
retardant  treatment 


Code  of  practice  for  plain 
and  reinforced  concrete 
(fourth  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  general 
construction  of  plain  and 
reinforced  concrete  for 
dams  and  other  massive 
structures 

Code  of  practice  for 
bending  and  fixing  of  bars 
for  concrete  reinforcement 
Code  of  practice  for 
preparation  and  use  of  lime 
concrete  (second  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
concrete  structures  for  the 
storage  of  liquids 

General  requirements 

Reinforced  concrete 
structures 

Prestressed  concrete 
structures 

Code  of  practice  for  use  of 
immersion  vibrators  for 
consolidating  concrete 
(first  revisioti) 
Code  of  practice  for 
preparation  and  use  of  lime 
pozzolana  mixture  concrete 
in  buildings  and  roads  {first 
revision) 

Recommendations  for  use 
of  table  vibrators  for 
consolidating  concrete 
Code  of  practice  for 
extreme  whether  concreting 
Recommended  practice  for 
hot  weather  concreting 

Recommended  practice  for 
cold  weather  concreting 

Recommended  guidelines 
for  concrete  mix  design 
Code  of  practice  for 
manufacture  and  use  of 
lime  pozzolana  concrete 
blocks  for  paving 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


61 


IS  No. 
14687  :  1999 

e)  Steel 
800  :  1984 


Title 

Guidelines  for  falsework 
for  concrete  structures 


Code  of  practice  for  general 
steel  construction  (second 
revision) 

801:1975  Code  of  practice  for  use  of 

cold  formed  light  gauge 
steel  structural  members 
in  general  building 
construction  (first  revision) 

805  :  1968  Code  of  practice  for  use 

of  steel  in  gravity  water 
tanks 

806  :  1968  Code  of  practice  for  use 

of  steel  tubes  in  general 
building  construction  (first 
revision) 
4000  :  1992  Code  of  practice  for  high 

strength  bolts  in  steel 
structures  (first  revision) 

4180  :  1967  Code    of    practice    for 

corrosion  protection  of 
light  gauge  steel  sections 
used  in  building 

6533  Code  of  practice  for  design 

and  construction  of  steel 
chimneys 

(Part  1)  ;  1989  Mechanical  aspects  (first 

revision) 

(Part  2)  :  1989  Structural  aspects  (first 

revision) 

8629  Code    of    practice    for 

(Parts  1  to  3)  :  1977   protection  of  iron  and  steel 

structures  from  atmospheric 

corrosion 

9077  :  1979  Code     of    practice     of 

corrosion  protection  of 
steel  reinforcement  in  RB 
and  RCC  construction 

9172  :  1979  Recommended     design 

practice  for  corrosion 
prevention  of  steel  structures 

f)  Flooring  and  Roofing 

658  :  1982  Code    of    practice    for 

magnesium  oxychloride 
composition  floors  (second 
revision) 

1196:  1978  Code  of  practice  for  laying 

bitumen  mastic  flooring 
(second  revision) 


IS  No. 

1197  :  1970 

1198  :  1982 
1443  :  1972 

2118  :  1980 

2119  :  1980 


2204  :  1962 
2571  :  1970 
2700  :  1987 
2792  :  1964 
2858  :  1984 

3007 
(Part  1)  :  1999 
(Part  2):  1999 

3670  :  1989 


5119 
(Part  1)  :  1968 

5318  :  1969 


Title 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
of  rubber  floors  (first 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  laying, 
fixing  and  maintenance  of 
linoleum  floor  (first 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
and  finishing  of  cement 
concrete  flooring  tiles  (first 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
construction  of  jack-arch 
type  of  building  floor  or 
roof  (first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
construction  of  brick-cwm- 
concrete  composite  (Madras 
terrace)  floor  or  roof  (first 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
construction  of  reinforced 
concrete  shell  roof 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
in-sitii  cement  concrete 
flooring  (first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
roofing  with  wooden 
shingles  (first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  design 
and  construction  of  stone 
slab  over  joist  floor 

Code  of  practice  for 
roofing  with  Mangalore 
tiles  (first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
of  asbestos  cement  sheets: 

Corrugated  sheets  (first 
revision) 

Semi-corrugated  sheets 
(first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
construction  of  timber 
floors  (first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
and  fixing  of  sloped  roof 
coverings:  Part  1  Slating 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
of  flexible  PVC  sheet  and 
tile  flooring 


62 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


IS  No. 

Title 

IS  No. 

5389  :  1969 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 

(Part  1)  :  1971 

of  hard  wood  parquet  and 

(Part  2):  1971 

wood  block  floors 

IS  1609  :  1991 

5390  :  1984 

Code    of    practice    for 
construction   of  timber 
ceilings  (first  revision) 

5766  :  1970 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
burnt  clay  brick  flooring 

1661  :  1972 

6061 

Code    of    practice    for 
construction  of  floor  and 

roof  with  joists  and  filler 

2114:  1984 

blocks 

(Part  1)  :  1971 

With  hollow  concrete  filler 
blocks 

2115  :  1980 

(Part  2):  1981 

With  hollow  clay  filler 
blocks  (first  revision) 

(Part  3):  1981 

Precast  hollow  clay  blocks 
joists  and  hollow  clay  filler 
blocks 

2338 

(Part  4):  1981 

With  precast  hollow  clay 
block  slab  panels 

(Part  1)  :  1967 
(Part  2):  1967 

6332  :  1984 

Code    of    practice    for 

construction  of  floors  and 

2394  :  1984 

roofs  using  precast  doubly- 

curved  shell  units  (first 

revision) 

2395 

9472  :  1980 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
mosaic  parquet  flooring 

10297  :  1982 

Code  of  practice  for  design 
and  construction  of  floors 

(Part  1)  :  1994 

and  roofs  using  precast 

(Part  2)  :  1994 

reinforced/pre stressed 

2402  :  1963 

concrete  ribbed  or  cored 

slab  units 

2441  :  1984 

10440  :  1983 

Code    of    practice    for 
construction  of  reinforced 
brick  and  RBC  floors  and 

roofs 

2524 

10505  :  1983 

Code    of    practice    for 
construction  of  floors  and 

roofs      using      precast 

(Part  1)  :  1968 

concrete  waffle  units 

(Part  2) :  1968 

g)  Finishes 

3036  :  1992 

1346  :  1991 

Code    of    practice    for 
waterproofing  of  roofs  with 
bitumen  felts  (third  revision) 

1414:  1989 

Code  of  practice  for  fixing 
wall  coverings 

3067  :  1988 

1477 

Code    of    practice    for 

painting  of  ferrous  metals 
in  buildings 


Title 

Pretreatment  (first  revision) 

Painting  (first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
damp-proofing  treatment 
using  bitumen  felts  (second 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
application  of  cement  and 
cement  lime  plaster  finishes 
(first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
in- situ  terrazzo  floor  finish 
(first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  flat- 
roof  finish:  Mud  PHUSKA 

(second  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
finishing  of  wood  and 
wood  based  materials 

Operations  and  workmanship 

Schedules 

Code  of  practice  for 
application  of  lime  plaster 
finish  (first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
painting  concrete,  masonry 
and  plaster  surfaces 

Operations  and  workmanship 

(first  revision) 

Schedule  (first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
external  rendered  finishes 

Code  of  practice  for  fixing 
ceiling  covering  (first 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
painting  of  non-ferrous 
metals  in  buildings: 

Pre-treatment 

Painting 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
lime  concrete  for  a  water- 
proofed roof  finish  (second 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  general 
design  details  and 
preparatory  work  for  damp- 
proofing  and  waterproofing 
of  buildings  (first  revision) 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


63 


IS  No. 

Title 

IS  No. 

3140 

1965 

Code    of    practice    for 
painting  asbestos  cement 
building  products 

3114:  1994 

3548 

1988 

Code  of  practice  for  glazing 
in  building  (first  revision) 

4127  :  1983 

4101 

Code    of    practice    for 

external      facing      and 

5329  :  1983 

veneers: 

(Part 

1) :  1967 

Stone  facing 

(Part 

2) :  1967 

Cement  concrete  facing 

5822  :  1994 

(Part 

3) :  1985 

wall  tiling  and  mosaics 
(first  revision) 

4365 

1967 

Code    of    practice    for 
application  of  bitumen 
mastic  for  waterproofing  of 
roofs 

6530  :  1972 

4597 

1968 

Code    of    practice    for 
finishing  of  wood  and 
wood  based  products  with 

7634 

nitrocellulose  and  cold 

(Part  1)  :  1975 

catalysed  materials 

4631 

1986 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
of    epoxy    resin    floor 

(Part  2)  :  1975 

toppings  (first  revision) 

(Part  3)  :  2003 

5491 

1969 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 

6278 

1971 

in-situ  granolithic  concrete 
floor  topping 

Code  of  practice  for  white- 
washing and  colour  washing 

j)  Measurements 
1200 

6494 

1988 

Code  of  practice  for  water 
proofing  of  underground 
water     reservoirs     and 
swimming   pools    {first 

(Part  1)  :  1992 
(Part  2)  :  1974 

revision) 

(Part  3)  :  1976 

7198 

1974 

Code  of  practice  for  damp- 
proofing  using  bitumen 

(Part  4)1976 

mastic 

(Part  5):  1982 

7290 

1979 

Recommendations  for  use 
of  polyethylene  film  for 

(Part  6)  :  1974 

9918 

1981 

waterproofing  of  roofs 
(first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  in-situ 

(Part  7):  1972 
(Part  8)  :  1993 

waterproofing  and  damp- 
proofing  treatments  with 

(Part  9):  1973 

glass  fibre  tissue  reinforced 
bitumen 

(Part  10)  :  1973 

h)  Piping 

(Part  11):  1977 

783: 

1985 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 

of  concrete  pipes  (first 

(Part  12)  :  1976 

revision) 


Title 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
of  cast  iron  pipes  (second 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
of  glazed  stoneware  pipes 
{first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  sanitary 
pipe  work  above  ground  for 
buildings  (first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
of  welded  steel  pipes 
for  water  supply  (second 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  laying 
of  asbestos  cement  pressure 
pipes 

Code  of  practice  for  plastics 
pipe  work  for  portable 
water  supplies: 

Choice  of  materials  and 
general  recommendations 

Laying  and  jointing 
polyethylene  (PE)  pipes 

Laying  and  jointing  of 
unplasticized  PVC  pipes 


Method  of  measurement 
of  building  and  civil 
engineering  works: 

Earthwork  (fourth  revision) 

Concrete  work  (third 
revision) 

Brickwork  (third  revision) 

Stone    masonry    (third 

revision) 

Formwork  (third  revision) 

Refactory  work  (second 

revision) 

Hardware  (second  revision) 

Steel  work  and  iron  work 

(fourth  revision) 

Roof  covering  (including 

cladding)  (second  revision) 

Ceiling  and  linings  (second 

revision) 

Paving,  floor  finishes  dado 
and  skirting  (third  revision) 

Plastering  and  pointing 
(third  revision) 


64 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


IS  No. 
(Part  13) :  1994 


(Part  14)  :  1984 
(Part  15)  ;  1987 

(Part  16) ;  1979 

(Part  17) :  1985 

(Part  18)  :  1974 

(Part  19)  :  1981 

(Part  20);  1981 

(Part  21):  1973 

(Part  23)  :  1988 
(Part  24) :  1983 

3861  :  2002 


k)  Others 
1081  :  1960 


1649  :  1962 

1946  :  1961 

2470 
(Part  1)  :  1985 

(Part  2):  1985 


Title 

White  washing,  colour 
washing,  distempering  and 
painting  of  building 
surfaces  (fifth  revision) 

Glazing  {third  revision) 

Paining,  polishing, 

varnishing,  etc  {fourth 
revision) 

Laying  of  water  and  sewer 
lines  including  appurtenant 
items  {third  revision) 

Roadwork  including  air 
field  pavements  {third 
revision) 

Demolition  and  dismantling 
{third  revision) 

Water  supply,  plumbing 
and  drains  {third  revision) 

Laying  of  gas  and  oil  pipe 
lines  {third  revision) 

Woodwork  and  joinery 
{second  revision) 

Piling  {fourth  revision) 

Well  foundations  {third 
revision) 

Method  of  measurement  of 
plinth,  carpet  and  rentable 
areas  of  buildings  {second 
revision) 


Code  of  practice  for  fixing 
and  glazing  of  metal  (steel 
and  aluminium)  doors, 
windows  and  ventilators 

Code  of  practice  for  design 
and  construction  of  flues 
and  chimneys  for  domestic 
heating  appliances 

Code  of  practice  for  use  of 
fixing  devices  in  walls, 
ceilings  and  floors  of  solid 
construction 

Code  of  practice  for 
installation  of  septic  tanks: 

Design  criteria  and 
construction  {second 
revision) 

Secondary  treatment  and 
disposal  of  septic  tank 
effluent  {second  revision) 


IS  No. 
2527  :  1984 


3414  :  1968 

3548  :  1988 
3558  :  1983 

3935  :  1966 
4326  :  1993 

4913  :  1968 

6313 

(Part  1)  :  1981 
(Part  2)  :  2001 

(Part  3)  :  2001 
6924  :  1973 

7246  :  1974 
8147  :  1976 


(2)     13416 

(Part  5)  :  1994 


(3)     11769 

(Part  1)  :  1987 


Title 

Code  of  practice  for  fixing 
rain-water  gutters  and 
down  pipes  for  roof 
drainage  {first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  design 
and  installation  of  joints  in 
buildings 

Code  of  practice  for  glazing 
in  buildings  {first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  use  of 
immersion  vibrators  for 
consolidating  concrete 
{first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
composite  construction 

Code  of  practice  for 
earthquake  resistant  design 
and  construction  of 
buildings  {second  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
selection,  installation  and 
maintenance  of  timber 
doors  and  windows 

Code  of  practice  for  anti- 
termite  measures  in 
buildings: 

Constructional  measures 

{first  revision) 

Pre-constructional  chemical 
treatment  measures  {second 
revision) 

Treatment  for  existing 
buildings  {second  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  the 
construction  of  refuse 
chutes  in  multistoreyed 
buildings 

Recommendation  for  use 
of  table  vibrators  for 
consolidating  concrete 

Code  of  practice  for  use  of 
aluminium  alloys  in 
structures 

Recommendations  for 
preventive  measure  against 
hazards  at  workplaces: 
Part  5  Fire  protection 

Guidelines  for  safe  use  of 
products  containing 
asbestos:  Part  1  Asbestos 
cement  products 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


65 


IS  No. 
(4)    2190  :  1992 


(5)    8758  :  1993 


(6)  10439  :  1983 
14687  :  1999 

(7)  3764  :  1992 

(8)  4138  :  1977 

(9)  2925  ;  1984 

(10)  2750  :  1964 

(11)  3696 

(Part  1)  :  1987 

(12)  3696 

(Part  2):  1991 

(13)  4912;  1978 

(14)  11461  :  1985 

(15)  1179:  1967 

(16)  5983  :  1980 

(17)  2361  :  2002 

(18)  11057:  1984 

(19)  3016:  1982 

(20)  1084  :  1994 


Title 

Code  of  practice  for 
selection,  installation  and 
maintenance  of  portable 
first-aid  fire  extinguishers 
(third  revision) 

Recommendations  for  fire 
precautionary  measures  in 
construction  of  temporary 
structures  and  pandals  (first 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  patent 
glazing 

Guidelines  for  falsework 
for  concrete  structures 

Safety  code  for  excavation 
work  (first  revision) 

Safety  code  for  working 
in  compressed  air  (first 
revision) 

Specification  for  industrial 
safety  helmets  (second 
revision) 

Specification  for  steel 
scaffoldings 

Safety  code  for  scaffolds 
and  ladders:  Part  1  Scaffolds 

Safety  code  for  scaffolds 
and  ladders:  Part  2  Ladders 

Safety  requirements  for 
floors  and  wall  openings, 
railing  and  toe  boards  (first 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
compressor  safety 

Specification  for  equipment 
for  eye  and  face  protection 
during  welding  (first 
revision) 

Specification  for  eye- 
protectors  (first  revision) 

Specification  for  bull-dog 
grips  (third  revision) 

Specification  for  industrial 
safety  nets 

Code  of  practice  for  fire 
precautions  in  welding  and 
cutting  operations  (first 
revision) 

Specification  for  manila 
ropes  (fourth  revision) 


IS  No. 
2266  :  2002 


(21)  818:  1968 


(22)  5916  :  1970 


(23)  13416 

(Part  4)  :  1994 


(24)  2171  :  1999 

(25)  819  :  1957 

1261  :  1959 
3016  :  1982 

4081  :  1986 
4138  :  1977 
9595  :  1996 

10178  :  1995 

(26)  3844  :  1989 


5290  :  1993 


Title 

Specification  for  steel 
wire  ropes  for  general 
engineering  purposes  (forth 
revision) 

Code  of  practice  for  safety 
and  health  requirements  in 
electric  and  gas  welding 
and  cutting  operations  (first 
revision) 

Safety  code  for 

constructions  involving  use 
of  hot  bituminous  materials 
Recommendations  for 
preventive  measure  against 
hazards  at  workplaces: 
Part  4  Timber  structure 

Specification  for  portable 
fire  extinguishers,  dry 
powder  (Cartridge  type) 
(third  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
resistance  spot  welding  for 
light  assemblies  in  mild 
steel 

Code  of  practice  for  seam 
welding  in  mild  steel 

Code  of  practice  for  fire 
precautions  in  welding  and 
cutting  operations  (first 
revision) 

Safety  code  for  blasting  and 
related  drilling  operations 
(first  revision) 

Safety  code  for  working  in 
compressed  gas  (first 
revision) 

Recommendations  for 
metal  arc  welding  of  carbon 
and  carbon  manganese 
steels  (first  revision) 

Recommended  procedure 
for  CO^  gas  shielded  metal- 
arc  welding  of  structural 
steels  (first  revision) 

Code  of  practice  for 
installation  and  maintenance 
of  internal  fire  hydrants  and 
hose  reels  on  premises  (first 
revision) 

Specification  for  landing 
valves  (third  revision) 


66 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


IS  No. 

(27)  13416 

(Part  2):  1992 


(28)  13416 

(Part  1)  :  1992 


(29)  13416 

(Part  3)  :  1994 


(30)  274 

(Part  1)  :  1981 

(Part  2):  1981 

663  :  1980 

704  :  1984 

841  :  1983 

844 
(Part  2):  1979 
(Part  3)  :  1979 

1630  :  1984 

1759  :  1986 
1791  :  1985 

1930  :  1995 

1931  :  2000 
2028  :  2004 


Title 

Recommendation  for 
preventive  measures 
against  hazards  at  work 
places:  Part  2  Fall  prevention 

Recommendation  for 
preventive  measures 
against  hazards  at  work 
places:  Part  1  Falling 
material  hazard  prevention 

Recommendation  for 
preventive  measures  against 
hazards  at  work  places: 
Part  3  Disposal  of  debris 

Specification  for  shovels: 

General  purpose  shovels 
(third  revision) 

Heat-treated  shovels  (third 
revision) 

Specification  for  adzes 
(second  revision) 

Specification  for  crow  bars 
and  claw  bars  (second 
revision) 

Specification  for  steel 
hammers  (second  revision) 

Specification  for  screw 
drivers: 

Dimensions  (second 
revision) 

Dimensions  for  screw 
drivers  for  recessed  head 
screws  (second  revision) 

Specification  for  mason's 
tools  for  plaster  work  and 
pointing  work  (first 
revision) 

Specification  for 

POWRAHS  (second 

revision) 

Specification  for  batch  type 
concrete  mixers  (second 
revision) 

Specification  for  chisels 
and  gauges  (second 
revision) 

Specification  for  engineer's 
files  (third  revision) 

Specification  for  open  jaw 
wrenches  (spanners) 
(fourth  revision) 


IS  No. 

2029  :  1998 

2030  :  1989 
2094 


(Part  1)  :  1996 

(Part  2)  :  1999 

(Part  3)  :  1999 
2431  :  1963 


2438  :  1963 

2439  :  1963 

2505  :  1992 

2506  :  1985 

2514:  1963 

2587  :  1975 

2588  :  1975 
2722  :  1964 

2852  :  1998 
3066  :  1965 
3251  :  1965 
3365  :  1965 
3559  :  1966 


Title 

Specification  for  ring 
wrenches  (spanners) 
(fourth  revision) 

Specification  for  box 
spanners  (second  revision) 

Specification  for  heater  for 
bitumen  (tar)  and  emulsion 
(second  revision): 

Specification  (second 
revision) 

Bitumen  sprayer  (third 
revision) 

Emulsion  (third  revision) 

Specification  for  steel 
wheel  barrows  (single 
wheel-type) 

Specification  for  roller  pan 
mixer 

Specification  for  metal 
hand  rollers  (fixed-weight 
type) 

Specification  for  concrete 
vibrators,  immersion  type 
(general  requirements) 

General  requirements  for 
screed  board  concrete 
vibrators  (first  revision) 

Specification  for  concrete 
vibrating  tables 

Specification  for  pipes 
vices  (open  side  type  and 
fixed  sides  type)  (first 
revision) 

Specification  for 

blacksmith's  vices  (first 
revision) 

Specification  for  portable 
swing  weigh  batchers  for 
concrete  (single  and  double 
bucket  type) 

Specification  for  carpenters 
augers  (first  revision) 

Specification  for  hot 
asphalt  mixing  plants 

Specification  for  asphalt 
paver  finisher 

Specification  for  floor 
polishing  machines 

Specification  for  pneumatic 
concrete  breakers 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


67 


IS  No. 
3587  :  1986 

3650  :  1981 

3938  :  1983 

4003 

(Part  1)  :  1978 

(Part  2):  1986 
4017  :  1992 

4057  :  1986 

4095  :  1991 

4183  :  1967 

4184  :  1967 
4508  :  1992 

4656  :  1968 
4915  :  1968 

5066  :  1969 

5067  :  1969 
5087  :  1969 
5098  :  1969 
5123:  1969 
5169  :  1986 
5200  :  1998 
5658  :  1990 
5663  :  1970 


Title 

Specification  for  rasps 
{second  revision) 

Specification  for 

combination  side  cutting 
pliers  {second  revision) 

Specification  for  electric 
wire  rope  hoists  {second 
revision) 

Specification  for  pipe 
wrenches 

General  purposes  {first 
revision) 

Heavy  duty  {first  revision) 

Specification  for  carpenters 
squares  {first  revision) 

Specification  for  carpenters 
adjustable  metal  bodied 
bench  planes  (first  revision) 

Specification  for  pincers 
{second  revision) 

Specification  for  metal 
hand  rammers 

Specification  for  steel  wheel 
barrows  (with  two  wheels) 

Specification  for  open 
ended  slugging  wrenches 
(spanners)  {first  revision) 

Specification  for  form 
vibrators  for  concrete 

Specification  for  welders 
chipping  hammer 

Specification  for  glass 
pliers 

Specification  for  fencing 
pliers 

Specification  for  wire 
stripping  pliers 

Specification  for  cross  cut 
and  rip  saws 

Specification  for  tenon  and 
dovetail  saws 

Specification  for  hack-saw 
frames  {first  revision) 

Specification  for  bolt 
clippers  {first  revision) 

Specification  for  snipenose 
pliers  (first  revision) 

Specification  for  brick  and 
mason's  chisels 


IS  No.  Title 

5684:  1970  Specification  for  pipe  vices 

(chain  type) 
5697  :  1970  Specification  for  ripping 

chisels 

5889  :  1994  Specification  for  vibratory 

plate  compactor  {first 
revision) 

5890  :  1970  Specification  for  mobile 

hot  mix  asphalt  plants,  light 
duty 

5891  :  1970  Specification  for  hand- 

operated  concrete  mixer 
5995  :  1971  Specification  for  pipe  grip 

pliers 
6007  :  1971  Specification  for  pipe  vices 

(hinged  type) 

6078  :  1986  Specification  for  line  man's 

pliers  {second  revision) 

6087  :  1971  Specification  for  metal 

cutting  shears 
6118  :  1991  Specification  for  multiple 

slip   joint    pliers    (first 

revision) 
6149  :  1984  Specification  for  single 

ended  open  jaw  adjustable 

wrenches  {first  revision) 

6375  :  1991  Specification  for  wood 

splitting  wedges  (first 
revision) 

6389  :  1998  Specification  for 

combination  wrenches  with 
equal  openings  {second 
revision) 

6428  :  1972  Specification  for  pile  frame 

6430  :  1985  Specification  for  mobile 

air    compressor  for 

construction  purposes  {first 
revision) 

6433  :  1972  Specification  for  guniting 

equipment 
6546  :  1989  Specification   for   claw 

hammers  (first  revision) 

6836  :  1973  Specification  for  hand 

snaps  and  set-ups  for  solid 
rivets 

6837  :  1973  Specification  for  three 

wheel  type  pipe  cutter 

6841  :  1973  Specification  for  wrecking 

bars 

6861  :  1973  Specification  for  engineers' 

scrapers 


68 


NATIONAL  BUILDING  CODE  OF  INDIA 


IS  No. 

Title 

6881  : 

1973 

Specification  for  link  type 
pipe  cutters 

6891  : 

1973 

Specification  for  carpenter' s 
auger  bits 

6892: 

1973 

Specification  for 
blacksmith's  brick-iron 

7041  : 

1973 

Specification  for  carpenter' s 
plain  brace 

7042: 

1973 

Specification  for  carpenter' s 
ratchet  brace 

7077: 

1973 

Specification  for  bending 
bars 

7958: 

1976 

Specification  for  hand  vices 

8202: 

1994 

Specification  for  carpenter' s 
wooden  bodied  planes  (first 
revision) 

8671  : 

1977 

Specification  for  nail  puller 

(31)  7293  : 

1974 

Safety  code  for  working  with 
construction  machinery 

IS  No. 

(32)  15183 

(Part  3)  :  2002 

(33)  15183 

(Part  2)  :  2002 

(34)  13935  :  1993 


(35)  13828  :  1993 


(36)  13827  :  1993 


(37)  4130:  1991 


Title 

Maintenance  management 
for  buildings  —  Guidelines: 
Part  3  Labour 

Maintenance  management 
for  buildings  —  Guidelines: 
Part  2  Finance 

Guidelines  for  repair  and 
seismic  strengthening  of 
buildings 

Improving  earthquake 
resistance  of  low  strength 
masonry  buildings  — 
Guidelines 

Improving  earthquake 
resistance  of  earthen 
buildings  —  Guidelines 

Safety  code  for  demolition 
of  buildings  {second 
revision) 


PART  7  CONSTRUCTIONAL  PRACTICES  AND  SAFETY 


69